DIRECTORATE OF EDUCATION

Govt. of NCT, Delhi

SUPPORT MATERIAL
(2020-2021)

Class : XI

CHEMISTRY
Under the Guidance of

Smt. Manisha Saxena

Secretary (Education)

Mr. Binay Bhushan

Director (Education)

Dr. Saroj Bala Sain

Addl. DE (School & Exam.)

Coordinators
Ms. Mukta Soni Dr. Raj Kumar Mr. Krishan Kumar
DDE (Exam) OSD (Exam) OSD (Exam)
 Production Team

Anil Kumar Sharma

Published at Delhi Bureau of Text Books , 25/2 Institutional Area, Pankha

Road, New Delhi-110058 by Prabhjot Singh, Secretary, Delhi Bureau of
Text Books and Printed by Arihant Offset, New Delhi-110043
MANISHA SAXENA
IAS

DO No. DE. 5/228/Exam/Message/S.M./2018

Dated

MESSAGE

The importance of adequate practice during examinations can never be

overemphasized. I am happy that support material for classes IX to XII has been
developed by the Examination Branch of Directorate of Education. This material is
the result of immense hard work, co-ordination and cooperation of teachers and
group leaders of various schools. The purpose of the support material is to impart
ample practice to the students for preparation of examinations. It will enable the
students to think analytically & rationally and test their own capabilities and level of
preparation.

The material is based on latest syllabus prepared by the NCERT and adopted
by the CBSE for the academic session 2020-21 and covers different levels of difficulty.
I expect that Heads of Schools and Teachers will enable and motivate students to
utilize this material during zero periods, extra classes and regular classes best to
their advantage.

I would like to compliment the team of Examination Branch for their diligent
efforts of which made it possible to accomplish this work in time. I also take this
opportunity to convey my best wishes to all the students for success in their
endeavours.

(MANISHA SAXENA)
BINAY BHUSHAN, IAS
.
 DIRECTORATE OF EDUCATION
Govt. of NCT, Delhi

SUPPORT MATERIAL
(2020-2021)

CHEMISTRY
Class : XI

NOT FOR SALE

PUBLISHED BY : DELHI BUREAU OF TEXTBOOKS

 Support Material Preparation Team
Class XI – Chemistry

S.No. Subject Expert Designation School

1. Dr. Hans Raj Modi Vice Principal RPVV, Link Road

Karol Bagh, New Delhi-5
2. Mr. Amit Kumar Manav PGT (Chem.) RDJK Govt. Co-Ed. SSS
Bhajan Pura, Delhi-53
3. Dr. Deepak Kumar Ruhela PGT (Chem.) RPVV, Surajmal Vihar
Delhi-92
4. Mr. Pradeep Gusain PGT (Chem.) RPVV, Gandhi Nagar
Delhi
5. Dr. Seema Bhardwaj PGT (Chem.) RPVV, Sector-10
Mudgal Dwarka, New Delhi
6. Mr. Ravindra Malik PGT (Chem.) SBV, Narela, Delhi

i
 Course Structure
Class : XI (Theory) (2020-21)
Chemistry
Total period (Theory 160 + Practical 60)

Time : 3 Hours] Total Marks : 70

Unit No. Title No. of Periods Marks

Unit I Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 12 11
Unit II Structure of Atom 14
Unit III Classification of Elements and 08 04
Periodicity in Properties
Unit IV Chemical Bonding and Molecular 14 21
Structure
Unit V States of Matter: Gases, Liquids and solids 12
Unit VI Chemical Thermodynamics 16
Unit VII Equilibrium 14
Unit VIII Redox Reactions 06 16
Unit IX Hydrogen 08
Unit X s -Block Elements 10
Unit XI p -Block Elements 14
Unit XII Organic Chemistry: Some Basic 14 18
Principles and Techniques
Unit XIII Hydrocarbons 12
Unit XIV Environmental Chemistry 06
Total 160 70

ii
 Unit I : Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 8 Periods
General Introduction: Importance and scope of chemistry.
Nature of matter, laws of chemical combination, Dalton’s atomic theory:
concept of elements, atoms and molecules.
Atomic and molecular masses, mole concept and molar mass,
percentage composition, empirical and molecular formula, chemical
reactions, stoichiometry and calculations based on stoichiometry.
Unit II : Structure of Atom 10 Periods
Bohr’s model and its limitations, concept of shells and subshells,
dual nature of matter and light, de Broglie’s relationship, Heisenberg
uncertainty principle, concept of orbitals, quantum numbers, shapes
of s, p and d orbitals, rules for filling electrons in orbitals - Aufbau
principle, Pauli’s exclusion principle and Hund’s rule, electronic
configuration of atoms, stability of half-filled and completely filled
orbitals.
Unit III : Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties
06 Periods
Modern periodic law and the present form of periodic table, periodic
trends in properties of elements -atomic radii, ionic radii, inert gas radii,
Ionization enthalpy, electron gain enthalpy, electronegativity, valency.
Nomenclature of elements with atomic number greater than 100
Unit IV : Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure 14 Periods
Valence electrons, ionic bond, covalent bond, bond parameters, Lewis
structure, polar character of covalent bond, covalent character of ionic
bond, valence bond theory, resonance, geometry of covalent molecules,
VSEPR theory, concept of hybridization, involving s, p and d orbitals
and shapes of some simple molecules, molecular orbital theory of
homonuclear diatomic molecules(qualitative idea only), hydrogen
bond.

Unit V : States of Matter: Gases, Liquids and Solids 18 Period

Three states of matter, intermolecular interactions, types of bonding,

melting and boiling points, role of gas laws in elucidating the
concept of the molecule, Boyle’s law, Charles law, Gay Lussac’s law,
Avogadro’s law, ideal behaviour, empirical derivation of gas equation,

iii
 Avogadro’s number, ideal gas equation. Deviation from ideal behaviour,
liquefaction of gases, critical temperature, kinetic energy and molecular
speeds (elementary idea)

Liquid State: vapour pressure, viscosity and surface tension (qualitative

idea only, no mathematical derivations)

Solid state: Classification of solids based on different binding

forces: molecular, ionic, covalent and metallic solids, amorphous and
crystalline solids (elementary idea). Unit cell in two dimensional and
three dimensional lattices, calculation of density of unit cell, packing
in solids, packing efficiency, voids, number of atoms per unit cell in a
cubic unit cell, point defects, electrical and magnetic properties.
Unit VI : Chemical Thermodynamics 16 Periods
Concepts of System and types of systems, surroundings, work, heat,
energy, extensive and intensive properties, state functions. First law
of thermodynamics -internal energy and enthalpy, heat capacity and
specific heat, measurement of ΔU and ΔH, Hess’s law of constant heat
summation, enthalpy of bond dissociation, combustion, formation,
atomization, sublimation, phase transition, ionization, solution
and dilution. Second law of Thermodynamics (brief introduction).
Introduction of entropy as a state function, Gibb’s energy change for
spontaneous and non- spontaneous processes, criteria for equilibrium.
Third law of thermodynamics (brief introduction).
Unit VII : Equilibrium 14 Periods
Equilibrium in physical and chemical processes, dynamic nature of
equilibrium, law of mass action, equilibrium constant,factors affecting
equilibrium- Le Chatelier’s principle, ionic equilibrium- ionization of
acids and bases, strong and weak electrolytes, degree of ionization,
ionization of poly basic acids, acid strength, concept of pH, Henderson
Equation, hydrolysis of salts (elementary idea), buffer solution,
solubility product, common ion effect (with illustrative examples).
Unit VIII: Redox Reactions 06 Periods
Concept of oxidation and reduction, redox reactions, oxidation number,
balancing redox reactions, in terms of loss and gain of electrons and
change in oxidation number, applications of redox reactions.

iv
Unit IX: Hydrogen 08 Periods
Position of hydrogen in periodic table, occurrence, isotopes, preparation,
properties and uses of hydrogen, hydrides-ionic covalent and interstitial;
physical and chemical properties of water, heavy water, hydrogen
peroxide -preparation, reactions and structure and use; hydrogen as a
fuel.
Unit X : s-Block Elements (Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals) 10 Periods
Group 1 and Group 2 Elements General introduction, electronic
configuration, occurrence, anomalous properties of the first element of
each group, diagonal relationship, trends in the variation of properties
(such as ionization enthalpy, atomic and ionic radii), trends in chemical
reactivity with oxygen, water, hydrogen and halogens, uses. Preparation
and Properties of Some Important Compounds: Sodium Carbonate,
Sodium Chloride, Sodium Hydroxide and Sodium Hydrogencarbonate,
Biological importance of Sodium and Potassium. Calcium Oxide and
Calcium Carbonate and their industrial uses, biological importance of
Magnesium and Calcium
Unit XI : p-Block Elements 18 Periods
General Introduction to p-Block Elements :
Group 13 Elements : General introduction, electronic configuration,
occurrence, variation of properties, oxidation states, trends in chemical
reactivity, anomalous properties of first element of the group, Boron -
physical and chemical properties, some important compounds, Borax,
Boric acid, Boron Hydrides, Aluminium: Reactions with acids and
alkalies, uses.
Group 14 Elements : General introduction, electronic configuration,
occurrence, variation of properties, oxidation states, trends in chemical
reactivity, anomalous behaviour of first elements. Carbon-catenation,
allotropic forms, physical and chemical properties; uses of some
important compounds: oxides. Important compounds of Silicon and a
few uses: Silicon Tetrachloride, Silicones, Silicates and Zeolites, their
uses.
Group 15 Elements : General introduction, electronic configuration,
occurrence, oxidation states, trends in physical and chemical properties;
Nitrogen preparation properties and uses; compounds of Nitrogen,
preparation and properties of Ammonia and Nitric Acid, Oxides of
v
 Nitrogen(Structure only) ; Phosphorus - allotropic forms, compounds
of Phosphorus: Preparation and Properties of Phosphine, Halides and
Oxoacids (elementary idea only).
Unit XII : Organic Chemistry -Some Basic Principles and Technique
14 Periods
General introduction, methods of purification, qualitative and
quantitative analysis, classification and IUPAC nomenclature of organic
compounds. Electronic displacements in a covalent bond: inductive
effect, electromeric effect, resonance and hyper conjugation. Homolytic
and heterolytic fission of a covalent bond: free radicals, carbocations,
carbanions, electrophiles and nucleophiles, types of organic reactions.
Unit XIII: Hydrocarbons 12 Periods
Classification of Hydrocarbons Aliphatic Hydrocarbons:
Alkanes - Nomenclature, isomerism, conformation (ethane only),
physical properties, chemical reactions including free radical
mechanism of halogenation, combustion and pyrolysis.
Alkenes - Nomenclature, structure of double bond (ethene), geometrical
isomerism, physical properties, methods of preparation, chemical
reactions: addition of hydrogen, halogen, water, hydrogen halides
(Markownikov's addition and peroxide effect), ozonolysis, oxidation,
mechanism of electrophilic addition.
Alkynes - Nomenclature, structure of triple bond (ethyne), physical
properties, methods of preparation, chemical reactions: acidic character
of alkynes, addition reaction of - hydrogen, halogens, hydrogen halides
and water.
Aromatic Hydrocarbons: Introduction, IUPAC nomenclature,
benzene: resonance, aromaticity, chemical properties: mechanism of
electrophilic substitution. Nitration, sulphonation, halogenation, Friedel
Craft's alkylation and acylation, directive influence of functional group
in monosubstituted benzene. Carcinogenicity and toxicity.
Unit XIV : Environmental Chemistry 06 Periods
Environmental pollution - air, water and soil pollution, chemical
reactions in atmosphere, smog, major atmospheric pollutants, acid rain,
ozone and its reactions, effects of depletion of ozone layer, greenhouse
effect and global warming- pollution due to industrial wastes, green
chemistry as an alternative tool for reducing pollution, strategies for
control of environmental pollution.

vi
PRACTICALS
Evaluation Scheme for Examination Marks
Volumetric Analysis 08
Salt Analysis 08
Content Based Experiment 06
Project Work 04
Class record and viva 04
Total 30

PRACTICAL SYLLABUS Total Periods 60

Micro-chemical methods are available for several of teh practical experiments.
Wherever possible such techniques should be used :
A. Basic Laboratory Techniques
1. Cutting glass tube and glass rod
2. Bending a glass tube
3. Drawing out a glass jet
4. Boring a cork
B. Characterization and Purification of Chemical Substances
1. Determination of melting point of an organic compound.
2. Determination of boiling point of an organic compound
3. Crystallization of impure sample of any one of the following: Alum,
Copper Sulphate, Benzoic Acid.
C. Experiments based on pH
(a) Any one of the following experiments :
- Determination of pH of some solutions obtained from fruit juices,
solution of known and varied concentrations of acids, bases and salts
using pH paper or universal indicator.
- Comparing the pH of solutions of strong and weak acids of same
concentration.
- Study the pH change in the titration of a strong base using universal
indicator.
(b) Study the pH change by common-ion in case of weak acid and weak bases.
D. Chemical Equilibrium.

vii
 CHEMISTRY (Code No. 043)
Question Paper Design
Class-XI (2020–21)

Time : 3 Hours Max. Marks : 70

S. Typology of Questions Very Short Short Long Total %
No. short Answer-I Answer-II Answer Marks Weightage
Answer (SA–I) (SA-II) (LA)
(VSA) (2 marks) (3 marks) (5 marks)
(1 marks)

1. Remembering : 2 1 1 – 7 10%
Exhibit memory of previously
learned material by recalling
facts, terms, basic concepts and
answers.
2. Understanding : 6 2 2 1 21 30%
Demonstrate understanding of
facts and ideas by organizing,
comparing, translating, inter-
preting, giving descriptions and
stating main ideas.
3. Applying : 6 2 2 1 21 30%
Solve problems to new situ-
ations by applying acquired
knowledge, facts, techniques
and rules in a different way.
4. Analyzing : 6 1 2 – 14 20%
Examine and break information
into parts by identifying motives
or causes. Make inferences and
find evidence to support gener-
alizations.
5. Evaluating : 1 2 2 – 11 16%
Present and defend opinions
by making judgments about
information, validity of ideas
or quality of work based on a
set of criteria.
6. Creating : – 1 – 1 7 10%
Compile information together
in a different way by combing
elements in a new pattern or
proposing alternative solutions.

TOTAL 20×1=20 7×2=14 7×3=21 3×5=15 70(37) 100%

viii
 Question Wise Break Up
Type of Ques. Mark per Ques. Total No. of Ques. Total Marks
VSA / Objective 1 20 20
SA-I 2 7 14
LA-I 3 7 21
LA-II 5 3 15
Total 37 70
1. No chapter was weightage. Care to be taken to cover all the chapters.
2. Suitable internal variations may be made for generating various templates
keeping the overall weightage to different form of questions and typology
of questions same.

Choice(s):
There will be no overall choice in the question paper.
However, 33% internal choices will be given in all the sections.

ix
 Chemistry - XI
Index

S. No. Chapter Name Page No.

1. Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 1

2. Structure of Atom 19
3. Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties 41
4. Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure 59
5. State of Matter : Gases, Liquids and Solids 74
6. Chemical Thermodynamics 88
7. Equilibrium 105
8. Redox Reactions 125
9. Hydrogen 140
10. s-Block Elements 158
11. p-Block Elements 170
12. Organic Chemistry : Some basic Principles and Techniques 182
13. Hydrocarbons 210
14. Environmental Chemistry 234
Sample Papers - I, II, III & IV 249-269

x
 Some Basic
Concepts of
Chemistry
FAST TRACK : QUICK REVISION

 Matter : Anything that has mass and occupies space.

 Precision : If refers to the closeness of various measurements for the same
quantity.
 Accuracy : It refers to the agreement of a particular value to the true value
of the result.
 Mass and weight : Mass of a substance is the amount of matter present in
body, while weight is the force exerted by gravity on an object. The mass
of a substance is constant whereas its weight may vary from one place to
another due to change in gravity.
 Volume : 1 L = 1 dm3 = 103cm3 = 10–3 m3

 Temperature : K = °C + 273.15; =

 Standard Temperature Pressure (STP) : 0°C (273.15 K) temperature

and 1 atm pressure.
 Normal Temperature Pressure (NTP) : 20°C (293.15 K) temperature
and 1 atm pressure.
 Standard Ambient Temperature Pressure (SATP) : 25°C (298.15 K)
temperature and 1 atm pressure
 Scientific otation : Expressing a number in the form N × 10n, and N
can vary between 1 to 9.99.
 Significant figures : These are meaningful digits which are known with
certainty.
 Laws of Chemical Combination :
Ø Law of Conservation of Mass (Antonie Lavoisier) : Mass can
neither be created nor be destroyed.
Ø La of efinite Proportions (Joseph Proust) : A given compound
always contains the same elements in the same proportion by mass.
 Ø Law of Multiple Proportions (John Dalton) : When two elements
combine to form two or more compounds, then the different masses
of one element, which combine with a fixed mass of the other, bear
a simple ratio to one another.
Ø Gay Lussac’s Law : When gases combine or are produced in a
chemical reaction, they do so in a simple ratio provided all gases
are in the same temperature and pressure.
e.g., 2H2 (g) + O2 (g) → 2H2O (g)
2 Vol 1 Vol 2 Vol
(at same T, P)
 Atomic Mass : It is defined as the average relative mass of an atom of an
element as compared to the mass of an atom of carbon – 12 taken as 12.
Atomic mass is represented by ‘u’ (unified mass).
1u = 1.66056 × 10–24 g
 Molecular mass : It is algebraic the sum of the atomic mass of the elements
present in the molecule.
For example : Molecular mass of CH4 = (1 × 12) + (4 × 1) = 16 u
 Avogadro Number : It is the amount of atoms or molecules present in
one mole of a substance.
Avogadro number (NA) = 6.022 × 1023 mol–1
 Molar Mass : The mass of one mole of a substance in grams is called its
molar mass.
For example : Molar mass of CH4 = (1 × 12) + (4 × 1) = 16g mol–1
 Mole (n) : It is amount of a substance that contains as many particles or
entities as the number of atoms in exactly 12 grams of pure C-12.
1 mole of a substance = Molar mass of substance = Avogadro’s Number
of chemical units = 22.4L volume at STP of gaseous substance
e.g., 1 mole of CH 4 = 16g of CH 4 = 6.022 × 10 23 molecules of
CH4 = 22.4L at STP

n= = = =

 Molar Volume (Vm) : It is volume occupied by one mole of gas at STP.

Molar volume of a gas = 22.4L at STP (273 K, 1atm) or 22.7L at STP (273
K, 1 bar)

2 Chemistry Class XI
 Calculating Molar Volume: PV = nRT
nRT 1mol 0.082L atm K -1mol-1 273K
∴V = = = 22.4L
P 1 atm
Or

V =
1 bar

 Percentage Composition : Mass % of the element

 Empirical Formula : It represents the simplest whole number ratio of

various atoms present in a compound. For e.g., CH is the empirical formula
of benzene.
 Molecular Formula : It shows the exact number of different of atoms
present in a molecule of a compound. For e.g., C6H6 is the molecular
formula of benzene.
 Relationship between empirical and molecular formulae :
Molecular formula = n × Empirical formula

Where; n=

 Information Conveyed by a chemical equation :

N2(g) + 3H2(g) → 2NH3(g)

(i) 1 molecule of N2 + 3 molecules of H2 → 2 molecules of NH3

(ii) 1 mole of N2 + 3 mole of H2 → 2 mole of NH3
(iii) 1 × 28g of N2 + 3 × 2 g of H2 → 2 × 17 g of NH3
(iv) 1 × 22.4L of N2 + 3 × 22.4L of H2 → 2 × 22.4L of NH3
at STP at STP at STP

 Limiting Reagent : It is the reactant which gets consumed first or limits

the amount of product formed.
 Mass Percent : It is the mass of the solute in grams per 100 grams of the
solution.

Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 3

 Mass percent=

 Parts per million (ppm) : It is part of solute per million part of solution
by mass.

ppm =

 Molarity (M) : It is number of moles of solute dissolved per litre (dm3)

of the solution.

Molarity =

Molarity equation : M1V1 = M2V2

(Before dilution) (After Dilution)
Molarity of a solution decreases on increasing temperature.
Molarity of pure water is 55.56 mol L–1
 Molality (m)—It is number of moles of solute dissolved per 1000g (1kg)
of solvent.
No. of moles of solute
Molality =
Mass
mass of
of solvent in kg
solvent in kg
Molality is independent of temperature.
 Mole Fraction(x) is the ratio of number of moles of one component to
the total number of moles (solute and solvents) present in the solution.

x1 = and x2 =
The sum of all the mole fractions in a solution is equal to one. i.e., x1 + x2 = 1

4 Chemistry Class XI
 MIND MAP
SOME BASIC OF CONCEPTS OF CHEMISTRY

Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 5

 MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (MCQ)
1. Which of the following is dependent of temperature ?
(a) Molarity (b) Molality
(c) Mole fration (d) Mass percentage
2. 4 g of NaOH dissolved in 100 ml solution. Molarity of the solution is
(a) 1M (b) 10 M
(c) 0.1 M (d) 4 M
3. Which has the maximum number of molecules among the following ?
(a) 44g of CO2 (b) 44g of O2
(c) 8g of H2 (d) 64g of SO2
4. 10 mol of Zn react with 10 mol of HCl. Calculate the number of moles
of H2 produced.
(a) 5 mol (b) 10 mol
(c) 20 mol (d) 2.5 mol
5. The number of oxygen atoms in 4.4g of CO2 is approximately
(a) 1.2 × 1023 (b) 6 × 1022
(c) 6 × 1023 (d) 12 × 1023
6. The molarity of a solution obtained by mixing 750 mL of 0.5 M HCl with
250 ml of 2 M HCl will be
(a) 0.975 M (b) 0.875 M
(c) 1.00 M (d) 1.175 M
7. Number of atoms of He in 100 u of He ( Atomic mass of He is 4 u)
(a) 25 (b) 50
(c) 100 (d) 400
8. 6.02 ×1020 molecules of urea are present in 100 mL of its solution. The
concentration of the solution is
(a) 0.02 M (b) 0.01 M
(c) 0.001 M (d) 0.1 M

6 Chemistry Class XI
9. A gaseous hydrocarbons gives upon combustion, 0.72 g of water and 3.08
g of CO2. The empirical formula of the hydrocarbon is :
(a) C6H5 (b) C7H8
(c) C2H4 (d) C3H4
10. The density of solution prepared by dissolving 120 g of urea ( Mol. mass
= 60 u) in 1000 g of water is 1.15 g/mL. The molarity of the solution is
(a) 0.50 M (b) 1.78 M
(c) 1.02 M (d) 2.05 M
Ans: 1. (a), 2. (a), 3. (b), 4. (a), 5. (a), 6. (b), 7. (a), 8. (b),
9. (b), 10. (d)

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. 17 g of NH3 gas will occupy a volume of _____________ cm at NTP.

2. The number of Li atoms in _____________ g. is 6.022×1024 atoms.
3. (1/12)th of the mass of carbon atom is _____________
4. Number of atoms of oxygen in 24 g of O3 is _____________
5. The number of moles of barium carbonate which contains 1.5 moles of
oxygen atoms is _____________
6. A mixture having 2 g of H2 and 32 g of oxygen occupies a volume of
_____________ at NTP.
7. If the phosphate of a metal has the formula MPO4 the formula of the
metallic sulphate is _____________
8. At NTP, the mass of 1 litre of gas is 3 g. Molecular mass of the gas is
_____________
9. The percentage mass of magnesium in chlorophyll is 2.68% The number
of magnesium atoms in 2 g of chlorophyll is _____________
10. The mass of one molecule of carbon dioxide is _____________
11 Percentage of nitrogen in urea is ___________
12 Number of carbon atoms present in 18 g of glucose ( C6H12O6)

Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 7

13. 0.5 mole of triatomic gas contains ____________________atoms.
14. A binary compound contains 50% A (at. mass = 16) and 50% B (at. mass
32). The empirical formula of the compound is _____________.
15. The number of hydrogen atoms in 60 u of ethane is____________
Ans: 1. 22400 2. 70 g 3. 1u
4. 9.033 × 1023 5. 0.5 6. 44.8 litre
7. M2(SO4)3 8 67.2 9. 1.34×1021
10. 7.3×10–23 11. 46.67 12. 3.61×1023
13. 9.033 × 1023 14. A2B 15. 7.226 × 1024

TRUE AND FALSE TYPE QUESTIONS

Write true or false for the following statements
1. Equal volumes of different gases under similar conditions of temperature
and pressure contain equal number of molecules.
2. 1 mole of C12H22O11 contain 22 hydrogen atoms.
3. itrogen forms five oxides. It proves the law of multiple proportions.
4. The atomicity of phosphorus is four.
5 Molarity change with change in temp.
6. Empirical formula = (Molecular formula)n.
7. Gram-atomic mass of an element may be defnined as the mass of
Avogadro’s number of atoms.
8. Gay-Lussac’s law of chemical combination is valid for all substances.
9. Avogadro’s number varies with temperature and pressure.
10. 18 g of water vapour and 18 g of ice will contain the same number of
molecules.
Ans: 1. (T) 2. (F) 3. (T) 4. (T) 5. (T)
6. (F) 7. (T) 8. (F) 9. (F) 10. (T)

8 Chemistry Class XI
 MATCH THE COLUMNS
1.
Column X Column Y
a. 8 g CH4 i. 0.1 mol
b. 1.7 g NH3 ii. 0.5 mol
c. HCHO iii. 40% carbon
d. C6H12O6 iv. Vapour density = 15

2.
Column X Column Y
a. Molarity i. For very dilute solution
b. Molality ii. No units
c. mole fraction iii. Mol L–1
d. ppm iv. independent of temperature

3.
Column X Column Y
a. 40 g of He i. 6.022×1023 atoms
b. 35 g of Li ii. 10 atoms
c. 40 u of He iii. 6.022×1024 atoms
d. 16 g of O2 iv. 3.011×1024 atoms

4.
Column X Column Y
a. Petrol i. Heterogenous mixture
b. Graphite ii. Compound
c. Sucrose iii. Element
d. Milk iv. Hamogeneous mixture

Ans: 1. a.(ii), b.(i), c.(iv), d.(iii) 2. a.(iii), b.(iv), c.(ii), d.(i)

3. a.(iii), b.(iv), c.(ii), d.(ii) 4. a.(iv), b.(iii), c.(ii), d.(i)

Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 9

 ASSERTION AND REASON TYPE QUESTIONS
Directions for Q. No.1-5
A If both Assertion & Reason are true and the reason is the correct
explanation of the assertion.
B If both Assertion & Reason are true but the reason is not the correct
explanation of the assertion.
C If Assertion is true statement but Reason is false.
D If both Assertion and Reason are false statements.

1. Assertion : A solution of table salt in a glass of water is homogeneous

Reason : A solution having same composition throughout is
heterogeneous
2. Assertion : The molecular weight of oxygen is 32 amu.
Reason : The atomic weight of oxygen is 16 amu
3. Assertion : No of moles of H2 in 0.224 L of hydrogen is 0.01 mole.
Reason : 22.4 L of H2 at STP contain 6.023 × 1023 moles.
4. Assertion : Atomic mass of Na is 23.
Reason : An atom of sodium is 23 times heavier than 1/12th mass of
C-12 isotope.
5. Assertion : Number of atoms of He in 60 u of He is 15.
Reason : Atomic weight of He is 4 u.
Ans: 1.C 2.A 3.C 4.A 5.A

ONE WORD ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS

1. What is the SI unit of density?
2. What is the SI unit of molarity?
3. Calculate the number of atoms in 32 u of He. [Ans. : 8]
4. What is the volume of 17 g of NH3 gas at STP? [Ans. : 223.4 L]
5. How many molecules of SO2 are present in 11.2 L at STP?
[Ans. : 3.011×1023]
6. Which has more number of atoms ? 1.0 g Na or 1.0 g Mg
[Ans. : 1.0 g Na]

10 Chemistry Class XI
7. How any oxygen atoms are present in 16 g of ozone (O3)?
[Ans. : 2.007 ×1023]
8. Calculate the number of molecules present in 22.0 g of CO2.
[Ans. : 3.011×1023]
9. A substance has molecular formula C6H12O6. What is its empirical formula.
10. Empirical formula of a compound X (Molar mass = 78 mol-1) is CH. Write
its molecular formula.

1-MARK QUESTIONS

1. Name two chemical compounds used in treatment of cancer.

2. What is AZT ? Mention its use in medical science.
3. Classify following as pure substances and mixtures : air, glucose, gold,
sodium and milk.
4. Which measurement is more precise 4.0g or 4.00g ? [Ans. 4.00 g]
5. How many significant figures are there in (i) 3.0 0 and (ii) 0.0025
[Ans. (i) 4 (ii) 2]
6. Express the following in the scientific notation : (i) 0.0048 (ii) 234,000
7. If ten volumes of dihydrogen gas react with five volumes of dioxygen
gas, how much volume of water vapour would be produced ?
[Ans. 10 volumes]
8. efine unified mass (u).
9. efine molar volume of a gas.
10. At STP, what will be the volume of 6.022 × l023 molecules of H2 ?
[Ans. 22.4L]
11. 1L of a gas at STP weighs 1.97g. What is molecular mass ?
[Ans. 44.128 g mol–1]
12. Write the relationship between empirical formula and molecular formula.
13. Which is more informative ? Empirical formula or Molecular formula.

Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 11

14. How are 0.5 mol Na2CO3 and 0.5 M Na2CO3 different from each other
15. Why molality is preferred over molarity of a solution ?
16. efine molarity of a solution.
17. hat is the effect of temperature on molarity of solution
18. What is limiting reactant in a reaction ?

2-MARKS QUESTIONS
1. Classify following substances as element, compounds and mixtures : water,
tea, silver, steel, carbon dioxide and platinum.
2. The body temperature of a normal healthy person is 37°C. Calculate its
value in°F.
3. At what temperature will both the Celsius and Fahrenheit scales read the
same value?
4. Convert 5L into m3.
5. hat does the following prefixes stand for :
(a) pico (b) nano (c) micro (d) deci
6. How many significant figures are present in the following :
(i) 4.00005
(ii) 0.004
7. Convert 450 pm’ into SI unit and write the answer in scientific notation
upto 2 significant figures.
[Ans. 4.5 × 10–10 m]
8. Hydrogen peroxide and water contain 5.93% and 11.2 % of hydrogen
respectively. Show that the data illustrate law of multiple proportions.
9. The density ( in g mL–1) of a 3.60 M sulphuric acid solution that is 29%
H2SO4 ( Molar mass = 98 g mol-1) by mass will be .......
[Ans. 1.21 g/mL]
10 The cost of table salt ( NaCl ) is Rs. 10 per Kg. calculate its cost per mole.
( Molar mass of NaCl is 58.5 gmol-1) [Ans. 0.58 Rs]
11 Calculate the mole fraction of the solute in a 1.00 molal aqueous
solution. [Ans. 0.0177]

12 Chemistry Class XI
12 Dissolving 120 g of urea ( Molar mass of urea = 60 g mol-1 ) in 1000 of
water gave a solution of density 1.15 g/mL. Calculate the molarity of the
solution. [Ans. 2.05 M]
13 Calculate the percentage of N in urea. (Molar mass of urea = 60 g
mol-1) [Ans. 46.66]
14 25 ml of 3.0 M HCl are mixed with 75 mL 0f 4.0 M HCl. If the volumes
are additive, the molarity of the final mixture will be. Ans. 3.75 M]
15 How many atoms and molecules are present in 124 gm of phosphorus
(P4) [Ans. Atoms = 4 NA & Molecules = NA]
16 45.4 L of dinitrogen reacted with 22.7 L of dioxygen and 45.4 L of nitrous
oxide was formed.
The reaction is given below : 2N2 (g) + O2 (g) —→ 2N2O (g)
Which law is being obeyed in this experiment? Write the statement of the
law.
17 Give one example each of a molecule in which empirical formula and
molecular formula is
(i) Same (ii) ifferent.
18 Calculate the number of moles in the following masses :
(i) 7.85g of Fe;
(ii) 7.9mg of Ca
19 Calculate the percent of carbon, hydrogen and oxygen in ethanol
(C2H5OH) [Ans. 52.14%, 13.13%, 34.73%]
20 How much copper can be obtained from 100 g of CuSO4 ? [Ans. 39.8g]
21 Calculate the amount of water (g) produced by the combustion of 16 g of
methane. [Ans. 36g]
22 How many moles of methane are required to produce 22 g CO2 (g) after
combustion? [Ans. 0.5 mol]
23 A solution is prepared by adding 2 g of a substance A to 18 g of water.
Calculate the mass per cent of the solute. [Ans. 10%]
24 Calculate molarity of water if its density is 1.00 g mL-1.
[Ans. 55.56 M]

Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 13

25 Calculate the molarity of NaOH in the solution prepared by dissolving its
4 g in enough water to form 250 mL of the solution. [Ans. 0.4 M]
26 The density of 3 M solution of NaCl is 1.25 g mL-1. Calculate molality of
the solution. [Ans. 2.8m]
27 NH3 gas can be prepared by Haber’s process as, N2(g) + 3H2 (g) →
2NH3(g). At a particular moment concentration of all the species is
2 moles; calculate the concentration of N2 and H2 taken initially.
[Ans. 3 mole, 5 moles]

3-MARKS QUESTIONS

1. Calculate the average atomic mass of Mg using the followinf data:

% Natural Abudance Molar mass
24Mg 80 24
25Mg 10 25
26Mg 10 26
2. The following data are obtained when dinitrogen and dioxygen react
together to form different compounds :
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
Mass of dinitrogen 14 14 28 28
Mass of dioxygen 16 32 32 80
Which law of chemical combination is obeyed by the above experimental
data ? Give its statement.
3. Calculate :
(i) Mass in gram of 5.8 mol N2O
(ii) Number of moles in 8.0 g of O2
(iii) Molar mass if 11.2 L at STP weigh 8.5 g.
[Ans. (i) 255.2 g (ii) 0.25 mol (iii) 17 g mol–1]
4. In three moles of ethane (C2H6), calculate the following :
(i) Number of moles of carbon atom,
(ii) Number of moles of hydrogen atoms,
(iii) Number of molecules of ethane.
[Ans. (i) 6 moles, (ii) 18 moles, (iii) 1.81×1024]

14 Chemistry Class XI
 5. 16 g of an ideal gas SOx occupies 5.6 L at STP. What is its molecular
mass ? What is the value of X ? [Ans. 64u, x = 2]
6. Calculate the number of moles :
(i) 5.0 L of 0.75 M Na2CO3
(ii) 7.85 g of Fe
(iii) 34.2 g of sucrose (C12H22O11)
[Ans. (i) 3.75, (ii) 0.14, (iii) 0.1]
7. Calculate the number of atoms in each of the following :
(i) 52 moles of Ar. (ii) 52u of He (iii) 52g of He.
[Ans. (i) 3.13 × 1025 (ii) 13 (iii) 7.83 × 1024]
8. Vitamin C is essential for the prevention of scurvy. Combustion of
0.2000g of vitamin C gives 0.2998g of CO2 and 0.819g of H2O. What is
the empirical formula of vitamin C ? [Ans. C3H4O3]
9. A compound contains 4.07% hydrogen, 24.27% carbon and 71.65%
chlorine. Its molar mass is 98.96 g. What are its empirical and molecular
formulas? [Ans. CH2C1, C2H4Cl2]
10. A compound made up of two elements A and B has A = 70%, B = 30%.
Their relative number of moles in the compound is 1.25 and 1.88,
calculate :
(i) Atomic masses of the elements A and B
(ii) Molecular formula of the compound , if its molecular mass is found to
be 160. [Ans. (i) 56 and 16, (ii) A2B3]
11. The reaction 2C + O2 —→ 2CO is carried out by taking 24.0 g of carbon
and 96.0 g of O2. Find out.
(i) Which reactant is left in excess ?
(ii) How much of it is left ?
(iii) How many grams of the other reactant should be taken so that nothing
is left at the end of the reaction ? [Ans. (i) O2, (ii) 64 g, (iii) 72]
12. A 10 g sample of a mixture of calcium chloride and sodium chloride is
treated with Na2CO3 to precipitate calcium as calcium carbonate. This
CaCO3 is heated to convert all the calcium to CaO and the final mass of
CaO is 1.62 g. Calculate % by mass of NaCl in original solution.
[Ans. 67.9%]

Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 15

13. 3.0 g of H2 react with 29.0 g of O2 yield H2O.
(i) Which is the limiting reagent.
(ii) Calculate the maximum amount of H2O that can be formed
(iii) Calculate the amount of reactant left unreacted
[Ans. H2 , 26.8g H2O & 5.2 g O2]
14 Zinc and hydrochloric acid react according to the reaction:
Zn(s) + 2HCl(aq) —→ ZnCl2(aq) + H2(g)
If 0.30 mol Zn are added to hydrochloric acid containing 0.52 mol of HCl,
How many moles of H2 are produced ?
[ HCl is limiting reagent; H2 formed = 0.36 mol]
15 How many moles of Lead (II) chloride will be formed from a reaction
between 6.5 g of PbO and 3.2 g of HCl ? [ Atomic mass of Pb = 207 U]
[Ans. 0.029 mole]
16 What volume of oxygen at N.T.P is needed to cause the complete
combustion of 200 ml of acetylene ?Also calculate the volume of carbon
dioxide formed. [Ans. 500 mL of O2 & 400 mL of CO2]

5-MARKS QUESTIONS

1 (i) A black dot used as a full stop at the end of a sentence has a mass of
about one attogram. Assuming that the dot is made up of carbon,
calculate the approximate number of carbon atoms present in the dot.
[Hint : 1 attogram = 10–18g] [Ans. 5.02×104]
(ii) Which one of the following will have largest number of atoms ?
(a) 1g Au (s) (b) 1g Na (s) (c) 1g Li (s) (d) 1g of Cl2(g)
[Ans.. (i) 39.81 g (ii) 1 g of Li]
2. (i) hat is the difference between empirical formula and molecular
formula ?
(ii) A welding fuel gas contains carbon and hydrogen only. Burning a
small sample of it in oxygen gas 3.38 g carbon dioxide, 0.690 g of
water and no other products. A volume of 10.0 L (measured at STP)
of this welding gas is found to weigh 11.6 g. Calcuate
(i) Empirical formula, (ii) molar mass of the gas, and (iii) Molecular
formula. [Ans. (i) CH, (ii) 26 g mol–1, (iii) C2H2]

16 Chemistry Class XI
3. (i) hat is the difference between Molarity and Molality.
(ii) The Molarity of a solution of sulphuric acid is 1.35 M. Calculate its
molality. (The density of acid solution is 1.02 g cm–3).
[Ans.. 1.52 m]
4. (i) efine : (a) Mole fraction (b) Mass percentage.
(ii) If the density of methanol is 0.793 kg L–1, what is its volume needed
for making 2.5 L of its 0.25 M solution ? [Ans. 0.0025 L]

HOTS QUESTIONS

1 In a compound CxHyOz , the mass % of C and H is 6:1 and the amount

of oxygen present is equal to the half of the oxygen required to react
completely CxHy. Find the empirical formula of the compound.
[Ans. C2H4O3]
2 A crystalline salt when heated becomes anhydrous and loses 51.2 % of
its weight. The anhydrous salt on analysis gave the following percentage
composition
Mg = 20.0% , S = 26.6 % , O = 53.33 %
Calculate the molecular formula of the anhydrous salt and the crystalline
salt. Molecular weight of the anhydrous salt is 120.
[Ans. MgSO4.7H2O]
3 An LPG cylinder weighs 14.8 Kg when empty. When full, it weighs
29.0 kg and shows a pressure of 2.5 atm. In the course of use at 27°C,
the weight of cylinder is reduced to 23.2 Kg. Find the volume of
n-butane in cubic meters used up at 27°C and 1 atm (Molecular weight of
n-butane = 58). [Ans. 2.463 m3]
4 2.5 g of CaCO3 was placed in 50 ml of a solution of HCl.1.05 g of CaCO3
was left after the reaction. Calculate:
(a) the weight of HCl per litre
(b) the Molarity of HCl [Ans. (a) 21.17 g, (b) 0.58 M]

Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 17

 UNIT TEST
Time allowed : 1 hour Maximum Marks : 20
General instructions :
(i) All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Maximum marks carried by each question are indicated against it.

1. If 30 mL of H2 and 20 mL of O2 react to form water, what is left at (1)

the end of the reaction ?
(a) 10 mL of H2 (b) 5 mL of H2
(c) 10 mL of O2 (d) 5 mL of O2
2. 7.5 grams of a gas occupy 5.6 litres of volume at STP the gas is (1)
(a) NO (b) N2O (c) CO (d) CO2
3. What is AZT ? Write its use. (1)
4. Why molarity is preferred over molarity in expressing the concen- (1)
tration of solution ?
5. Which has more number of atoms ? 1.0 g Na or 1.0g Mg? (1)
6. How many atoms and molecules are present in 124 g of phosphorus (P4)? (2)
7. (a) Write the name of two life saving drugs. (2)
(b) efine accuracy and precision.
8. A sample of drinking water was found to be severely contaminated with
chloroform CHCl3. The level of contamination was 15 ppm (by mass).
(a) Express this in percent by mass.
(b) Determine the molarity of chloroform in the water sample. (3)
9. A compound contains 4.07% hydrogen, 24.27% carbon and 71.65%
chlorine. Its molar mass is 98.96 g. What are its empirical and
molecular formula ? (3)
10. (a) Explain the following terms:
(i) Gay Lussac’s law (ii) Limiting reagent

(b) 3.0 g of H2 react with 30.0 g of O2 yield H2O.

(i) Which is the limiting reagent?
(ii) Calculate the maximum amount of H2O that can be formed.
(iii) Calculate the amount of reactant left unreacted. (5)
*****
18 Chemistry Class XI
 Chapter - 2 Structure
Structure of
ofAtom
Atom
FAST TRACK : QUICK REVISION

• Information about fundamental particles of atom

Name of UNIT Electron Proton Neutron
Constant
Mass amu 0.000546 1.00728 1.008665
kg 9.109 × 10–31 1.673 × 10–27 1.675 × 10–27
Charge Coloumbs – 1.602 × 10–19 + 1.602 × 10–19 Zero
esu – 4.8 × 10–10 + 4.8 × 10–10 Zero
Relative –1 +1 Zero
Charge

• Electromagnetic radiations : Energy emitted from any source (in forms

of waves) in which electric and magnetic fields oscillated perpendicular to
each other and travelling with a velocity of light is known as EM radiation.
• Characteristics of waves :
(a) Wavelength : The distance of one crest and
one trough in a wave. Denoted by ‘ ’.
(b) requency : umber of waves passing
through a given point in one second.

Denoted by .

(c) Amplitude : The height of crest or depth of a trough denoted by a’.

(d) Wave Number : umber of waves per unit length denoted by

= (or m–1)
 (e) Velocity : Linear distance travelled by a wave in one second.

velocity of light c = =

∴ =

• Energywise order for EM radiation.

cosmic < rays < X rays < UV < VIBGYOR < IR < Microwaves < Radiowaves
→
(Increases) (Decreases) Energy (Decreases)
• Photon : A packet or particle of light energy is knows as Photon.
• Planck’s quantum theory : The energy emitted or absorbed by a source
is discontinuous in form of small packet of energy, called quantum.
Quantum of light is called photon.
E v
E = hv (h = Planck's constant)
E = nhv (h = 6.626×10–34 J sec)
If ‘n’ photons are emitted E nh

Photo electric e ect : The phenomenon of ejection of electrons from a

metal surface when a light of suitable frequency falls on metal surface.

h –h 0 = mv2

h Energy of incident light on metal surface.

h 0 Work function of metal.

mv2 Kinetic energy by which e– is emitted from metal surface.

• de Broglie equation : All material particles in motion also exhibit wave like
properties.
h h
mv p
or microscopic particles mass is very less therefore avelength of wave
associated with it can be detected.

20 Chemistry Class XI
 or macroscopic particles mass is large, of wave associated with it can
not be detected. Hence dominant wave character.
Hence microscopic bodies have dual nature, where as macroscopic bodies
have particle nature.

Heisenberg's Uncertainty Principle

It is impossible to determine the exact position and velocity of a moving
subatomic particle simultaneously with accuracy.

x×m v

x uncertainty in position
v = uncertainty in velocity

Bohr’s theory for H [H like one e– systems He+; Li2+]

(1) e– revolving round the nucleus in circular path stationary state SHE
with a definite angular momentum Here n = no. of shell of e– and
with definite energy

En = – 2.18 × 10–18

(2) As n increases, Energy of e– becomes less ve ue to less force of Proton

attraction
As n decreases, Energy of e– becomes More ve ue to more force of
attraction by protons
(3) In infinity shell e– has zero force of attraction therefore zero energy.
(4) Electron energy only changes by definite values E = Ef – Ei.

Hydrogen spectrum : When e– in hydrogen atom is provided energy it gets

excited to higher shell from ground state, it comes back to ground state by
emitting energy in definite values.
“Quanta” : The emission of light energy is known as emission spectra. It
corresponds to each atom depending upon which energy shell e– is excited.

Structure of Atom 21
 It is discontinuous spectra as ’ of light radiations do not merge with each
other like in VIBG OR (Continous Spectra).
When e– falls from any excited state to

1,0 ,6 8 R = Rydberg constant = 109678 cm–1

ni 1, nf 2, 3, 4, .... yman series (UV)

ni 2, nf 3, 4, 5, .... Balmer series (VIBG OR)

ni 3, nf 4, 5, 6 Paschen series IR.

ni 4, nf 5, 6, Bracket series IR.

ni 5, nf 6, , 8 Pfund series IR.

Quantum numbers : The noumbers which completely define the state of

e– in an atom.
(1) Principal Quantum No. : It describes the distance of e– from nucleus ‘n’
i.e., defines the shell no. It is denoted by ‘n’.
n 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, .....
, , M, , O .....
(2) Azimuthal (l) Quantum No. : It defines the path of e– decided by angular
momentum of e–. Each angular momentum value corresponds to one
subshell. The no. of subshells in a shell is 0 to n – 1.
n l (0 to n-1)
1 0 l=0 ‘s’ subshell

2 0, 1 l=1 ‘p’ subshell

3 0, 1, 2 l=2 ‘d’ subshell

4 0, 1, 2, 3 l=3 ‘f ’ subshell

All subshells are wave functions for locating e–.

In the same shell energy increase s < p < d < f.

22 Chemistry Class XI
(3) Magnetic Quantum No. : It gives the no. of magnetic orientations
an e– can have in a subshell. That is number of orbitals in a sub-shell.
ms = –l........o........+ l = (2l + 1).

(4) Spin Quantum No. : An e– is continuously spinning on its own axis.

1 1
The value of s = or –
2 2
An orbital can have maximum two e– one with clockwise and other with
anticlockwise spin.
Aufbau principle
(a) Electrons are filled in increasing order of energy of sub-shell.
(b) As ‘n + l’value increases energy of e– increases in that sub-shell.
(c) For two sub-shells with same ‘n + l’ value, as n’ value increases
energy of e– increases.
Pauli’s principle
No two electrons can have same set of four quantum numbers in an atom.

Hund’s rule of maximum multiplicity

The pairing of e– in degenerate orbitals (different orbitals with same energy)
will get paired only once they have been singly occupied with same spin.

IMPORTANT POINTS
The filling of e– in subshells follows this order. (As per Aufbau principle)
(A) 1s < 2s < 2p < 3s < 3p < 4s < 3d < 4p < 5s < 4d < 5p < 6s < 4f < 5d < 6p
< 7s < 5f < 6d < 7p
(B) Half filled and completely filled subshells have more stability than
incompletely filled subshells.
Cr Ar 4s1 3d5
Cu Ar 4s1 3d10
(C) As the shell no. inc. size of subshell increases e.g., size of (2s > 1s) (3p
> 2p) (4d > 3d)

Structure of Atom 23
 ( ) The region in an orbital where probability of finding the e– is zero is known
as Nodal plane (or Node).
The no. of radial nodes n – l – 1 and Angular Nodes = l,
Total nodes = n–1.

(E) (psi) 2(psi square)

A wave function for The square of wave function where
locating an electron the probability of finding the e– is
maximum.
Each value of 2 is a region and defines
one orbital

(F) Orbit Orbital

(1) A definite distance from (1) A probability region for locating
the nucleus for finding the e– around the nucleus.
the e– e– as a particle . It is a wave function e– as a wave
(1) It has definite size and (2) It does not define definite size.
e– in this orbit has But only a boundary region diagram
definite energy. of a wave for locating the e–.

24 Chemistry Class XI
MIND MAP - STRUCTURE OF ATOM

Structure of Atom 25
 MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (MCQ)
1. Packet of energy is called
(a) Electron (b) Photon
(c) Position (d) Proton
2. Orbital which is not possible
(a) 2p (b) 3d
(c) 3s (d) 3f
3. the magnetic quantum number of an atom is related to the
(a) size of the orbital (b) spin angular momentum
(c) orbital angular momentum (d) orientation of the orbital in space
4. The principal quantum number of an atom is related to the
(a) size of the orbital (b) spin angular momentum
(c) orbital angular momentum (d) orientation of the orbital in Spence
5. The designation of an orbital with in = 4 and 1 = 3
(a) 4s (b) 4p
(c) 4d (d) 4f
6. hat transition in the hydrogen spectrum would have the same wavelength
as the Balmer transition n = 4 to n = 2 in the He+ spectrum
(a) n = 4 to n =1 (b) n = 3 to n = 2
(c) n = 3 to n = 1 (d) n = 2 to n = 1
. The wave number of first line of Balmer series of hydrogen in 15200 cm-1.
The wave number of the first Balmer line of i2+ ion is
(a) 15200 cm-1 (b) 60800 cm-1
(c) 76000 cm-1 (d) 136,800 cm-1
8. An electron is moving in Bohr's orbit. Its de Broglie wavelength is . What
is the circumference of the forth orbit
(a) 2/ (b) 2
(c) 3 (d) 3/

26 Chemistry Class XI
 . hich of the following statements in relation to the hydrogen atom is correct
(a) 3s-orbital is lower in energy than 3p-orbital
(b) 3p-orbital is lower in energy than 3-d-orbital
(c) 3s and 3p orbitals all have the same energy.
(d) 3s, 3p and 3d orbitals all have the same energy.
10. or principle quantum number, n 4, the total number of orbitals having
1 = 3 is
(a) 3 (b) 7
(c) 5 (d) 9
11. The number of d-electrons retained in Fe2+ (At. no. of Fe = 26) ion is
(a) 3 (b) 4
(c) 5 (d) 6
12. Pauli exclusion principle helps to calculate the maximum number of electrons
that can be accommodated in any
(a) orbital (b) subsell
(c) shell (d) All of these
Ans. 1. (b), 2. (d), 3. (d), 4. (a), 5. (d), 6. (d), . (d), 8. (c), . (d),
10. (b), 11. (d), 12. (a)
FILL IN THE BLANK
1. Bohr’s theory is based on ________ of radiation.
2. The angular momentum of the electron in the 4th energy shell in the hydrogen
atom is ________.
3. ines of Balmer series appear in region.
4. The maximum number of electrons in e3+ (At. No. 26) is ________.
5. Li2+ and He+ ions have spectrum similar to atom.
6. Bohr’s atomic theory is not able to explain the atomic spectra of atoms
containing ________ electron.
. An electron in the first shell will have stability and
energy than an electron in the third shell.
Structure of Atom 27
8. The space or three-dimensional region round the nucleus where there is
maximum probability of finding an electron of specific energy is called
an____
9. According to ____ no two electrons in an atom will have all the four quantum
numbers ____
10. hen there are two electrons in the same orbital they have spins.
11. The s-subhells have shape and the p-subshells have
12. The maximum number of electrons on a subshell is equal to where
l = ______
2h
Ans. 1. Planck’s theory 2.
3. Visible 4. 23
5. H-atom 6. more than 1
. arger, lower 8. orbital
. Pauli exclusion principle similar
10. Opposite
11 Spherical, dumb bell shape.
12. 2l 1 azimuthal quantum numbers

TRUE AND FALSE TYPE QUESTIONS

Write true or false for the following statements
1. Bohr’s theory cannot explain the spectra of multi-electron atoms.
2. Bohr’s theory based on the Planck’s quantum theory.
3. Size of orbital is determined by principal quantum number.
4. Fe2+ ion has more number of unpaired electrons than e3+.
5. The outer electronic configuration of chromium atom is 3d44s2.
6. The designation of an orbital n=4 and l=0 is 4s.
. All photons of light have same energy.
8. Fe3+ has 3d5 configuration.

28 Chemistry Class XI
9. The number of subshells is always equal to the order of the orbit.
10. Two electrons in the same orbital has antiparallel spin.
11. The second orbit in He+ ion has radius as the first orbit in hydrogen atom.
12. Heisenberg principle is applicable to microscopic particles.
13. 3s orbital has 2 radial nodes.

Ans. 1. (T) 2. (T) 3. (T) 4. (F) 5. (F) 6. (T) 7. (F)

8. (T) .( ) 10. (T) 11. (T) 12. (T), 13. (T)

MATCH THE COLUMNS

1. Match the following
List-I List-II
a. yman series p. Visible region
b. Balmer series q. Infrared region
c. Paschen series r. Absorption spectrum
d. Brackett series s. Ultraviolet region

2. Match the following

List-I List-II
a. Principal quantum number p. Spin of electrons
b. Azimuthal quantum number q. Size of orbital
c. Magnetic quantum number r. Orientation of the orbital
d. Spin quantum number s. Shape of the orbital

3. Match the following

List-I List-II
a. 2s p. ough not shape
b. 2px q. Spherical
c. 3dxy r. Dumb bell
d. 3dz2 s. Double dumb bell

Structure of Atom 29
4. Match the following
List-I List-II
a. 2s p. Two nodal planes
2
b. q. One radial node
c. Heisenberg’s uncertainty r. Electron probability density
principle
d. 3dyz s. Microscopic particles

ASSERTION AND REASON TYPE QUESTIONS

Directions: (Questions 1 to 4)
A. If both Assertion & Reason are true and the reason is the correct
explanation of the assertion.
B. If both Assertion & Reason are true but the reason is not the
correct explanation of the assertion.
C. If Assertion is true statement but Reason is false.
D. If both Assertion and Reason are false statements.

1. Assertion : Number of orbitals in 3rd shell is 9.

Reason : umber of orbitals for a particular value of n n2.
2. Assertion : Two nodal planes are present in 3dxy.
Reason : umber of nodal planes l
3. Assertion : The energy of an electron is largely determined by its principal
quantum number.
Reason : The principal quantum number is a measure of the most probable
distance of finding the electrons around the nucleus.
4. Assertion : An orbital cannot have more than two electrons, moreover, if
an orbital has two electrons they must have opposite spins.
Reason : No two electrons in an atom can have same set of all the four
quantum numbers.

Ans. 1. A 2. A 3. A 4. A

30 Chemistry Class XI
 ONE WORD ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS
1. Write the name of the theory which explain the wave nature of light.
2 rite the name of the theory which explain the Black body radiations
and photo electric effect
3 If the length of the crest of a wave is 4 pm. rite the wavelength of this
wave. Ans.8 pm
4. A radiation emitted from a hot iron is photon or quantum
5. Out of the d orbitals which does not have four lobes
6. hat is the lowest value of n that allows g orbitals to exist
. hich quantum number is not obtained from solution of Schr dinger wave
equation
8. hich of the following orbitals are possible
1p, 2s, 2p and 3f
9. Write the name of non-directional subshell.
10. Write the name of quantum number which determines the orientation of
orbitals
11. rite the name of quantum number which determines the shape of orbitals.
12. How many orbitals are present in g’ subshell

1-MARK QUESTIONS
1 Write the relation between frequency and wave number.
2 Cs shows maximum photoelectric effect, why
3 istinguish between a photon and a quantum.
4 The line spectrum of an element is known as fingerprints of its atom.
Comment.
5 hat is the value of the Bohr’s radius for the third orbit of hydrogen atom
6 hat type of metals are used in photoelectric cell Give one example.
Ans. ith large size, less work function.
hich series of lines of the hydrogen spectrum lie in the visible region’
8 Mention the physical significance of and 2.

hy did Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle replace the concept of definite

orbit by the concept of probability
Structure of Atom 31
10. hat is uncertain in uncertainty principle
11. Can a moving cricket ball have a wave character ustify your answer.
12. Heisenberg uncertainty principle has no significance in our everyday life.
Explain.
13. rite the Schrodinger wave equation.
14. hy uncertainty in position is more when uncertainty in velocity is less for
an electron
15. hat are the four quantum numbers of 1 th electron of copper
(Given : Atomic number of copper 2 )
16. How many electrons will be present in the sub-shells having ms, value
of 1 2 for n 4
1 . rite the electronic configuration of i3+. (At. No. of Ni = 28)
18. How many radial and angular nodes are present in 2p orbital.
Ans. Radial nodes 0, Angular nodes 1

2-MARKS QUESTIONS
Q. 1. efine black body and black body radiations.
Q. 2. Give the essential postulates of Bohr’s model of an atom. How did it
explain
(i) the stability of the atom
(ii) origin of the spectral lines in H-atom
Q. 3. hat is quantisation How quantisation of energy was introduced
in Bohr’s model
Q. 4. hat transition in the hydrogen spectrum would have the same
wavelength as the Balmer transition n = 4 to n = 2 of He+spectrum
Ans. n1 = 1 and n2 2
Q. 5. What transition of Li2+ spectrum will have the same wavelength as
that of the second line of Balmer series in He+spectrum
Ans. n2 = 6 to n1 3
Q. 6. Calculate the energy required for the process
He+(g) ——→ He2+ (g) + e–

32 Chemistry Class XI
 The ionization energy for the H atom in the ground state is 2.18 ×
10–18 J atom–1 Ans. 8.72 × 10–18
Q. 7. Calculate the wave number for the longest wavelength transition in
the Balmer series of atomic hydrogen. Ans. 1.523 × 106 m–1
Q. 8. To which orbit the electron in H atom will jump on absorbing 12.1
eV energy Ans. 3rd orbit
Q. 9. Calculate the energy associated with the first orbit of He+. What is
the radius of this orbit Ans. 54.38 eV, 0.2645
Q. 10. hat is the distance of separation between 3rd and 4th orbit of
H-atom Ans. 3. 03
Q. 11. The energy of electron in the first Bohr’s orbit is 13.6 eV. Calculate
the energy of electron in the first excited state. Ans. 3.4 eV
Q. 12. Calculate the number of protons emitted in 10 hours by a 60 sodium
lamp emitting radiations of wavelength 6000 .
Q. 13. hich one has a higher energy, a photon of violet light with wavelength
4000 or a proton of red light with wavelength 000
[Given. h = 6.62 × 10–34 J sec.]
Q. 14. A 100 watt bulb emits monochromatic light of wavelength 400 nm.
Calculate the number of protons emitted per second by the bulb.
Ans. 2.012 × 1020 s–1
Q. 15. hat are the maximum number of emission lines when the excited
electron of a H atom in n 4 drops to the ground state Ans. 6
Q. 16. hich has more energy, light radiation of wavelength 400 pm or light
radiation of frequency 1015 Hz
Q. 17. Find the energy of electron in 4th shell of Li2+ ion.
Q. 18. What is the wave number of an electron with shortest wavelength
radiation in yman spectrum of He+ ion
Q. 19. Write short note on :
(a) Continuous and discontinuous spectrum.
(b) Absorbtion and emission spectrum.
Q. 20. Calculate the mass of the photon with wavelength of 3.6 .
Ans. 6.135 × 10–29 kg

Structure of Atom 33
 Q. 21. Calculate the mass of the photon with wavelength of 5 pm.
Q. 22. On the basis of uncertainty principle show that an electron cannot
exist with in atomic nucleus. (Given : Nuclear radius = 10–I5 m)
Hint : Taking 10–15 m as x, the v comes much higher than the
velocity of light and hence is not possible
Q. 23. Explain why the uncertainty principle is significant only from the
motion of subatomic particles and is negligible for macroscopic
particles
Q. 24. ist two differences between orbit and orbital .
Q. 25. Show that the circumference of the Bohr orbit for the hydrogen atom
is an integral multiple of the de Broglie wavelength associated with
the electron revolving around the orbit
Q. 26. Comment on “Bohr’s model is against the Heisenberg uncertainty
principle .
Q. 27. hat are the similarities and difference in 2s and 2px orbitals and 1s
and 2s orbitals
Q. 28. raw shape of d x 2 y2
orbital.
Q. 29. On the basis of Pauli’s exclusion principle show that the maximum
number of electrons in the M -shell (n = 3 ) of any individual atom
is 18.
Q. 30. Designate each subshell with n = 4.
Q. 31. ist the possible values for all the quantum numbers for the following
subshell.
(a) 2p (b) 4f
Q. 32. rite down the electronic configuration of e3+ and Ni2+. How many
unpaired electrons are present (Given Atomic number, e 26,
Ni = 28).
Q. 33. Out of principal, angular, magnetic and spin quantum number, which
quantum number determines the
(a) Shape of the orbital
(b) Number of orbitals in an orbit
(c) Size of the orbital
(d) Spin orientation of the electron.

34 Chemistry Class XI
Q. 34. hat is the Hund’s rule of maximum multiplicity Explain with
suitable example.
Q. 35. Explain why :
(a) The three electrons present in 2p subshell of nitrogen remain
unpaired.
(b) Cr has configuration 3d5 4s1 and not 3d4 4s2.
Q. 36. (a) hat is difference between 'l' and ' '
(b) Nitrogen has 7 proton, electron and 7 neutrons. Calculate the
number of electron, protons and neutrons in 3– ion.
Q. 37. hich one is having higher energy
(a) Last electron of Cl– or last electron of O2–.
(b) n 4, l = 3 or n 5, l = 2.

3-MARKS QUESTIONS
Q. 1.(i) The energy associated with the first orbit in the hydrogen atom is
– 2.18 × 10–18 J atom-1. What is the energy associated with the fourth
orbit
(ii) Calculate the radius of Bohr’s third orbit for hydrogen atom.
Ans.– 1.36 × 10–19 J atom–l .4. 61 nm
Q. 2. A bulb emits light of wave length 4500 . The bulb is rated as 150
watt and 8 of the energy is emitted as light. How many photons are
emitted by the bulb per second Ans. n = 27.2 × 1018
Q. 3. When light with a wavelength of 400 nm falls on the surface of sodium,
electrons with a kinetic energy of 1.05 × 105 J mol-1 are emitted.
(a) What is the minimum energy needed to remove an electron from
sodium
(b) hat is the maximum wavelength of light that will cause a
photoelectron to be emitted
Ans. a = 3.2255 × 1019 , b 616 nm
Q. 4. Compare the frequency of light radiations emitted when electron falls
from 5th shell to the 2nd shell in Li2+ ion and electron falls from 4th
shell to the 1st shell in He+ ion.

Structure of Atom 35
 Q. 5. Calculate the number of waves made by Bohr electron in one complete
revolution in its third orbit. Ans. 3
Q. 6. What should be the ratio of velocities of CH4 and O2 molecules
so that they are associated with de Broglie waves of equal
wavelength Ans. 2
Q. 7. Calculate the wavelength of an electron that has been accelerated in
a particle accelerator through a potential difference of 1 kv.
[Given 1eV = 1.6 × 10–19 J] Ans. 3.87 × l0–7 m
Q. 8. (i) iscuss the similarities and differences between a 1s and 2s orbital.
(ii) raw the shape of d z2 .
Q. 9. Calculate the wavelength of a tennis ball of mass 60 gm moving with
a velocity of 10 m per second. (h = 6.626 × 10–34 kg m2 s–1)
Ans. 10–3 metre
Q. 10. Calculate the wavelength of 1000 kg rocket moving with a velocity
of 3000 km/hr. (h = 6.626 × 10–34 kg m2 s–1)
Ans. 7.9512 × 10–40 m
Q. 11. Calculate the uncertain it in the velocity of a cricket ball of mass
150 g, if uncertainity in its position is of the order of 1 .
Ans. 3.5 × 10–24 m s1
Q. 12. (a) What is de-Broglie wavelength for an electron moving with
velocity of light
(b) hat is the angular momentum of electron in 5th shell
Q. 13. Two particles A and B have wavelength A = 5 × 10–10 m and B =
10 × 1010 m. ind their frequency, wave number and energies. hich
has more penetrating power and why
Q. 14. (a) hich has max. uncertainty regarding position and why
Electron, proton and neutron.
(b) Find the number of waves associated with a light radiation of
time period 5 ns.
Q. 15. If an electron in He+ has angular momentum of 5h/2 . Find its energy
and wavelength associated with it. Find the kinetic energy of this
electron.

36 Chemistry Class XI
Q. 16 .(i) An atomic orbital has n 2. hat are the possible values of l and ml
(ii) List the quantum numbers (m1 and l) of electrons for 3d orbital.
(iii) hich of the following orbitals are possible
2d, 1s, 2p and 3f.
Q. 17. (a) rite the maximum number of electron in a subshell with l = 3 and
n = 4.
(b) rite the maximum number of electron that can be associated with
the following set of quantum numbers
n 3, l = 1 and ml = – 1
(c) rite the maximum number of electron that can be accomodated in
an atom in which the highest principal quantum number value is 4.
Q. 18. (i) rite the electronic configurations of the following ions :
(a) H– (b)Na+ (c)O2– (d) F–
(ii) What are the atomic numbers of elements whose outermost electrons
are represented by (a) 3s1(b) 2p3 and (c) 3p5
(iii) hich atoms are indicated by the following configurations
(a) He 2s1 (b) e 3s2 3p3 (c) Ar 4s2 3d1.
Q. 19. Calculate:
(a) Total number of spherical nodes in 3p orbital.
(b) Total number of nodal planes in 3p orbital.
(c) odal planes in 3d orbital.

5-MARKS QUESTIONS
Q. 1.(a) efine Photoelectric effect Mention its one practical application in
daily life.
(b) Electrons are emitted with zero velocity from a metal surface when
it is exposed to radiation of wavelength 6800 . Calculate threshold
frequency ( o) and work function (Wo ) of the metal.
Ans. o = 4.41 × 1014 s–1 Wo = 2.92 × 10–19
Q. 2.(a) The electronic energy in Bohr’s orbit is negative .How will you account
for it
(b) The ionisation energy of hydrogen atom is 13.6 eV. What will be the
energy of the first orbit of He+ and Li2+ ions
Ans. E1 of He+ 54.4 eV, E1 of Li2+ 122.4 eV

Structure of Atom 37
 Q. 3.(a) efine the following terms :
(i) Threshold frequency (ii) Work function.
(b) The work function for Cs atom is 1 .9 eV. Find threshold wavelength
( 0)and threshold frequency ( 0) of this light radiation. If Cs metal is
irradiated with a radiation of wavelength 500 nm find kinetic energy
and velocity of emitted electron.
Q. 4.(a) State de Broglie equation. rite its significance.
(b) A beam of helium atoms moves with a velocity of 2.0 × 103 m s–1.
ind the wavelength of the particle constituting the beam
(h = 6.626 × 10–34 s) Ans. 4 . pm
Q. 5.(a) State Heisenbergs uncertainty principle. Give its mathematical
expression. Also give its significance.
(b) Calculate the uncertainity in the position of a dust particle with mass
equal to 1 mg if the uncertainity in its velocity is 5.5 × l0–20ms–1.
Ans. 9.55 × 1010 m
Q. 6.(a) Cricket ball, a tennis ball and a proton which has more uncertainity
in velocity and which follows Heisenberg uncertainity principle
maximum.
(b) hat is the similarity in de-Broglie and Heisenberg principle hich
is different from Bohr theory for structure of atom
(c) hy energy in a given subshell is negative
Q. 7.(a) Write short notes on:
(i) Aufbau principle (ii) Pauli’s principle (iii) Hund’s rule.
(b) rite the electronic configuration of the following ions :
(i) Fe3+ (ii) Cu+ Given Atomic number of e and
Cu are 26 2
Q. 8.(a) raw the shapes of the following orbitals.
(i) 3dxy (ii) dz2
(b) hat is the total number of orbitals associated with the principal
quantum number n 3
(c) Using s, p, d, f notations, describe the orbital with the following
quantum numbers:-
(a) n 3, l 0, (b) n 4, l 2, (c) n 5, l 3, (d) n 1, l = 0

38 Chemistry Class XI
Q .9. Explain the following :
(i) Energy of electron is not decided by : n, l ,m and s.
(ii) Maximum number of electron with 1 2 spin for n 3 is 6, ,12
or none.
(iii) Maximum number of electron can be present for n + l = 4.
(iv) 3f subshell is not possible.
(v) Maximum number of electrons in a subshell is :
(2l + l) or (4l + l) or n2
Q. 10.(a) A neutral atom has 2 , 8 and 15 M electrons. ind the total numbers
of electrons in s, p, d and f subshell.
(b) How many unpaired electrons are present in the following ions :
Al+, Cr2+, Co3+ and Mn2+
(Given Atomic number : Al 13, Cr 24, Co 2 Mn 25)
(c) One electron is present in 4f subshell. hat is the sum of n + l +
m1 + ms values assuming ‘f ’ subshell follows – 3 to + 3 order of
filling electron.
Q. 11. Answer the following :
(a) n + l value for 14th electron in an atom.
(b) Increasing order of filling electron in 4f, 5p and 6d subshells.
(c) ‘m’ and ‘l’ value for last electron of Mg atom.
(Given atomic number of Mg is 12)
(d) Subshell in which last electron is present in Ga.
(Given Atomic number of Ga is 31)
(e) Sum of spin of all the electron in element having atomic number 14.

Structure of Atom 39
 UNIT TEST
Time allowed : 1 hour Maximum Marks : 20

General instructions :
(i) All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Maximum marks carried by each question are indicated against it.

1. Designation for an orbital with n = 4 and l = 3 is (1)

(a) 4s (b) 4p (c) 4d (d) 4f
2. Maximum number of unpaired electrons in chromium is (1)
(Given: Atomic number of Cr = 24)
(a) 4 (b) 5 (c) 6 (d) 7
3. hich series of lines of the hydrogen spectrum lie in the visible
region’ (1)
4. rite the Schrodinger wave equation. (1)
5. hich of the following is not possible
(a) 2p (b) 3d (c) 3f (d) 4p (1)
6. rite four difference between orbit and orbital. (2)
7. Calculate the wave number for the longest wavelength transition in
the paschen series of atomic hydrogen. (2)
8. (a) How many orbitals are associated with n 4 (3)
(b) How many electrons will be present in the sub-shells having
ms value of –1/2 for n 3
(c) raw the shape of dz2.
. Calculate the uncertainty in the position of a dust particle with mass
equal to 1 mg if the uncertainty in its velocity is 5.5 × 10-20 ms-1. (3)
10. (i) The energy associated with the first orbit in the hydrogen atom is
–2.18 × 10–18 J atom–1. What is the energy associated with the
fifth orbit
(ii) Calculate the radius of Bohr’s fifth orbit for hydrogen atom.
(iii) Calculate the radial and angular nodes in 2p orbital.
(iv) efine the black body and black body radiations. (5)
*****
40 Chemistry Class XI
 Classification of Elements
and Periodicity in
Properties
FAST TRACK : QUICK REVISION

• The first systematic classification of elements as pro ided by ussian

chemist .I. endelee .
1. endelee s periodic la
“The physical and chemical properties of elements are periodic functions
of their atomic weight.”
2. It was modified to odern Periodic la :
“The physical and chemical properties of elements are periodic functions
of their atomic numbers.”
It is the long form of periodic table :
7 Horizontal rows are called Periods and 18 Vertical columns are called
Group
Group-1 are called Al ali metals Group-2 are called Al aline earth metals.
Group-15 are called Pnicogens Group-16 are called Chalcogens
Group-17 are called Halogens Group-18 are called oble gases
3. 1st period – 2 elements 2nd and 3rd period – 8 elements
4th and 5th period – 18 elements 6th period – 32 elements
7th period – Incomplete (32 elements)
4. Groups
1 and 2 – ‘s’ block elements last electron entered in ‘s’ subshell [s1, s2]
3 to 12 – ‘d’ block elements last electrons entered in ‘d’ subshell [d1 to d10].
13 to 18 – ‘p’ block elements last electrons enter in ‘p ’ subshell [p1 to p6].
Two f-block series lanthanoids and actinoids are placed in the bottom of
periodic table.

Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties 41

 5. (A) In ‘s’ and ‘p’ block elements the electrons enters in outer most shell.
In ‘d’ block elements the electron enters in the penultimate shell (n – 1).
‘f ’ block elements last electron enter the antepenultimate shell (n – 2).
(B) ‘f ’ block elements are placed in between ‘d’ block elements.
‘f ’ block elements in 2 rows [4f lanthanoids, 5f actinoids]
. eneral outer electronic configuration
‘s bloc : ns1, ns2 [Group 1 to 2]
‘p bloc : ns1np1 to ns2 np6 Group 13 to 18
‘d bloc : ns0–2 (n – 1) d1 to 10 Group 3 to 12
‘f bloc : (n – 2)f 1 to 14 (n – 1)d0, 1 ns2
7. eneral periodic trends in properties of elements

• ATO IC A IUS
(A) eft to right decreases due to effect of successive increasing nuclear change
without addition of a new shell.
(B) rom top to bottom atomic radius increases due to successive addition of
shell.
(C) oble gases have large radius than group 17 due to complete filling of
electron in outer shell electron-electron repulsion mildy increases.
• COVALE T A IUS
It is half of the distance between the centre of nuclei of two adjacent similar
atoms which are bonded to each other by single covalent bond.
• an der aal s adius
van der aal's radius is defined as one-half the distance between the centres
of nuclei of two nearest like atoms belonging to two adjacent molecules of
the element in the solid state.

42 Chemistry Class XI
• ETALLIC A IUS
Half of the distance between the centres of the nuclei of two adjacent atoms
in the metallic crystal. A comparison of the three atomic radii show that
van der aal's radius is maximum while the covalent radius has the least value.
an der aal s radius etallic radius Co alent radius

• IO IC A IUS
(A) Cation radius < Atomic radius – due to more no. of protons than number
of electron coloumbic force increases, size decreases.
[Mg2+ < Mg+ < Mg]
(B) Anion radius > Atomic radius – Due to more number of electron than
number of protons
[N3– > O2– > F–]
Electron-Electron repulsion increase, coloumbic force of attraction
decreases.
(C) For Isoelectronic species – More is the charge of cation lesser the size.
More is the charge of anion, more is the size.
( ) Order of size – O2– > F– > Na > Na+ > Mg2+

. (A) Ionisation enthalpy :

The minimum amount of energy which is required to remove the most
loosely bound electron from an isolated atom in the gaseous state is called
Ionisation enthalpy.
M(g) + Energy —→ M+ + e–
IE3 > IE2 > IE1
(B) Variation of I.E along a period:
Ionisation enthalpy increase along the period because atomic radii
decrease and nuclear charge increase along the period.
I ionisation enthalpy Li < B < Be < C < O < N < F < Ar
II ionisation enthalpy Be < C < B < N < F < O < Ne
(C) Variation do n the group:
Ionisation enthalpy decrease down the group because atomic radius
increase down the group.
etallic beha iour : Decrease from left to right due to increase in
ionisation enthalpy.

Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties 43

 on metallic beha iour : Increase from left to right due to more number
of electron in outershell and added electron goes towards nucleus.

. Screening e ect or shielding e ect:

It is the decrease in the force of attraction between nucleus and outermost
electron due to presence of inner shell electrons. As a result, the outer most
electrons does not feel full charge of the nucleus. The actual charge felt by
an electron is called effective uclear charge.
Shielding effect is in the following order s p d f
d f subshell show weak sheilding effect because their orbital size are large
and are more diffused.
10. Isoelectronic species:
Ions of different elements which have the same number of electrons but
different no. of protons are called isoelectronic ions.
Na+ Mg2+ Al3+ N3– O2– F–
No. of Protons 11 12 13 7 8 9
No. of electrons 10 10 10 10 10 10
Ionic Radii Al3+ < Mg2+ < Na+ < F– < O2– < N3–
11. Electron gain enthalpy:
The enthalpy change when an extra electron is added to neutral gaseous atom
to form anion.
E(g) + e– → E– (g)
Trends : rom left to right Increase due to decrease in size, more
attraction of added electron by nucleus.
rom top to bottom Decreases as the added electron is away from
nucleus due to increase in size.
Cl has more negati e electron gain enthalpy than uorine Due to small
size of fluorine extra added electron has more inter electronic repulsion
than chlorine which has large size.
Similarly Phosphorus and Sulphur have negative electron gain enthalpy
than nitrogen and oxygen respectively.
a imum electron gain enthalpy Chlorine (in periodic table)

44 Chemistry Class XI
 Electron gain enthalpy
Halogen Oxygen itrogen Metal of group 1 and 13 and non metal
of group 14 > metal of group 2.
2nd electron gain enthalpy is always positive.

12. Electro negati ity:

The tendency of an atom to attract the shared pair of electron towards itself
in a bonded state.
luorine is the most electronegative element in the periodic table.
Cesium is the least electronegative element in the periodic table.
Electro-negativity decreases down the group and increases along the period
i erence bet een electron gain enthalpy and Electronegati ity.
Electron gain enthalpy is the energy, but electronegativity is not the energy,
it is only the tendency of an atom in a molecule to attract the shared pair of
electrons. Three highest electronegative atoms O .
a imum electronegati e Assign to .
* Lightest element : Hydrogen
* Lightest metal : Lithium
Heaviest metal (highest density) : Osmium
Most reactive metal : Caesium
* Most reactive nonmetal : luorine
* Most malleable metal : old
* Electrically best conductor : Sil er
Metals which are relatively volatile : n Cd Hg
* Strongest reducing agent in aqueous solution : Lithium
* Strongest oxidising agent : luorine
* The element of lowest ionisation energy : Caesium
* The element of highest ionisation energy : Helium
The most electronegative element : luorine
* The element of highest electron gain enthalpy : Chlorine
The group containing most electropositive metals : roup 1
The group containing most electronegative metals : Halogens roup 17
The group containing maximum number of gaseous elements : roup 1

Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties 45

13. Second period element Show different behaviour that I group element—
ue to (a) small size (b) High electron negativity (C) High polarising
power (d) absence of ‘d’ orbital.
Na3[Al(OH)6 exists but a B(OH)4 not exists.
14. The similarities in properties of first member of a group to second member
of just next higher group due to comparable atomic radius, nearly same
polarising power of ions is known as diagonal relationship.
Li Be B C N
Na Mg Al Si P
Elements ith number of e in alance shell
(a) 1, 2, 3 metals
(b) 4 metalloids
(c) 5, 6, 7 non-metals
(d) 8 noble gas

46 Chemistry Class XI
 I AP
CLASSI ICATIO O ELE E TS A PE IO ICIT I P OPE TIES

(s, p, d, f)

Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties

47
 ULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIO S ( CQ)
1. According to modern periodic law, the physical and chemical properties
of elements are the periodic functions of their ?
(a) Density (b) Atomic Number
(c) Mass Number (d) Atomic Mass

2. Highest electropositive element in the periodic table is

(a) Cs (b) Rb
(c) K (d) Na

3. The correct order of ionic radii of the species N3–, O2–, Na+ and F– is
(a) Na+ < F– < O2– > N3– (b) F– < O2– < N3 > Na+
(c) O2– < N3– < F– > Na+ (d) N3– < Na+ < F– > O2–

4. The basic strength of the oxides follows the order

(a) Al2O3 > MgO > Na2O (b) Al2O3 < MgO < Na2O
(c) Na2O3 < MgO > Al3O2 (d) Al2O3 > MgO > Na2O

5. The correct order of the size of C, N, P, S follows the order

(a) N<C<P<S (b) C < N < S < P
(c) C<N<P<S (d) N < C < S < P

6. hich of the following oxide is most acidic

(a) Na2O (b) Al3O2
(c) P2O5 (d) SO3

. ownward in a group, electropositive character of elements

(a) increases (b) decreases
(c) remains same (d) none of these

8. Element which has more negative electron gain enthalpy is

(a) F (b) O
(c) Cl (d) S

. The electronegivity of the following elements increase in the order

(a) C, N, Si, P (b) N, Si, C, P
(c) Si, P, C, N (d) P, Si, N, C

48 Chemistry Class XI
10. The ionisation enthalpy of nitrogen is more than that of oxygen molecules
because of
(a) greater attraction of electrons by the nucleus
(b) extra stability of the half filled p-orbitals
(c) smaller size of nitrogen
(d) more penetrating effect
Ans: 1. (b), 2. (a), 3. (a), 4. (b), 5. (d), 6. (d), 7. (a), 8. (c),
9. (c), 10. (d)

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. Lightest metal in s-block elements is _____________ .

2. In the periodic table, horizontal rows are known as _____________ .
3. Elements of s-blocks and p-blocks are collectively called .
4. Most electropositive elements belong to group.
5. Most electronegative elements belong to group.
6. The elements above atomic number 2 are called .
7. The inner-transition elements belong to ________ block of the periodic
table and are shown separately at the ________ of the periodic table.
8. An element having electronic configuration Ar 3d5, 4s2 belongs to
____________ block.
9. Ca2+ has smaller ionic radius than K+ ion because it has ___________.
10. The maximum electronegativity is shown by .
11 The maximum ionisation enthalpy is shown by .
12 The cation is ________ and the anion is ________ than the parent atom.
Ans: 1. Lithium 7. F -, bottom
2. periods 8. s-
3. normal elements or 9. more protons
representative elements
4. 1st 10. F -
5. 17th 11. H
6. transuranic elements 12. smaller, bigger

Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties 49

 T UE A ALSE T PE QUESTIO S
rite true or false for the follo ing statements
1. First ionisation enthalpy of Be is higher than B.
2. Every period of the periodic table (except first period) starts with a member
of alkali metal.
3. The energy liberated during the removal of one electron from an atom is
called its ionisation potential.
4. lourine has more negative electron gain enthalpy than chlorine.
5 Mg2+ ion has smaller size than Mg.
6. Electronegativity of is larger than that of Cl but electron gain enthalpy
of Cl is larger than of F.
. The decreasing order of electronegativity of , O and is O .
8. Group-18 contain maximum gaseous elements.
9. Al2O3 is an amphoteric oxide.
10. Helium has the highest ionisation enthalpy.
Ans: 1. (T) 2. (T) 3. (T) 4. (F) 5. (T)
6. (T) 7. (T) 8. (T) 9. (T) 10. (T)

ATCH THE COLU S

1.
Column A Column B
a. Highest element i. Cesium
b. Highest metal ii. Osmium
c. Heaviest metal iii. ithium
d. Most reactive metal iv. Hydrogen
2.
Column A Column B
a. luorine i. High negative electron gain enthalpy
b. Helium ii. Most electropositive element
c. Chlorine iii. Most electronegative element
d. Cesium iv. Highest ionisation enthalpy

50 Chemistry Class XI
3.
Column A Column B
a. Na2O i. Amphoteric oxide
b. Cl2O7 ii. Acidic oxide
c. Al2O3 iii. eutral oxide
d. CO iv. Basix oxide
4.
Column A Column B
a. s & p-block i. Inner transition elements
b. d-block ii. s-block elements
c. f-block iii. Transition elements
d. group-1 and group-2 iv. Representative elements
Ans: 1. a.(iv), b.(iii), c.(ii), d.(i) 2. a.(iii), b.(iv), c.(i), d.(ii)
3. a.(iv), b.(ii), c.(i), d.(iii) 4. a.(iv), b.(iii), c.(i), d.(ii)

ASSE TIO A EASO T PE QUESTIO S

irections for Q. o.1 5
A If both Assertion & Reason are true and the reason is the correct
explanation of the assertion.
B If both Assertion & Reason are true but the reason is not the correct
explanation of the assertion.
C If Assertion is true statement but Reason is false.
D If both Assertion and Reason are false statements.
1. Assertion : Ionic radius of Na+ is smaller than Na
Reason : Effective nuclear charge of a+ is higher than Na
2. Assertion : First ionisation enthalpy of N is higher than O.
Reason : Extra stability of fully filled up 2p subshell of atom
3. Assertion : Electron gain enthalpy of Cl is more negative than atom.
Reason : is more electronegative than Cl atom.
4. Assertion : First ionisation enthalpy of Galium is higher than aluminium.
Reason : eak sheliding effect of 3d subshell is Galium.
Ans: 1. A 2. A 3. B 4. A
Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties 51
 O E O A S E T PE QUESTIO S

1. Metals are placed on which side of modern periodic table?

2. hich block of modern periodic table represent inner transition elements
3. ame a halogen which has more negative electron gain enthalpy value
4. hich element is iso-electronic with a+ ? [Ans. Ne]
Given a atomic number of Sodium ( a) : 11
5. An element is placed in 5th period and 3rd group what is its atomic number?
[Ans. 39]
6. hat is covalency of Al in AlCl4] ? [Ans. 4]
. rite the IUPAC Symbol for the element having atomic number 120.
[Ans. Ubn
8. rite the name of the group containing maximum number of gaseous
elements.
. rite the name of the subshell which show weakest sheilding effect.
10. rite the name of most electropositive element in the periodic table.
11. In what period and group will an element with Z = 118 will be present.

1 A QUESTIO S

1. hich pair of elements has similar properties

13, 31, 11 & 21
2. ame the element which exhibit diagonal relationship with Be.
[Ans. 13, 31]
3. hich group elements are known as halogens
4. The element with ns2, np5 configuration is non-metal or metal
5. efine van der aal's radius.
6. rite the outer shell configuration of atomic number 31. Ans. 4s2, p1]
7. ind the group number and period number of element having atomic
number 52. [Ans. Period = 5th, Group = 16th]
8. Arrange O2–, O–1, O in decreasing radius (size). [Ans. O2– > O–1 > O]

52 Chemistry Class XI
9. hy noble gas have bigger size than halogens
10. hy first electron gain enthalpy of sulphur is more negative then oxygen
11. rite general outer electronic configuration of 4f series elements.
[Ans. 6s2, 5d0–1, 4f1 to 14]
12. rite two isoelectronic species with Br (35). [Ans. Kr+, Se–1]
13. Show that 4th period can have maximum 18 elements in it.
14. Second I.E. is always more than first I.E., why
15. Electronegativity of Cl Br I, why
16. Arrange and Cl in terms of increasing chemical reactivity
1 . Second I.E. of a is more than second IE of Mg. hy
18. I.E. for cation is more than neutral atom. hy
1 . efine diagonal relationship with the help of an example.
20. Out of O and O, which has more negative electron gain enthalpy
21. Mention any two anomalous properties of second period elements.

2 A S QUESTIO S

1. Cations are smaller than their parent atom whereas anions are larger in
size than their parent atom. Explain.
2. Ionisation energy of nitrogen is more than ‘O’ and ‘C’ both, why ?
3. First ionisation energy of boron is less than Be but size of Be is less than
Boron. hy
4. Electron gain enthalpy of Mg is positive. Explain.
5. efine co-valency.
. The reactivity of halogens decrease down the group but of alkali metals
increases down the group. hy
7. Name a halogen, a metal and a group13 element which are liquid at
30°C. [Ans. Br, Hg, Ga]
. The reducing power of elements increases down the group but reverse is
true for oxidising power along a period. hy

Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties 53

 . hat is the formula of binary compound formed between :
(a) 1st element of I group and iodine ?
(b) 2nd element of II group and 1st element of 17th group ?
10. Arrange in the following in increasing order of property indicated:
(a) Size I, F, Cl, Br
(b) Oxidising power I, , Br, Cl
11. Oxygen is more non-metallic than nitrogen but less than fluorine why
12. iCl, iBr, iI are covalent as well as ionic why
13. PbCl2 is more stable than PbCl4. hy Ans. Inert pair effect
14. [Magnesium and Lithium both form nitrides why ?
15. hich has least I.E. 3p3, 3p6, 2p3, 2p6]?
1 . (a) I.E. of sulphur is lower than chlorine.
(b) Arrange the following in decreasing order of their electro-negativity:
F, O, N, Cl, C, H.
17. Element ‘A’ in group 17 (2nd period)
‘B’ in group 16 (2nd period)
‘C’ in group 15 (2nd period)
Arrange A’, B’ and C’ in their decreasing order of electro-negativity
and ionisation enthalpy.
1 . Element A’ 13 group forms ionic compounds. rite the :
(a) ormula of its oxide.
(b) Arrange the following in their decreasing electro-positive character
Mg, Na, Al, Si.
1 . rite the atomic number of element place diagonally to :
(a) Group 14, period 4 (b) Group 2, period 5
(c) Group 17, period 4
20. An element has outer shell electronic configuration 4s2 4p3. Find :-
(a) The atomic number of element place next below it.
(b) Atomic number of next noble gas.

54 Chemistry Class XI
 3 A S QUESTIO S
1. hat is metallic radius, Covalent radius, van der waal’s radius. Give one
example for each.
2. Oxygen has first electron gain enthalpy exothermic while second
endothermic still a large number of ionic oxides are formed. hy
3. In some properties Boron shows different properties with respect to rest
of the membering the group. Justify.
4. Out of group 17, 18 and I, predict:-
(a) hich has most negative first electron gain enthalpy
(b) hich shows most metallic behaviour
(c) hich has highly positive electron gain enthalpy
5. hat are (a) representative elements, (b) Transition elements, (c)
anthanoid and actinoids. Give their positions in modern periodic table.
. hy i , a , , Rb , Cs are ionic But i is less ionic than Cs .
7. (a) hy Ca has larger atomic radius than Al
(b) hy 2s2 electron is difficult to remove than 2p electron ?
. (a) hy the compounds of group 17 with group 13 elements are more
ionic and stable than with (group 1) elements? (b) Na2O is more ionic
than Li2O. why?
. Explain the following data :
Ionisation energy Cl < H < O < N < F.
10. IE2 of 3rd period elements is as follows. hy
Mg < Si < Al < P < S < Cl < Ar < Na.
11. Account fot the following:
(a) Halogens have very high negative electron gain enthalpy
(b) The electron gain enthalpy of Cl ( 1 )is more negative than that
of Fluorine ( Z = 9 ).
(c) Ionisation enthaply of itrogen ( ) is more than oxygen ( 8).
12. hat are the d- block elements rite any four properties of d - block
elements and give their general outer electronic configuration.

Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties 55

 5 A S QUESTIO S
1. (A) hich of the following have same chemical properties :
(a) Atomic number 17, 53
(b) Atomic number 8, 52
(c) Both
(d) None
(B) Answer the following :
(i) B, Al, Ga (decreasing order of atomic radii).
(ii) C, S, N (decreasing order of ( Heg)1)
(iii) Al forms amphoteric oxide. hy
(iv) Si is a semiconductor while C’ is a non-metal, why

2. Element iH 1 iH 2 egH01
I 1681 3374 – 328
II 1008 1846 – 295
III 2372 5251 + 48
(a) The most reactive non-metal.
(b) The least reactive non-metal.
(c) The least reactive element. Give reasons also.
[Ans. (a) 1 (b) II (c) III]

Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties 57

 5 A S QUESTIO S
1. (A) hich of the following have same chemical properties :
(a) Atomic number 17, 53
(b) Atomic number 8, 52
(c) Both
(d) None
(B) Answer the following :
(i) B, Al, Ga (decreasing order of atomic radii).
(ii) C, S, N (decreasing order of ( Heg)1)
(iii) Al forms amphoteric oxide. hy
(iv) Si is a semiconductor while C’ is a non-metal, why

2. Element iH 1 iH 2 egH01
I 1681 3374 – 328
II 1008 1846 – 295
III 2372 5251 + 48
(a) The most reactive non-metal.
(b) The least reactive non-metal.
(c) The least reactive element. Give reasons also.
[Ans. (a) 1 (b) II (c) III]

Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties 57

 UNIT TEST
Time allo ed : 1 hour a imum ar s : 20
General instructions :
(i) All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Maximum marks carried by each question are indicated against it.

1. hich of the following show the weakest sheilding effect ? (1)

(a) s (b) p (c) d (d) f
2. hich has highest electronegativity (1)
(a) Cl (b) O (c) N (d) S
3. rite the name of the group containing maximum number of (1)
gaseous elements.
4. rite general outer electronic configuration of 4f series elements. (1)
5. rite the IUPAC symbol for the element having atomic number 120. (1)
6. (a) Explain why cation are smaller and anions larger in radii than (2)
their parent atoms?
(b) efine accuracy precision.
. The first ionisation enthalpy values (in k mol–1) of group-13 (2)
elements are :
B Al Ga In Tl
801 577 579 558 589
How would you explain this deviation from the general trend
8. (a) Show by a chemical reaction with water than Na2O is a basic (3)
oxide and Cl2O7 is an acidic oxide.
(b) Name a species that will be isoelectronic with each of the
following atoms or ions. (i) F (ii) Ca2+
. Explain the following :
(a) Shielding effect
(b) Diagonal relationship
(c) Anomalous behavior of second period elements.
10. (a) Alkali metals do not form dis-positive ions. hy (5)
(b) hy is the IUPAC name and symbol of the element having
atomic number 117.
(c) Are the oxidation state and covalency of Al in Al(H2O)6]2+ same?
(d) hy are there fourteen elements in the anthanide series
*****
58 Chemistry Class XI
 Chemical Bonding
and Molecular
Structure
FAST TRACK : QUICK REVISION

Kossel-Lewis Concept: Atoms take part in chemical combination to

complete octet in their valence shell. This is known as octet rule.
Limitation of Octet Rule: The octet rule, though useful but have some
exceptions e.g. BF3, NO2, PCl5, SF6 etc.
Lewis Symbol or Electron Dot Structure: Representing valence electrons
by dots placed around the letter symbol of the element.
Types of Chemical Bonds:
(i) Covalent Bond:
(a) Formed by sharing of electrons.
(b) It may be polar and nonpolar.
(c) It is directional in nature.
(ii) Ionic Bond:
(a) Formed by transfer of electrons.
(b) Formation of ionic bond is favored by high lattice enthalpy, Low
ionization enthalpy of metal atom and more negative electron gain
enthalpy of nonmetal atom.
(c) It is non directional in nature.
Formal Charge (F.C.):
(i) It is charge appeared on individual atom in covalent molecule.
(ii) F.C. = (Total No. of valence electrons in free atom) – (Total No. of
unshared electrons) – ½ (Total No. of shared electrons)
Greater the F.C on atoms lesser the stability of that Lewis structure.
Lattice Enthalpy: Energy released when one mole of a crystalline solid is
formed constituent gaseous ions.
 Bond length:
(i) It is equilibrium distance between the nuclei of two bonded atoms in
a molecule.
(ii) Greater the size of bonded atoms shorter the bond length.
e.g., H – F < H – Cl < H – Br < H – I
(iii) Greater the s character shorter the bond length.
e.g., Csp – H > Csp – H > Csp – H >
(iv) Bond length decreases with increase in bond order.
e.g., C – C > C = C > C C
Bond angle:
(i) It is angle between the orbitals containing bonding electron pairs
around central atom in a molecule or complex ion.
(ii) Greater the electronegativity of central atom larger the bond angle
e.g., NH3 > PH3
(iii) Greater the number of lone pair around central atom smaller the bond
angle. e.g., CH4 > NH3 > H2O
Bond Enthalpy:
(i) It is defined as amount of energy required to break one mole of bonds
of a particular type between two atoms in gaseous state.
(ii) For diatomic molecules, Bond enthalpy = Bond dissociation enthalpy
(iii) For polyatomic molecules, Bond enthalpy = Average of all possible
bond dissociation enthalpies.
(iv) Bond enthalpy Bond order 1/(Bond length)

Resonance:
(i) According to the concept of resonance, whenever a single Lewis
structure cannot describe a molecule accurately, a number of structures
with similar energy, position of nuclei, bonding and non-bonding pairs
of electrons are taken as canonical structures of the resonance hybrid
which describes the molecule accurately.
(ii) Resonance averages the bond characteristics as a whole.

Partial ionic character of covalent bond A – B:

= 16(XA – XB) + 3.5(XA – XB) 2,
where XA and XB are electro-negativities of A & B.

60 Chemistry Class XI
Partial covalent character in ionic bond (Fajan’s rule):
(i) Fajan’s rule is used to predict partial covalent character in ionic bond.
(ii) Gretaer the polarizing power of cation and polarisability of anion
greater the covalent character in ionic bond.
(iii) Polarising power of cation Charge density [(Charge )/Radius)].
(iv) Polarisability of anion size of anion.

Dipole moment:
(i) ipole moment ( ) charge ( ) distance of separation (d)
(ii) Unit: ebye ( ), 1 3.33564 10 30 Cm
(iii) Being vector quantity, dipole moment of polyatomic molecule is
taken as the resultant of all the bond moments.
(iv) If 0, molecule is non polar or symmetric.
(v) If 0, molecule is polar or asymmetric.
Hydrogen bond:
(i) It is dipole-dipole interaction between molecules in which ‘H’ atom is
inserted between two highly electronegative elements i. e. F, O or N
only.
(ii) Hydrogen bond may be intra-molecular (when present within single
molecule) and intermolecular (when present b w two same or different
molecules).
(iii) Hydrogen bonds are stronger intermolecular forces than van der Waal
forces.
Sigma ( ) and pi ( ) bonds:
(i) Sigma bond is formed by axial overlapping and pi bond is formed by
sideways overlapping of atomic orbitals.
(ii) Sigma bond is stronger than pi bond due to greater extent of
overlapping.
(iii) Single covalent bond 1 bond
ouble covalent bond 1 bond 1 bond
Triple covalent bond 1 bond 2 bond
VSEPR Theory: (VSEPR = Valence Shell Electron Pair Repulsion): The
shape of a molecule depends upon the number of valence shell electron
pairs (lp and bp) around the central atom and magnitude of repulsive forces
between them
i.e., lp – lp > lp – bp > bp – bp

Chemical Bonding And Molecular Structure 61

 Hybridisation:
(i) It is the phenomena of mixing of atomic orbitals of nearly same energy
to form the new orbitals of equal energy and identical shape.
(ii) The new orbitals are called hybrid orbitals and determine the shape of
molecules.
Molecular Orbital Theory (MOT):
(i) The overlap of atomic orbitals of same symmetry to form bonding and
antibonding molecular orbitals by addition and substraction of their
wave functions is known as MO theory.
(ii) The electrons are filled in molecular orbitals in order of their increasing
energy.
i.e., 1s, 1s, 2s, 2s, 2px 2py , 2pz, 2px 2py ,
2pz (upto 14 electrons)
1s, 1s, 2s, 2s, 2pz, 2px 2py , 2px 2py ,
2pz (For more than 14 electrons)
(iii) Bond order = 1/2 (Nb – Na)
Na = No of electrons in anti-bonding molecular orbitals
Nb = No of electrons in bonding molecular orbitals

Non-polar Planar

62 Chemistry Class XI
 MIND MAP
CHEMICAL BONDING AND MOLECULAR STRUCTURE

Chemical Bonding And Molecular Structure

63
 MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (MCQ)

1. Which of the following molecules has both covalent and ionic bond
(a) CH3Cl (b) NH4Cl (c) HCl (d) BeCl2

2. What is the maximum number of water molecules that can attach with one
water molecule through intermolecular hydrogen bonds?
(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 4 (d) 1

3. Which of the following molecules has maximum bond angle

(a) NH3 (b) CH4 (c) H2O (d) CO2

4. Identify correct statement regarding NH3 and BF3

(a) Both are Lewis acid
(b) Both are iso structural
(c) Both are Lewis base
(d) Have different values of dipole moment

5. Identify the molecule having sideways overlapping of atomic orbitals

(a) CH4 (b) CO2 (c) NH3 (d) H2O

6. Which of the following chemical species is most stable?

(a) O2 (b) O2+ (c) O2– (d) O22–

7. Which of the following d orbitals involved in Sp3d hybridization?

(a) dxy (b) dxz (c) dx2 – y2 (d) dz2

8. Which of the following molecule has net dipole moment?

(a) CO2 (b) H2O (c) BF3 (d) CH4

9. Which of the following compound has highest covalent character

(a) LiCl (b) LiBr (c) LiF (d) LiI

10. The shape of Xe 4 molecule according to VSEPR theory is

(a) Square planar (b) Square pyramid
(c) Tetrahedral (d) Pyramidal

Ans. 1.(b) 2.(c) 3.(c) 4.(d) 5.(b) 6.(b) .(d) 8.(b) .(d) 10.(a)

64 Chemistry Class XI
 FILL IN THE BLANKS

(i) The energy required to completely separate one mole of solid ionic
compound into gaseous constituent ions is called…………………….
(ii) Among alkali metal ions ………..ion has highest polarizing power.
(iii) According to molecular orbital theory molecules are said to be stable if
the number of electrons in bonding molecular orbitals is …………… the
number of electrons in antibonding molecular orbitals.
(iv) Isoelectronic molecules and ions have identical………………….
(v) In PCl5 molecule the two equivalent axial P – Cl bonds are...............than
three equivalent equatorial P – Cl bonds.
(vi) The state of hybridization of sulphur in SF6 is…………………….
(vii) The strongest intermolecular hydrogen bonding in water is present at…°C.
(viii) A triple covalent bond consists of……sigma and…….pi bonds.
(ix) ………..bond is directional in nature.
(x) Atomic orbitals are……….centric and molecular orbitals are…………
centric.
Ans. (i) Lattice enthalpy (ii) Li+ (iii) more (iv) bond order (v) longer
(vi) sp3d2 (vii) 4 (viii) 1, 2 (ix) covalent (x) mono, poly

TRUE AND FALSE TYPE QUESTIONS

Write true or false for following statements:
(i) Energy of resonance hybrid is less as compared to the contributing
canonical structures.
(ii) BeF2 has more dipole moment than BeCl2.
(iii) In water two O–H bond dissociation enthalpies are not identical.
(ix) Only the half filled orbitals of nearly same energy can participate in
hybridization.
(v) No bond is purely ionic or purely covalent.
(vi) Chemical species having identical bond order have same bond dissociation
enthalpies.

Chemical Bonding And Molecular Structure 65

(vii) BF3 is stronger Lewis acid than BCl3.
(viii) Among alkali metal halides LiI has highest covalent character.
(ix) Resonating structures of a chemical species have no real existence.
(x) XeF2 and ICl2– are iso structural.
Ans. (i) True (ii) False (iii) False (iv) False (v) True
(vi) False (vii) False (viii) True (ix) True (x) True

MATCH THE COLUMNS

1. Match the species in Column I with the geometry/shape in Column II.

Column I Column II
(i) PCl5 (a) Tetrahedral
(ii) ClF3 (b) Pyramidal
(iii) NH4 + (c) Bent T shape
(iv) H3O+ (d) Trigonal bipyramid

2. Match the species in Column I with the type of hybrid orbitals in Column II.
Column I Column II
(i) BF3 (a) sp3d
(ii) H2O (b) sp2
(iii) PCl5 (c) sp3d2
(iv) SF6 (d) sp3

Ans. 1. (i) (d), (ii) (c), (iii) (a), (iv) (b).

2. (i) (b), (ii) (d), (iii) (a), (iv) (c).

ASSERTION AND REASON TYPE QUESTIONS

In the following questions a statement of assertion (A) followed by a statement

of Reason (R) is given. Choose the correct option out of the choices given be-
low for each question:
(i) A and R both are correct, and R is correct explanation of A.
(ii) A and R both are correct, but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(iii) A is true but R is false.
(iv) A and R both are false.
66 Chemistry Class XI
 1. Assertion (A): Among the two O – H bonds in H2O molecule, the energy
required to break the first O – H bond and the other O – H bond is the same.
Reason (R): This is because the electronic environment around the oxygen
is the same even after breakage of one O – H bond.
2. Assertion (A): Though the central atom of both NH3 and H2O molecules
are sp3 hybridised, yet H – N – H bond angle is greater than that of H – O – H.
Reason (R): This is because nitrogen atom has one lone pair and oxygen
atom has two lone pairs.
3. Assertion (A): SF6 molecule is unstable.
Reason (R): A stable molecule must have 8 electrons around the central
atom. i.e. octet rule should be satisfied.
4. Assertion (A): Pi bond is never formed alone. It is formed along with a
sigma bond
Reason (R): Pi bond is formed by sideway overlap of p- orbitals only.
5. Assertion (A): Ionic compounds tend to be non-volatile.
Reason (R): Ionic compounds are solid.
Ans. 1. (iv) 2. (i) 3. (iv) 4. (iii) 5. (ii)

ONE WORD ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS

1. Write the formal charge on central oxygen atom in O3 molecule?
2. Write the shape of AB2E3 type molecule.
3. Name the property used to measure the degree of polarity.
4. Name the covalent bond formed by axial overlapping of atomic orbitals.
5. Out of px, py, pz orbitals which p orbital takes part in sp hybridization?
6. Name the molecular orbital having energy greater than that of combining
atomic orbitals.
7. Name the intermolecular forces responsible for liquid state of water.
8. Name the phenomena used to describe a molecule whose single Lewis
structure cannot describe it.
9. Name the geometry involved in sp3d hybridization.
10. ame the molecular theory that can explain magnetic character of
molecules.
Ans. 1. +1, 2. Linear, 3. Dipole moment, 4. Sigma bond, 5. pz
6. Antibonding molecular orbital, 7. Hydrogen bond, 8. Resonance,
. Trigonal bipyramid, 10. Molecular orbital theory

Chemical Bonding And Molecular Structure 67

 1-MARK QUESTIONS
1. Why noble gases exist in mono atomic form?
2. Write the Lewis structure of NO2–.
3. Why NH3 and BF3 have different shapes
4. How many sigma and pi bonds are present in HCN molecule?
5. Why sigma bond is stronger than pi bond?
6. Explain why BeH2 molecule has zero dipole moment although the Be – H
bonds are polar?
7. Which has highest bond angle? NO2, NO2– , NO2+
8. What is magnetic character of anion of KO2?
9. Why do atoms combine?
10. hat is the significance of ewis Symbols
11. Why density of water is maximum at 277K?
12. Give structure of BrF5 according to VSEPR theory.
13. Why NH3 is liquid and PH3 is a gas?
14. Why KHF2 exist but KHCl2 and KHBr2 does not?
[Ans. HF…HF hydrogen bonding].
15. Boiling point of p-nitrophenol is more than O-nitrophenol why?
16. How paramagnetic character of a compound is related to the no. of unpaired
electrons?
1 . efine the term bond length.
18. He2 molecule does not exist. Give reason.
19. Why PCl5 dissociates to give PCl3 and Cl2?
20. rite the state of hybridization of O in H2O.
21. Predict the shape of ClF3 according to VSEPR theory.
22. Why ice has less density than water?
23. Why the H – P – H bond angle in PH3 is less than H – N – H bond angle in
NH3?
24. At room temperature H2O exist as liquid while H2S exist as gas. Give
reason.
25. NH3 has higher boiling point than PH3. Give reason.
26. Identify the chemical species having identical bond order: O22+, N2, O2,
O22-.

68 Chemistry Class XI
 2-MARKS QUESTIONS

1. What is an Octet rule? What are its limitations?

2. The enthalpy needed to break the two O – H bonds in water are as follows:
H2O (g) H (g) O – H(g) 0 502 k mol–1
aH1

O – H (g) H (g) O(g) 0 502 k mol–1

aH1
What is the average bond enthalpy of H2O?

3. rite two points of difference between sigma and pi bond.

4. efine Hydrogen bond. Is it weaker or stronger than van der aal forces
5. efine dipole moment. Give its significance.
6. Give applications of dipole moment.
7. Which is more polar and why, CO2 or N2O?
8. Discuss the partial ionic character of covalent bond by taking an example.
9. Draw the resonating structures of O3 and calculate formal charges on each
O atom.
10. O- itrophenol is steam volatile while p- itrophenol is not. Give reason.
11. efine bond enthalpy. hy the bond enthalpy of 2 is less than that of Cl2?

12. efine resonance. raw resonating structures of CO2.

13. Assign reason for the following;
(i) NH3 is freely soluble in water while PH3 is not.
(ii) B2 is paramagnetic while C2 is not.
14. Out of NH3 and NF3 which is more polar. Explain with the help of dipole
moment.
15. N2 is diamagnetic while O2 is paramagnetic. Explain on the basis of
Molecular orbital theory.
16. H2+ and H2– have same bond order. Which is more stable?
1 . ifferentiate between bonding and anti bonding molecular orbitals.
18. Discuss the conditions for the combination of atomic orbitals to form
molecular orbitals.

Chemical Bonding And Molecular Structure 69

19. Although Chlorine (EN = 3.2) is more electronegative than Nitrogen
(E 3.0), yet chlorine does not form hydrogen bond while nitrogen does.
Give reason. (Ans: larger atomic size of Cl ).
20. Cl 3 is T shaped but BF3 is planar. Explain.
21. N (SiH3)3 and N(CH3)3 are not isostructural. Give reason.
22. Draw molecular orbital diagram for N2+ molecule.
23. HCl is a covalent compound but it ionises in the solution?
24. The molecule of CO2 is linear whereas that of SnCl2 is angular why?

25. Arrange the following in the order of property indicated for each set:
(i) O2, O2+, O2–, O22– (increasing stability)
(ii) LiCl, NaCl, KCl, RbCl (increasing covalent character)
(iii) NO2, NO2+, NO2– (decreasing bond angle)
(iv) H – F, H – Cl, H – Br, H – I (increasing bond dissociation enthalpy)

26. Arrange the following in the order of property indicated for each set:
(i) H2O, NH3, H2S, HF (increasing polar character)
(ii) HF, HCl, HBr, HI ( decreasing dipole moment)
(iii) NO3–, NO2–, NO (decreasing ‘s’ character of hybridization)
(iv) BeCl2, BCl3, CCl4, PCl3 (increasing bond angle)

3-MARKS QUESTIONS

1. How is ionic bond formed? On what factors it depends?

2. Calculate the lattice enthalpy of KCl from the following data by Born-
Haber's Cycle.
Enthalpy of sublimation of 8 k mol–1
Enthalpy of dissociation of Cl2 244 k mol–1
Ionization enthalpy of potassium 425 k mol–1
Electron gain enthalpy of chlorine 355 k mol–1
Enthalpy of formation of Cl 438 k mol-1
3. What is meant by hybridization? Describe the shape of sp, sp2 and sp3
hybridised orbitals.

70 Chemistry Class XI
 4. efine bond order. Calculate the bond order in 2 and O2 molecules.
5. Give molecular orbital energy level diagram of CO. Write its electronic
configuration,magnetic behaviour and bond order.
6. Which of the following in each pair has larger bond angle
(i) CO2 , BF3 (ii) H2O, H2S (iii) CH4, C2H2
7. What is meant by resonance? Draw the resonating structures of carbonate
ion and explain why all the C – O bond lengths are identical in carbonate
ion?
8. Compare relative stability of following species and predict their magnetic
properties:
O2, O2+, O2– (superoxide), O22– (peroxide)
9. Draw the Lewis structure of the species as mentioned below:
(i) In which the central atom has incomplete octet.
(ii) In which the central atom has an expanded octet,
(iii) An odd electron molecule is formed.
10. Explain the structure of PCl5 according to hybridization. Why all P – Cl
bonds lengths are not equivalent in PCl5?

5-MARKS QUESTIONS

1. Give reasons for the following:

(a) NH3 has higher boiling point than PH3.
(b) Ionic compounds do not conduct electricity in solid state.
(c) LiCl is more covalent than KCl.
(d) NH3 is more polar than NF3.
(e) H2O has bent structure.
2. (a) efine the term bond dissociation enthalpy. How is it related to bond
order?
(b) Explain why N2 has greater bond dissociation enthalpy than N2+
while O2 has lesser bond dissociation enthalpy than O2+ ?
3. Draw the shape of following molecules according to VSEPR theory;
XeO3, XeF2, XeOF4, SF4, XeF4

Chemical Bonding And Molecular Structure 71

 HOTS QUESTIONS

1. The bond angle of H2O is 104.5 while that of 2O is 102 .

Solution: The bond pair of electrons are drawn more towards F in F2O,
whereas in H2O it is drawn towards O. So bp – bp repulsion in H2O is
greater than that in F2O.
2. Anhydrous AlCl3 is covalent. From the data given below, predict whether
it would remain covalent or become ionic in aqueous solution.
iH (AlCl3) 513 k mol–1, hyd H(Al3+) 4665 k mol–1,

hyd H(Cl–) 381 k mol–1.

Solution: Total energy released 1 hyd H(Al3+) 3 hyd H(Cl–)
( 4665) (3 381) k mol–1 5808 k mol–1
Total energy required i H(AlCl3) 513 k mol–1
Since energy released is greater than the energy required, the compound
will ionize in aqueous solution.

3. The dipole moment of HCl is 1.03 , and the bond length is 12 pm.
Calculate the percent ionic character of HCl molecule.
Solution: cal r (1.6 10–19C) (12 10–12m) 2.032 10–29C m
1D
(2.032 10–29C m) 6.0
3.336 10 —30 Cm
1.03D
% ionic character =
obs.
100 = 100 16.9%
cal 6.09D

72 Chemistry Class XI
 UNIT TEST
Time Allowed: 1 hr Maximum Marks : 20
General Instructions:
(i) All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Maximum marks carried by each question are indicated against it.

1. Identify the molecule having sideways overlapping of atomic orbitals [1]

(a) CH4 (b) CO2 (c) NH3 (d) H2O
2. The shape of XeF4 molecule according to VSEPR theory is [1]
(a) Square planar (b) Square pyramid
(c) Tetrahedral (d) Pyramidal
3. Write the Lewis structure of NO2–. [1]
4. Which has highest bond angle? NO2, NO2–, NO2+ [1]
5. Draw the resonating structures of CO2. [1]
6. The enthalpy needed to break the two O – H bonds in water are as follows:
H2O(g) — H(g) O – H(g) 0 502 k mol–1
aH1
O – H (g) — H(g) O(g) 0 42 k mol–1
aH2
What is the average bond enthalpy of H2O? [2]
7. Out of NH3 and NF3 which is more polar. Explain with the help of [2]
dipole moment.
8. Compare relative stability of following species and predict their [3]
magnetic properties: O2, O2+, O2– (superoxide), O22– (peroxide)
9. Explain the structure of PCl5 according to hybridization. Why all [3]
P – Cl bonds lengths are not equivalent in PCl5?
10. (i) 2 is diamagnetic while O2 is paramagnetic. Explain on the [2]
basis of Molecular orbital theory.
(ii) Give reasons for the following: [3]
(a) NH3 has higher boiling point than PH3.
(b) Ionic compounds do not conduct electricity in solid state.
(c) LiCl is more covalent than KCl.

Chemical Bonding And Molecular Structure 73

 States of Matter :
Gases, Liquids
and Solids
FAST TRACK : QUICK REVISION

Magnitude of Intermolecular Forces: Hydrogen bonds > van der Waal

forces (dipole-dipole > dipole-induced dipole > Dispersion forces)
Gas Laws:
(i) Boyle’s Law: V 1/P or PV = constant
or P1V1 = P2V2 (at constant n, T)
V1 V2
(ii) Charles’ Law: V T or (at constant n, P)
T1 T2
(iii) Avogadro’s Law: V n (at constant T, P)
(iv) Gay Lussac’s Law: P T (at constant n, V)
P1V1 P2 V2
Combined Gas Law:
T1 T2
Ideal Gas Equation: PV = nRT
Values of gas constant R:
(i) 0.0821 L atm K–1 mol–1
(ii) 0.083 L bar K–1 mol–1
(iii) 8.314 J K–1 mol–1
(iv) 1.99 Cal K–1 mol–1
Density of gas (d): d = PM/RT ( M = molar mass of gas)
Absolute zero or lowest possible temperature: –273°C or zero Kelvin,
because at this temperature volume of gas becomes zero.
Dalton’s Law of partial pressure: Ptotal = p1 + p2 + p3 +…. (at constant
T&V) for non reacting gases.
Ideal Gas: A gas which obeys ideal gas equation at all temperature and
pressure.
Boyle’s temperature: Temperature at which a real gas behaves like an
ideal gas over an appreciable range of pressure.
Compressibility factor (Z): Z = PV/nRT
(i) For ideal gas Z =1
(ii) or non ideal gas 1
(a) Positive deviation (Z > 1) : shows dominance of repulsive forces
and hence less compressibility e.g. H2, He etc.
(b) Negative deviation (Z < 1) : shows dominance of attractive forces
and hence more compressibility e.g. CH4, CO2 etc.
Conditions under which real gases deviates from ideal behavior: Low
T and high P.
Cause of deviation from ideal behavior: At low T and high P gas molecules
are close enough and hence volume occupied by the gas molecules and
attractive forces between them cannot be negligible.
Conditions under which real gases behaves ideally: High T and low P.
an 2
van der Waals’ gas equation: P v nb nRT
v2
van der Waals’ constant ‘a’:
(i) It represents magnitude of attractive forces between gas molecules.
(ii) Ease of liquefaction of gas Tc ( Tc = critical temperature)
and Ease of liquefaction of gas a
(iii) Unit of ‘a’ is L2 atm mol–2
Van der Waals’ constant ‘b’:
(i) It represents co-volume or excluded volume i.e. effective volume of
gas molecules.
(ii) It is four times of actual volume of gas
(iii) Unit of ‘b’ is L2 mol–1

States of Matter: Gases, Liquids and Solids 75

 Critical temperature: It is the temperature above which a gas can not be
liquefied however large the pressure may be.
3
Total Kinetic Energy of Gas = nRT
2
3 3
Average Kinetic Energy of Gas = RT mol–1 or KT molecule–1
2 2
(k = Boltzmann constant = R/NA)

i erent types of olecular speeds:

(i) Most probable speed: Ump (2RT M)
(ii) Average speed: Uav (8RT M)
(iii) Root mean square speed: Urms (3RT M) or (3PV M)
(i) Vapour pressure T
1
(ii) Vapour pressure
Magnitude of intermolecular forces
1
(iii) Vapour pressure
Boiling point

Surface tension: It is tangential force acting along the surface of a liquid

perpendicularly on one centimeter length of it.
Viscosity: It is internal resistance to the flow possessed by a liquid.
Increase in temperature decreases surface tension and viscosity of liquid.

76 Chemistry Class XI
MIND MAP : STATES OF MATTER

States of Matter: Gases, Liquids and Solids 77

 MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (MCQ)
1. Which of the following property explains the spherical shape of rain
droplets:
(a) Viscosity (b) Critical phenomena
(c) Surface tension (d) Pressure
2. A gas would be most likely to obey the ideal gas law at
(a) Low T and high P (b) High T and high P
(c) Low T and low P (d) High T and low P
3. If P is the pressure and d is the density of gas, then P and d are related as:
(a) P 1/d (b) P d (c) P d2 (d) P 1/d2
4. A gas can be liquefied
(a) above its critical temperature (b) at its critical temperature
(c) below its critical temperature (d) at any temperature
5. Which of the following gas is expected to have highest value of Van der
Waal’s constant ‘a’
(a) NH3 (b) H2 (c) N2 (d) He
6. The compressibility factor (Z) for an ideal gas is:
(a) 1.5 (b) 1.0 (c) 2.0 (d) zero
7. Two separate bulbs contain ideal gas A and B. The density of A is twice
that of B.The molecular mass of A is half that of B. If the two gases are at
the same temperature, the ratio of pressure of A to that of B is:
(a) 2 (b) 1/2 (c) 4 (d) 1/4
8. At which temperature the volume of a gas is expected to be zero.
(a) 0 °C (b) 273 K (c) –273°C (d) 273°C
9. Dominance of strong attractive forces among the molecules of the gas:
(a) Depends on Z and indicates that Z=1
(b) Depends on Z and indicates that Z >1
(c) Depends on Z and indicates that Z < 1
(d) Is independent of Z
10. Which of the following properties of liquid increases on increasing
temperature:
(a) Vapour pressure (b) Viscosity
(c) Surface tension (d) Boiling Point
Ans. 1.(c), 2.(d), 3.(b), 4.(c), 5.(a), 6.(b), 7.(c), 8.(c), 9.(c), 10.(a)

78 Chemistry Class XI
 FILL IN THE BLANKS
1. Pressure vs volume graph at constant temperature is known as…………
2. Surface tension of a liquid ……………with increase in magnitude of
intermolecular forces.
3. …………. is the temperature at which a real gas behave like an ideal gas
over appreciable range of pressure.
4. Z > 1 indicates that the gas is ………….. compressible than expected from
ideal gas behavior.
5. The average kinetic energy of gas molecules is directly proportional to
the……….
6. Internal resistance in flow of liquids is called
. is the temperature above which a gas cannot be liquefied
however large the pressure may be.
8. Poise (P) is the unit of ……………..
9. The vapour pressure of any liquid is ……………. proportional to the
magnitude of the intermolecular forces and is ………….. proportional to
the temperature employed.
10 Van der Waal constant………… represent co-volume and ………..
represent magnitude of attractive forces.
Ans. 1. Isotherm 2. increases 3. Boyle’s temperature 4. less
5. Kelvin temperature 6. viscosity 7. critical temperature
8. viscosity 9. inversely, directly 10. ‘b’, ‘a’

TRUE AND FALSE TYPE QUESTIONS

Write true or false for following statements:
1. At a given temperature and pressure the density of N2 is more than that of
O2.
2. Liquid at higher altitudes boil at a lower temperature.
3. Gases having 1 cannot be liquefied easily.
4. According to the kinetic molecular theory, the collision between gas
molecules is perfectly elastic.
5. Real gases deviate from ideal behavior at low temperature and high
pressure.
6. A gas can be liquified above its critical temperature by applying high
pressure.

States of Matter: Gases, Liquids and Solids 79

 7. Mosquito cannot walk on kerosene oil because its surface tension is less
than that of water.
8. No gas is ideal gas, all gases are real gases.
9. Surface tension increases on increasing temperature.
10. 0°C is known as absolute zero temperature.
Ans. 1. False 2. True 3. False 4. True 5. True
6. False 7. True 8. True 9. False 10. True

MATCH THE COLUMNS

1.
Column-I Column-II
(i) Boyle’s Law (a) V n at constant T & P
(ii) Charle’s Law (b) Ptotal = p1 + p2 + p3 + ….at constant T&V
(iii) Dalton’s Law (c) V T at constant n & p
(iv) Avogadro Law (d) p 1/V at constant n & P
2.
Column-I Column-II
(i) Critical Temperature (a) Boiling Point
(ii) Vapour Pressure (b) Spherical shape of water droplet
(iii) Viscosity (c) Liquefaction of gases
(iv) Surface Tension (d) Flow of Liquids
Ans. 1. (i) (d), (ii) (c), (iii) (b), (iv) (a).
2. (i) (c), (ii) (a), (iii) (d), (iv) (b).

ASSERTION AND REASON TYPE QUESTIONS

In the following questions a statement of assertion (A) followed by a
statement of Reason (R) is given. Choose the correct option out of the
choices given below for each question.
(i) A and R both are correct, and R is correct explanation of A.
(ii) A and R both are correct, but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(iii) A is true but R is false.
(iv) A is false but R is true.
1. Assertion (A): Gases do not liquefy above their critical temperature even
on applying high pressure.
Reason (R): Above critical temperature, the molecular speed is high and
intermolecular attractions can not hold the molecules together because the
escape because of high speed.
80 Chemistry Class XI
 2. Assertion (A): At constant temperature, pV vs V plot for real gases is not a
straight line.
Reason (R): At high pressure all gases have Z >1 but at intermediate
pressure most gases have Z <1.
3. Assertion (A): At zero degree Kelvin,the volume occupied by a gas is
negligible.
Reason (R): All molecular motion ceases at 0 K.
4. Assertion (A): CO2 has stronger intermolecular forces than CH4.
Reason (R): Critical temperature of CO2 is more.
5. Assertion (A): Lower the critical temperature of the gas, more easily can it
be liquefied.
Reason (R): Critical temperature is the temperature above which a gas can
not be liquefied depending upon the pressure.
Ans. 1. (i) 2. (ii) 3. (iii) 4. (i) 5. (iv)

ONE WORD ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS

1. Write SI unit of pressure.
2. Write the value of lowest possible temperature.
3. Write the value of compressibility factor Z for ideal gas.
4. Write the unit of van der Waal constant which represent the magnitude of
attractive forces between gas molecules.
5. Name the gas law which relates volume and pressure of gas at constant
temperature.
6. Name the property responsible for spherical shape of water droplets.
. ame the property which opposes the flow of liquids.
8. Two liquids A and B have vapour pressures 400 mm Hg and 450 mm Hg
respectively at a given temperature. Which liquid has higher boiling point?
9. Critical temperature of N2 and O2 are 126 K and 154.3 K respectively.
Which gas has greater magnitude of attractive forces?
10 Mention the volume occupied by one mole of an ideal gas at STP.
Ans. 1. Pascal 2. –273°C 3. Z = 1 4. L2 atm mol–2 5. Boyle’s law
6. Surface tension 7. Viscosity 8. Liquid A 9. O2 10. 22.7 L

States of Matter: Gases, Liquids and Solids 81

 1-MARK QUESTIONS

1. efine alton’s law of partial pressure of gases.

2. State Boyle’s law.
3. Write van der Waal equation for n mol of gas.
4. Write the conditions in terms of temperature and pressure under which
gases deviate from ideal behavior.
5. Write the relation between pressure and density of gas.
6. Write relation between average kinetic energy and temperature of a gas.
. efine the term absolute zero.
8. In terms of Charles’ law explain why –273°C is known as lowest
temperature?
9. Write SI unit for quantity (PV2 T2)/n2.
10. efine the term Critical temperature.
11. efine Boyle’s temperature.
12. efine surface tension.
13. What is the value of normal boiling point and standard boiling point of
water?
14 At a particular temperature vapour pressure of ethanol is more than that of
water. Give reason.
15 hy vegetables are cooked with difficulty at a hill station

2-MARKS QUESTIONS
1. Name the intermolecular forces present in: (i) H2O (ii) HCl
2. Critical temperature for carbon dioxide and methane are 31.1°C and
81. respectively. hich of these has stronger intermolecular forces
and why?
3. Explain the significance of van der aal parameters.
4. A gas occupies 300 ml at 27°C and 730 mm pressure what would be its
volume at STP. [Ans. 262.2 L]
5. Calculate the temperature at which 28g N2 occupies a volume of 10 litre at
2.46 atm. [Ans. 299.6 K]
6. Compressibility factor, Z of a gas is given as Z = PV/nRT
(i) What is the value of Z for an ideal gas?
(ii) For real gas, what is the value of Z above Boyle’s temperature?
[Ans. (i) Z = 1 (ii) Z > 1]

82 Chemistry Class XI
 7. What will be the minimum pressure required to compress 500 dm3 of air at
1 bar to 200 dm3 at 30°C. [Ans. 2.5 bar]
8. Calculate the volume occupied by 8.8 g of CO2 at 31.1 and 1 bar pressure.
R = 0.083 L bar K–1 mol–1. [Ans. 5.05 L]
9. Calculate the temperature of 4 mol of a gas occupying in 5 dm3 at 3.32 bar.
R = 0.083 bar dm3 K–1 mol–1. [Ans. 50K]
10 The pressure of the atmosphere is 2 × 10–6 mm at about 100 mile from the
earth and temperature is – 180°C. How many moles are there in 1 mL gas
at this attitude? [Ans. 3.45 × 10–13 mol]
11. Calculate average kinetic energy of CO2 molecules at 27°C.
[Ans. 3741.3 J mol–1]
12. Calculate root mean square speed of methane molecules at 27°C.
[Ans. 6.84 × 104 cm s–1]
13. Name two phenomena that can be explained on the basis of surface tension.
14. The van der Waal constants of two gases are as follows:
Gas a (atm L mol–1) b (L mol–1)
A 1.39 0.0391
B 3.59 0.0427
hich of them is more easily liquefiable and which has greater molecular
size?
15. Critical temperatures of NH3 and SO2 are 405.0 and 430.3 K respectively:
(i) hich one is easily liquefiable
(ii) Which has higher value of van der Waal constant ‘a’?
16. Arrange the following in the order of property indicated for each set:
(i) H2O, NH3, HCl, H2 (increasing magnitude of intermolecular forces)
(ii) O2, H2, CO2, SO2 (ease of liquefaction)
(iii) O2, He, CO2, NH3 (decreasing critical temperature)
(iv) O2, He, CO2, CH4 (increasing value of van der Waal constant ‘a’)
17. Arrange Water, ethanol, ether and glycerine in the order of property given
below:
(i) increasing order of vapour pressure
(ii) increasing order of boiling point
(iii) decreasing order of surface tension
(iv) increasing order of viscosity

States of Matter: Gases, Liquids and Solids 83

 3-MARKS QUESTIONS

1. Explain the terms:

(i) Viscosity (ii) Vapour pressure (iii) Boiling point temperature
2. Calculate the total pressure in a mixture of 8 g of dioxygen and 4 g of
dihydrogen confined in a vessel of 1 dm3 at 2 . Ans. 56.025 bar]
3. What will be the pressure exerted by a mixture of 3.2 g of methane and 4.4
g of carbon dioxide contained in a 9 dm3 flask at 2 C . Ans. 0.82 atm]
4. Pressure of one gram of an ideal gas A at 27°C is found to be 2 bar.
hen 2 g of another ideal gas B is introduced in the same flask at same
temperature, the pressure becomes 3 bar. Find the relationship between
their molar masses. [Ans. MB = 4MA]
5. A 20g chunk of dry ice is placed in an empty 0.75 litre wire bottle tightly
closed what would be the final pressure in the bottle after all CO2 has been
evaporated and temperature reaches to 25°C?
[Ans. Pressure inside the bottle = P + atm pressure = 14.828 + 1 = 15.828 atm]
6. A gas at a pressure of 5 atm is heated from 0°C to 546°C and is simultaneously
compressed to one third of its original volume. ind the final pressure of
the gas. [Ans. 45 atm]
7. Calculate the compressibility factor for CO2, if one mole of it occupies 0.4
litre at 300K and 40 atm. Comment on the result.
[Ans. 0.65, since Z < 1, CO2 is more compressible than ideal gas]
8. Find the pressure of 4 g of O2 and 2 g of H2 confined in a bulb of 1 at
0°C. [Ans. 25.215 atm]

5-MARKS QUESTIONS
1. Mention the intermolecular forces present between:
(i) H2O and C2H5OH
(ii) Cl2 and CCl4
(iii) He and He atoms
(iv) Na+ ion and H2O
(v) HBr and HBr

84 Chemistry Class XI
2. (i) For Dalton’s law of partial pressure derive the expression
Pgas = Xgas . Ptotal
(ii) A 2 flask contains 1.6 g of methane and 0.5 g of hydrogen at 2 .
Calculate the partial pressure of each gas the mixture and calculate the
total pressure.
[Ans. PCH = 1.23 atm, PH = 3.079 atm, Ptotal = 4.31 atm]
4 2
3. Using van der Waal’s equation calculate the constant ‘a’ when 2 mole of a
gas confined in a 4 flask exerts a pressure of 11.0 atm at a temperature of
300K. The value of ‘b’ is 0.05 L mol–1. [Ans. 6.49 atm L2 mol–2]

HOTS QUESTIONS
1. A mixture of CO and CO2 is found to have density of 1.50 g L–1 at 20
and 740 mm pressure. Calculate the composition of mixture.
Solution:
Let the mol % of CO in mixture = x
∴ mol % of CO2 = (100 – x)
(x × 28)+ (100 — x) × 24
∴ Average molecular mass =
100
(x × 28)+ (100 — x) × 24 dRT dRT
∴ Because, M =
100 P P

(x × 28)+ (100 — x) × 24 293K

1.50gL—1 0.0821 L atm K —1mol —1
100 100
∴ mol % of CO = 43.38 and mol % of CO2 = (100 – x)
= 100 – 43.38 = 56.62
2. A cylindrical balloon of 21 cm diameter is to be filled up with H2 at NTP
from a cylinder containing the gas at 20 atm at 27°C. The cylinder can hold
2.82 litre of water at NTP. Calculate the number of balloons that can be
filled up.
Solution:
Volume of 1 balloon which has to be filled 4 3 (21 2)3
= 4851 mL = 4.851 litre
et n balloons be filled, then volume of H2 occupied by balloons = 4.851 × n
Also, cylinder will not be empty and it will occupy volume of H2 = 2.82 litre.

States of Matter: Gases, Liquids and Solids 85

 ∴ Total volume occupied by H2 at NTP = 4.851 × n + 2.82 litre
∴ At STP
P2 = 1 atm Available H2
V1 = 4.851 × n + 2.82 P2 = 20 atm
T1 = 273 K T2 = 300K
P1V1 / T2 = P2V2 / T2 V2 = 2.82 litre
or 1 × (4.85 1n + 2.82 / 273) = 20 × 2.82 / 300 ∴ n = 10
3. Calculate the temperature at which CO2 has the same rms speed to that of
O2 at STP.
Solution:
rrms of O2 3RT M at STP, urms of O2 3R 2 3 32
For CO2 urms CO2 3RT 44
Given both are same; 3R × 273 / 32 = 2RT / 44
∴ T =375.38 K = 102.38°C
4. 50 litre of dry N2 is passed through 36g of H2O at 27°C. After passage of
gas, there is a loss of 1.20g in water. Calculate vapour pressure of water.
Solution
The water vapours occupies the volume of N2 gas i.e. 50 litre
∴ For H2O vapour V = 50 litre, w = 1.20g, T = 300K, m = 18 g mol–1
PV = w / m RT or P × 50 = 1.2 / 18 × 0.0821 × 300
∴ P = 0.03284 atm = 24.95 mm

86 Chemistry Class XI
 UNIT TEST
Time Allowed: 1 hr Maximum Marks : 20
General Instructions:
(i) All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Maximum marks carried by each question are indicated against it.

1. If P is the pressure and d is the density of gas, then P and d are related as:
(a) P 1/d (b) P d [1]
(c) P d 2 (d) P 1/d 2

2. At which temperature the volume of a gas is expected to be zero. [1]

(a) 0°C (b) 273 K
(c) –273 °C (d) 273°C
3. efine Boyle’s temperature. 1
4. Write van der Waal equation for n mol of gas. [1]
5. hy vegetables are cooked with difficulty at a hill station 1
6. A gas occupies 300 ml at 27°C and 730 mm pressure what would [2]
be its volume at STP.
7. Compressibility factor, Z of a gas is given as Z = PV/nRT [2]
(i) What is the value of Z for an ideal gas?
(ii) For real gas, what is the value of Z above Boyle’s temperature?
8. Pressure of one gram of an ideal gas A at 27°C is found to be 2 bar. [3]
hen 2 g of another ideal gas B is introduced in the same flask at
same temperature, the pressure becomes 3 bar. Find the relationship
between their molar masses.
9. Calculate the total pressure in a mixture of 8 g of dioxygen and [3]
4 g of dihydrogen confined in a vessel of 1 dm3 at 27°C .
R = 0.083 bar dm3 K–1 mol–1
10. (a) Critical temperatures of NH3 and SO2 are 405.0 and 430.3 K
respectively: [2]
(i) hich one is easily liquefiable
(ii) Which has higher value of van der Waal constant ‘a’?
(b) Explain the terms: [3]
(i) Viscosity (ii) Vapour pressure (iii) Boiling point temperature
*****

States of Matter: Gases, Liquids and Solids 87

 Chemical
Thermodynamics
FAST TRACK : QUICK REVISION

System: Specific part of universe in which observations are made.

Surroundings: Everything which surrounds the system.
Types of the System:
Open System: Exchange both matter and energy with the surroundings.
or example Reactant in an open test tube.
Closed System: Exchange energy but not matter with the surroundings.
or example Reactants in a closed vessel.
Isolated System: either exchange energy nor matter with the surroundings.
or example Reactants in a thermos flask.
Thermodynamic Processes:
(i) Isothermal Process: T 0
(ii) Adiabatic process: q 0
(iii) Isobaric process: P 0
(iv) Isochoric process: V 0
(v) Cyclic process: U 0
(vi) Reversible process: Process which proceeds infinitely slowly by a
series of equilibrium steps.
(vii) Irreversible process: Process which proceeds rapidly and the system
does not have chance to achieve equilibrium.
Extensive Properties: Properties which depend upon the quantity or size
of matter present in the system. or example mass, volume, internal
energy, enthalpy, heat capacity, work etc.
Chemical Thermodynamics 88
Intensive Properties: Properties which do not depend upon the quantity
or size of matter present in the system. or example temperature, density,
pressure, surface tension, viscosity, refractive index, boiling point, melting
point etc.
State Functions: The variables of functions whose value depend only on
the state of a system or they are path independent.
or example pressure (P), volume (V), temperature (T), enthalpy (H),
free energy (G), internal energy (U), entropy (S), amount (n) etc.
Internal Energy: It is the sum of all kind of energies possessed by the
system.
irst aw of Thermodynamics: The energy of an isolated system is
constant.
Mathematical orm: U q w
Sign Conventions for Heat (q) and Work (w):
(i) ve , if work is done on system
(ii) ve , if work is done by system
(iii) q ve , if heat is absorbed by the system
(iv) q ve , if heat is evolved by the system
Work of Expansion/ compression: Pext (Vf Vi)
Work done in Isothermal Reversible Expansion of an Ideal Gas:

rev 2.303 nRT log Vf Vi

or rev 2.303 nRT log Pi Pf
Significance of H U: H qp and U qv
elation bet een H U: H U (np nr)RT for gaseous reaction
(i) H U if (np nr) is zero e.g. H2 (g) I2 (g) — 2 HI(g)
(ii) H U if (np nr) is positive e.g. PCl5 (g) — PCl3 (g) Cl2 (g)
(iii) H U if (np nr) is negative e.g. N2 (g) 3H2 (g) — 2 H3 (g)
Heat Capacity (C): Amount of heat required to raise the temperature of a
substance by 1 C or 1 .
q C T

Chemical Thermodynamics 89
 Specific Heat Capacity (Cs): Amount of heat required to raise the
temperature of 1 g of a substance by 1 C or 1 .
q Cs m T
Molar Heat Capacity (Cm): Amount of heat required to raise the
temperature of 1 mole of a substance by 1 C or 1 .
q Cm n T
Standard State of a Substance: The standard state of a substance at a
specified temperature is its pure form at 1 bar.
Standard Enthalpy of ormation( f Ho): Enthalpy change accompanying
the formation of one mole of a substance from its constituent elements
under standard condition of temperature (normally 2 8 ) and pressure
(1bar).

f H0 of an element in standard state is taken as zero.

Compounds with ve value of 0 more stable than their constituents.
fH
0 ai f H0 (products) bi f H0 (reactants)
rH here a’ and b’
are coefficients of products and reactants in balanced equation.
Standard Enthalpy of Combustion( cH0): Enthalpy change accom-
panying the complete combustion of one mole of a substance under
standard conditions ( 2 8 , 1bar)
Hess’s Law of Constant Heat Summation: The total enthalpy change
of a reaction remains same whether it takes place in one step or in several
steps.
Bond Dissociation Enthalpy: Enthalpy change when one mole of a
gaseous covalent bond is broken to form products in gas phase.
For example, Cl2 (g) — 2Cl(g) Cl – Cl H0 242 k mol 1

or diatomic gaseous molecules Bond enthalpy Bond dissociation

Enthalpy Atomization Enthalpy
or Polyatomic gaseous molecules Bond Enthalpy Average of the
bond dissociation enthalpies of the bonds of the same type.
r H0 bond H0 (Reactants) bond H0 (Products)
Spontaneous Reaction: A reaction which can take place either an its own
or under some initiation.

90 Chemistry Class XI
Entropy(S): It is measure of degree of randomness or disorder of a system.
q rev sys H sys
• Ssys
T T
Unit of Entropy 1 mol 1

Second Law of Thermodynamics: or all the spontaneous processes

totally entropy change must positive.
Stotal Ssys Ssurr 0

Gibbs Helmholtz Equation for determination of Spontaneity:

G H T S
(i) If G ve, the process is spontaneous
(ii) If G ve, the process is non-spontaneous
(iii) If G 0, the process is in equilibrium
Relation between Gibbs Energy Change and Equilibrium Constant:
Go 2.303 RT log c

Third Law of Thermodynamics: The entropy of a perfectly crystalline

solid at absolute zero (0 ) is taken to be zero.

Chemical Thermodynamics 91
 MIND MAP : CHEMICAL THERMODYNAMICS

92
Chemistry Class XI
 MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (MCQ)

1. hich one of the following thermodynamic quantities is not a state

function
(a) Gibbs free energy (b) Enthalpy
(c) Entropy (d) ork
2. All of the following have a standard heat of formation value of zero at
25 C and 1.0 atm except:
(a) 2 (g) (b) e(s)
(c) e (g) (d) H(g)
3. or the following reaction at 25 C, H 115 k and S 125 .
Calculate G for the reaction at 25 :
SBr4(g) ___→ S(g) 2Br2(l)
(a) 152 k (b) 56. k
(c) .8 k . (d) 3 .1 k
4. Calculate rH0 for the following reaction at 25 C :
Fe3O4(s) CO(g) ___→ 3 eO(s) CO2(g)
Hfo (k mol) 1118 110.5 2 2 3 3.5
(a) 263 k (b) 54 k
(c) 1 k . (d) 50 k
5. A system suffers an increase in internal energy of 80 and at the same time
has 50 of work done on it. hat is the heat change of the system
(a) 130 (b) 30
(c) 130 (d) 30
6. The H0 for the following reaction at 2 8 is 36.4 k .
1 2 H2 (g) 1 2 Br2 (l) ___→ HBr(g)
Calculate U0 at 2 8 . The universal gas constant, R, is 8.314 mol .
(a) 35.2 k (b) 35.2 k
(c) 36.4 k (d) 3 .6 k .
. or which of the following reactions would the Ho for the reaction be
labeled Hf0
(a) Al(s) 3 2 H2 (g) 3 2 O2 (g) ___→ Al(OH)3(s)
(b) PCl3 (g) 1 2 O2 (g) ___→ POCl3 (g)

Chemical Thermodynamics 93
 (c) 1 2 2O (g) 1 4 O2 (g) ___→ O (g)
(d) CaO(s) SO2 (g) ___→ CaSO3(s)
8. hich statement is ture for reaction 2H2 (g) O2 (g) ___→ 2H2O (g)
(a) S ve (b) H U
(c) H U (d) H U
. The heat of combustion of yellow phosphorous is . 1 and the red
phosphorous is 8. 8 . The heat of transition of yellow phosphorous to
red phosphorous is :
(a) . 1k (b) 8. 8 k
(c) .34 k (d) 1.13 k
10. Entropy of universe is :
(a) Increasing (b) decreasing
(c) Constant (d) one of these
11. hich is state function
(a) q (b) w
(c) q w (d) one of these
12. According to second law of thermodynamics
(a) Stotal ve (b) Stotal ve
(c) Ssystem ve (d) Ssystem ve
Ans: 1.(d), 2.(d), 3.(c), 4.(c), 5.(b), 6.(d), .(a),
8. (a), .(d), 10.(c), 11.(d), 12.(a), 13.(c), 14.(a)

FILL IN THE BLANKS

(i) is a measure of the degree of randomness or disorder of a system.
(ii) A process which can take place either of its own or under some initiation
is known as ..
(iii) or evaporation of water the sign of H is . . and sign of S is ..
(iv) The entropy of a perfectly crystalline solid is zero at ..
(v) The heat energy exchanged between the system and surroundings at
constant temperature and pressure is known as ....
(vi) is the quantity of heat needed to raise the temperature of one
mole of a substance by 1o
(vii) Cp Cv ..............

94 Chemistry Class XI
(viii) .......... H T S.
(ix) According to . law of thermodynamics, Stotal ve.
(x) If H ve and S ve, the reaction is spontaneous at ... temperature
Ans: (i) Entropy (ii) spontaneous (iii) ve, ve (iv) 2 3
(v) Enthalpy (vi) molar heat capacity (vii) R (viii) G
(ix) second (x) high

TRUE AND FALSE TYPE QUESTIONS

Write true or false for following statements:
(i) or every chemical reaction at equilibrium G0 is zero.
(ii) Entropy is not a state function because its value depends upon the condition
of temperature and pressure.
(iii) uring isothermal expansion of an ideal gas, there is no change in internal
energy.
(iv) q and w are not state function but q w is a state function.
(v) The enthalpy of neutralization of a strong acid by a strong base is always
constant.
(v) or a spontaneous process Ssystem ve.
(vii) The energy of universe is conserved while its entropy is increasing.
(viii) Volume is extensive property while temperature is intensive property.
(ix) At 0 C the entropy of a perfectly crystalline solid is zero.
(x) Hess’ law is a corollary of the first law of thermodynamics.
Ans: (i) alse (ii) alse (iii) True (iv) True (v) True
(vi) alse (vii) True (viii) True (ix) alse (x) True

MATCH THE COLUMNS

1. Column I Column II
(i) State function (a) Pressure
(ii) Extensive property (b) ork
(iii) Intensive property (c) q w
(iv) Path function (d) Heat capacity

Chemical Thermodynamics 95
2.
Column I Column II
(i) H ve S ve (a) Spontaneous at all temperatures
(ii) H ve S ve (b) on-spontaneous at all temperatures
(iii) H ve S ve (c) on-spontaneous at high temperature
(iv) H ve S ve (d) Spontaneous at high temperature
Ans: 1. (i) (c), (ii) (d), (iii) (a), (iv) (b).
2. (i) (d), (ii) (a), (iii) (b), (iv) (c).

ASSERTION AND REASON TYPE QUESTIONS

In the following questions a statement of assertion (A) followed by a statement
of Reason (R) is given. Choose the correct option out of the choices given below
for each question.
(i) A and R both are correct, and R is correct explanation of A.
(ii) A and R both are correct, but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(iii) A is true but R is false.
(iv) A and R both are false.
1. Assertion (A): Enthalpy of graphite is lower than that of diamond.
Reason (R): Entropy of graphite is greater than that of diamond.
2. Assertion (A): Enthalpy of formation of H2O(l) is greater than that of
H2O(g).
Reason (R): Enthalpy change is negative for condensation reaction, H2O(g)
H2O(l)
3. Assertion (A): H and U are same for the reaction (g) O (g) ___→ 2 O(g)
2 2
Reason (R): All the reactants and products are gases.
4. Assertion (A): if both H0 and S0 are positive than the reaction will be
spontaneous at high temperature
Reason (R): All processes with positive entropy change are spontaneous.
5. Assertion (A): Enthalpy of formation of HCl is equal to bond energy of
HCl.
Reason (R): Enthalpy of formation and bond energy both involve the
formation of one mole of HCl from the elements.
Ans: 1. (ii) 2. (i) 3. (ii) 4. (iii) 5. (i)

96 Chemistry Class XI
 ONE WORD ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS

1. w’ amount of work is done by the system and q’ amount of heat is supplied

to the system. hat type of system would it be
2. hat is the work done in free expansion of an ideal gas
3. hat is the sign of G for spontaneous reaction
4. rite the relation between H and U for H2 (g) I2 (g) 2HI (g).
5. rite the SI unit of entropy.
6. ame the calorimeter used to measure U.
. hat is the standard enthalpy of formation of graphite
8. hat is the sign of H for H (g) ___→ 2H (g)
2
. If c 1, what will be the value of G
10. An exothermic reaction is spontaneous at all temperature. hat is the sign
of S
Ans: 1. Closed system 2. 0 3. G ve 4. H U 5. 1 mol 1

6. Bomb calorimeter . ero 8. H ve . ero 10. S ve

1-MARK QUESTIONS

1. ay temp ame the thermodynamic system to which following belong:

(i) Human body (ii) Milk in Thermos flask (iii) Tea in steel kettle
2. Identify State functions out of the following: Enthalpy, Entropy, Heat,
Temperature, ork, ree energy
3. Give two examples of state functions.
4. rite the mathematical statement of first law of thermodynamics.
5. Predict the internal energy change for an isolated system Ans. ero
6. hy H is more significant than U
. rite one example each of extensive and intensive properties.
8. rite a chemical equation in which H and U are equal.
rite the relationship between H and U for the reaction:
C(s) O2(g) ___→ CO2(g)
10. efine standard enthalpy of formation.

Chemical Thermodynamics 97
11. hy is the standard enthalpy of formation of diamond not zero although it
is an element
12. The enthalpy of atomization of CH4 is 1665 k mol 1. hat is the bond
enthalpy of C – H bond Ans. 416.25 k
13. Identify the species for which f H O3, at 2 8 Br2, Cl2, CH4 .
Hint: Cl2 (Br2 is liquid at 2 8 )
14. or the reaction 2Cl(g) ___→ Cl2 (g) what are the sign of H and S
15. or an isolated system U 0, what will be S
16. hy entropy of steam is more than that of water at its boiling point
1 . Out of iamond and Graphite which has higher entropy
18. rite an example of endothermic spontaneous reaction.
1 . State second law of thermodynamics.
20. State third law of thermodynamics.
21. hich has more entropy 1 mol H2 O(l) at 25 C or 1 mol H2O(l) at35 C.
22. At what temperature the entropy of a perfectly crystalline solid is zero
23. or a certain reaction G 0,what is the value of c
24. How can a non spontaneous reaction be made spontaneous
25. or a reaction both H and S are negative. Under what conditions does
the reaction occur.

2-MARKS QUESTIONS

1. In a process 01 of heat is absorbed by a system and 3 4 work is done

by the system. hat is the change in internal energy for the process
Ans. 30
2. either q nor w is state functions but q w is a state function. Explain.
3. Classify the following as extensive or intensive properties :-
Heat capacity, ensity, Temperature, Molar heat capacity.
4. erive the relationship between H and U.
5. erive the relationship Cp Cv R.
6. A 1.25g sample of octane (C8H18) is burnt in excess of oxygen in a bomb
calorimeter. The temperature of the calorimeter rises from 2 4.05 to

98 Chemistry Class XI
 300. 8 .If heat capacity of the calorimeter is 8. 3 k 1. ind the heat
transferred to calorimeter. Ans. 0.0 5 k
. Show that for an ideal gas, the molar heat capacity under constant volume
conditions is equal to 3 2 R.
8. Expansion of a gas in vacuum is called free expansion. Calculate the work
done and change in internal energy when 1 mol of an ideal gas expands
isothermally from I to 5 into vacuum.
. State and explain Hess’s aw of Constant Heat Summation with a suitable
example.
10. erive the relationship between H and U.
Given, 2(g) 3H2(g) ___→ 2 H3(g) r H 2.4 k mol 1

hat is the standard enthalpy of formation of H3 gas

Ans. 46.2 k mol 1

11. Calculate the enthalpy change for the reaction:

H (g) Br (g) ___→ 2 HBr(g).
2 2
Given the bond enthalpies H2, Br2 and HBr are 435 k mol 1, 1 2 k mol 1
and 368 k mol 1 respectively. Ans. 10 k mol 1
12. Is the bond dissociation enthalpy of all the four C – H bonds in CH4 same
Give reason in support of your.
13. efine the term entropy. rite its unit. How does entropy of a system
change on increasing temperature
14. issolution of ammonium chloride in water is endothermic but still it
dissolves in water readily. hy
15. Calculate the entropy change in the surroundings when 1.00 mol of H2O(l)
is formed under standard conditions f H 286 k mol 1.
Ans. 5 . 1 mol 1

16. The enthalpy of vaporization of a liquid is 30 k mol 1 and entropy of

vaporization is 5 1 mol 1. Calculate the boiling point of liquid at

1 atm. Ans. 400

1 . The equilibrium constant for a reaction is 10. hat will be the value of
G R 8.314 1 mol 1, T 300 . Ans. 5.52 k mol 1
18. erive the relationship, G T Stotal for a system.

Chemical Thermodynamics 99
1 . The H and S for 2Ag2 O(s) ___→ 4Ag(s) O2(g) are given 61.1 k
mol 1 and 132 1mol 1 respectively. Above what temperature will the

reaction be spontaneous Ans. 463.4

3-MARKS QUESTIONS

1. ifferentiate between the following (with examples)

(i) Open and Closed System.
(ii) Adiabatic and Isothermal process.
(iii) State function and path function
2. Calculate the maximum work obtained when 0. 5 mole of an ideal gas
expands isothermally and reversibly at 2 C from a volume of 15 to
25 . Ans. 55.
3. Calculate the number of k necessary to raise the temperature of 60 g of
aluminium from 35 to 55 . Molar heat capacity of Al is 24 mol 1 1.
Ans. 1.06 k
4. The reaction of cyanamide, H2C (s), with ioxygen was carried out
in a bomb calorimeter, and U was found to be 42. k mol 1 at 2 8 .
Calculate Enthalpy change for the reaction at 2 8 ,
H C (s) 3 2 O (g) ___→ N (g) CO (g) H O (l)
2 2 2 2 2
Ans. 41.5 k mol 1

5. The enthalpy of combustion of methane, graphite and dihydrogen at

2 8 are 8 0.3 k mol 1, 3 3.5 k mol 1 and 285.8 k mol 1 respectively.
Calculate enthalpy of formation of methane gas. Ans. 4.8 k mol 1
6. Explain the Born Haber Cycle to determine the lattice enthalpy of aCl.
. Enthalpies of formation of CO(g), CO2(g), 2O(g) and 2O4 (g) are 110,
3 3, 81 and . k mol-1 respectively. ind the value of rH for the
reaction 2O4(g) 3 CO (g) ___→ N2O (g) 3CO2 (g)
Ans. . k mol 1
8. The combustion of 1 mol of benzene takes place at 2 8 .After
combustionCO2 and H2O are formed and 326 k mol 1 of heat is liberated.
Calculate f H0 (C6H6).
Given: 0 (CO 286 k mol 1, 0(H 3 3 k mol 1
fH 2) fH 2O)
Ans. 48.51 k mol 1

100 Chemistry Class XI

 . Calculate the standard enthalpy of formation of CH3OH(l) from the
following data:
CH3OH (l) 3 2 O2 (g) ___→ CO2 (g) 2H2O (l) cH 26 k mol 1
C (g) O (g) ___→ CO (g)
2 2 H f 3 3 k mol 1
H2(g) 1 2 O2 (g) ___→ H2O (l) f HO 286 k mol 1
Ans. 23 k mol 1

10. or oxidation of iron, 4 e(s) 3 O2(g) 2 e2O3(s) entropy change is

54 .4 1 mol 1 at 2 8 . In spite of negative entropy change of this

reaction, why is the reaction spontaneous ( rH for this reaction is 1648

k mol 1) Ans. Stotal 4 80.6 1 mol 1

11. Give reasons:

(i) Evaporation of water is and endothermic process but it is spontaneous.
(ii) A real crystal has more entropy than an ideal crystal.
(iii) Entropy of universe is increasing.
12. or the reaction at 2 8 , 2A B ___→ C H 400 k mol 1, S 0.2
k 1 mol 1. At what temperature will the reaction become spontaneous

considering H and S to be constant over the temperature range.

Ans. T 2000
13. Reaction X H ve is spontaneous at temperature T’. etermine
(i) Sign of S for this reaction.
(ii) Sign of G for ___→ X
(iii) Sign of G at a temperature T

5-MARKS QUESTIONS

1. (a) hat is reversible process in Thermodynamics

(b) ame the thermodynamic processes for which : (i) q 0 (ii) U 0
(iii) V 0 (iv) P 0
(c) ater decomposes by absorbing 286.2 k of electrical energy per
mole. hen H2 and O2 combine to form one mole of H2O, 286.2 k
of heat is produced. hich thermodynamic law is proved rite its
statement.
2. (a) Although heat is a path function but heat absorbed by the system under
certain specific conditions is independent of path. hat are those
conditions Explain. Hint: qv U and qp H

Chemical Thermodynamics 101

 (b) It has been found that 221.4 is needed to heat 30g of ethanol from
15 to 18 . Calculate (a) specific heat capacity, and (b) molar heat
capacity of ethanol. Ans. (a) 2.46 g 1 1, (b) 113.2 mol 1 1

3. (a) ifferentiate the terms Bond dissociation enthalpy Bond Enthalpy.

(b) Calculate enthalpy change for the process CCl (g) ___→ C(g) 4Cl(g)
4
and calculate Bond enthalpy of C – Cl bond in CCl4.
Given: 1 1
vap H 30.5 k mol fH (CCl4) 135.5 k mol

aH (C) 15 k mol 1 and aH (Cl2) 242 k mol 1

Ans. 1304 k mol 1, 326 k mol 1

4. Predict the sign of S for the following changes:

(i) reezing of water.
(ii) C(graphite) ___→ C(diamond)
(iii) H2(g) at 2 8 k and 1 bar ___→ H2(g) at 2 8 k and 10 bar
(iv) H (g) I (g) ___→ 2HI(g)
2 2
(v) 2 aHCO3(s) ___→ a2CO3(s) CO2(g) H2O(g)
5. (i) efine Gibbs Energy. Give its mathematical expression. hat is
Gibb s energy criteria of Spontaneity.
(ii) or the reaction:
2A(g) B (g) 2 (g), U 10.5 k and S 44.1 1.

Calculate rG for the reaction, and predict whether the reaction will
occur spontaneously.
Ans. rG 0.16 k , on-spontaneous

HOTS QUESTIONS

1. oes entropy increase or decrease when egg is boiled

Ans.:On boiling egg, entropy decreases as due to denaturation, the helical
structure of protein become more complicated and random coiled structure.
2. 10 g of argon is compressed isothermally and reversibly at a temperature
of 2 C from 10 to 5 l. Calculate q, w, U and , H.
Solution: q 2.303 nRT log V2 V1 2.303 10 40 mol 2 Cal 1

mol 1 300 log 5 10 103.635 Cal

102 Chemistry Class XI

 or isothermal compression U 0
U q 0 ( 103.635) 103.635 Cal
Also when temperature is constant,
PV constant, H U (PV) 0 0 0
3. 1 mole of an ideal gas expand isothermally and reversibly from a pressure
of 10 atm to 1 atm at 300 . Calculate the height to which an object of 50
kg can be lifted by this expansion.
Solution: w(exp.) 2.303 nRT
log Pi Pf 2.303 1 mol 8.314 1mol 1 300 log 10 1
5. 4 103
ow, mgh 5. 4 103 or 50 kg .81 m s 2 h 5. 44 103
∴h 11. m

Chemical Thermodynamics 103

 UNIT TEST
Time Allowed: 1 hr Maximum Marks : 20
General Instructions:
(i) All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Maximum marks carried by each question are indicated against it.

1. or the reaction 2Cl(g) Cl2 (g) what are the sign of H and S 1
2. rite an example of endothermic spontaneous reaction. 1
3. w’ amount of work is done by the system and q’ amount of heat 1
is supplied to the system. hat type of system would it be
4. In a process 01 of heat is absorbed by a system and 3 4 work 2
is done by the system. hat is the change in internal energy for
the process
5. State and explain Hess’s aw of Constant Heat Summation with 2
a suitable example.
6. Calculate the number of k necessary to raise the temperature of 3
60 g of aluminium from 35 to 55 C . Molar heat capacity of
Al is 24 mol 1 1.
. Calculate the standard enthalpy of formation of CH3OH (l) from
the following data:
CH3OH(l) 3 2 O2 (g) CO2 (g) 2H2O (l)
cH 26 k mol 1
C (g) O2 (g) CO2 (g) H 3 3 k mol 1
f
H2(g) O2 (g) H2O (l) H 286 k mol 1
f

8. (a) or oxidation of iron, 4 e(s) 3 O2(g) 2 e2O3(s) entropy change

is 54 .4 1 1
mol at 2 8 . In spite of negative entropy change of
this reaction, why is the reaction spontaneous ( r H for this reaction is
1648 k mol 1) 2
(b) or the reaction: 2A (g) B (g) 2 (g), Uo 10.5 k and
So 44.1 1 o
. Calculate rG for the reaction, and predict whether
the reaction will occur spontaneously. 3
*****

104 Chemistry Class XI

 FAST TRACK : QUICK REVISION

 Equilibrium : It is a state in a process when two opposing processes

(forward and reverse) occur simultaneously at the same rate. The free
energy change at equilibrium state is zero i.e., G = 0.

 Equilibrium constant : For a general reaction :

aA + bB 

 cC + dD

Kc = and Kp =

 Relationship between Kp and Kc :

Kp = Kc (RT) ng

ng = np(g) – nr (g)

 Magnitude of equilibrium constant depends upon the way in which a

reaction is written :

Chemical equation Equilibrium constant

aA + bB 

 cC + dD K

cC + dD 

 aA + bB K1 =

naA + nbB 

 ncC + ndD K 2 = Kn
1 1 1 1
aA bB 
 cC dD
n n n n K3 = K1/n

Equilibrium 105
  Predicting the direction of reaction :
If Qc = Kc The reaction is in a state of equilibrium.
Qc > Kc The reaction proceeds in reverse direction.
Qc < Kc The reaction proceeds in forward direction.

 Ostwald’s dilution law : Degree of dissociation of weak electrolyte,

 Ionic Product of water (Kw) = [H3O+] [OH–] = 10–14 at 298K

 Le-Chatelier’s Principle : When a system of equilibrium is subjected to

a change in temperature, pressure or concentration, the equilibrium shifts
itself in such a way so as to undo or nullify the effect of change.

 Outcomes of Le-Chatelier’s Principle

Change at equilibrium Shift in equilibrium

Increase in temperature Endothermic direction

Decrease in temperature Exothermic direction
Increase in pressure Towards lesser gaseous moles
Decrease in pressure Towards greater gaseous moles
Increase in Conc. of reactants Forward direction
Increase in Conc. of products Reverse direction

 Con ugate Acid or Base : Acid base pair hich di er by H+ ion.

Species – H+ = Conjugate base
Species + H+ = Conjugate acid
 pH of solution :
pH = –log [H3O+] or [H+] = 10–pH , pOH = –log [OH–]
pH + pOH = pKw = 14 at 298K
 Common ion e ect : The depression of ionisation of weak electrolyte by
the presence of common ion from a strong electrolyte is called common
ion effect. or example degree of dissociation of H4OH decreases in the
presence of strong electrolyte H4Cl.

106 Chemistry Class XI

 +

 Hydrolysis of salts and pH of their solutions : Hydrolysis of salt is

defined as the reaction of cation or anion with water as a result of which
the pH of water changes.
1. Salts of strong and strong bases (e.g., aCl) do not hydrolyse. The
solution pH will be 7.
2. Salts of weak acids and strong bases (e.g., CH3COO a) hydrolyse,
pH >7 (The anion acts as a base).
X– + H2O 

 HX + OH–
(Weak acid) (Weak base)
pH = (pKa + log C)

3. Salt of strong acids and weak bases (e.g., H4Cl) hydrolyse, pH < 7.
(The cation acts as an acid).
M+ + H2O 

 MOH + H+

pH = (pKb + logC)

4. Salt of weak acids and weak base (e.g., CH3COO H4) hydrolyse. The
cation acts as an acid and anion as a base but whether the solution
is acidic or basic depends upon the relative values of Ka and Kb for
these ions.
M+ + X– + H2O 

 MOH + HX

pH = (pKa – pKb)

 Bu er solutions : The solutions, which resist the change in pH on dilution

or addition of small amounts of acid or base, are called buffer solutions.

 Basic bu er : Solution of weak base and its salt with strong acid, For e.g.,
H4OH H4Cl
 Acidic bu er : Solution of weak acid and its salt with strong base, For
e.g., CH3COOH + CH3COO a.

 Henderson Hasselbalch E uation for the pH of Bu er solution

pH = pKa + log (for acidic buffer)

pOH = pKa + log (for basic buffer)

Equilibrium 107
  Solubility Product ( sp) : The equilibrium constant that represent the
equilibrium between undissolved salt (solute) and its ions in a saturated
solution is called solubility product constant (Ksp).
For AxBy xAy+ + yBx–

Ksp = [Ay+]x [Bx–]y = (xs)x (ys)y = xx. yx. s(x+y)

where s = Molar solubility

If ionic product < Ksp ; salt remain dissolve.
If ionic product > Ksp ; salt will be precipitated.

 elationship bet een solubility (s) and solubility product ( sp).

Ksp = xx.yy. sx + y
For binary salts (e.g., AgCl, AgBr, AgI) Ksp = s2
For Ternary salts (e.g., PbI2) Ksp = 4s3

108 Chemistry Class XI

 MIND MAP : EQUILIBRIUM
Effect of Pressure
Equilibrium Constant EQUILIBRIUM !ng = 0 No effect
aA + bB ! cC + dD !ng > 0 On increasing pressure
c d
[C] [D] Non Ionic Ionic Entities backward reaction favoured
Kc = a b Entities and vice-versa
[A] [B] Ionic Equilibrium
c d
!ng < 0 On increasing pressure
[PC] [PD] backward reaction favoured
Kc = a b
Chemical
[PA] [PB] Equilibrium and vice-versa

K p = Kc(R5) and
!ng = (c + d) + (a + b)
Effect of Concentration
Gaseous component A, B, C & D
Le-Chatlier If reactant concentration increases or
Principle product decreases then forward reaction
forward and vice-versa
Reaction Quotent
c d
[C] [D]
Qc = a b Effect of Volume (Opposite ‘P’ Effect)
[A] [B]
!n = 0 No effect
Q c = Kc Reaction is at equilbrium !n > 0 On increasing pressure
Q c < Kc Forward reaction favoured backward reaction favoured
Q c > Kc Backward reaction fovoured till and vice-versa
new equilibrium is re-establish !n < 0 On increasing pressure
backward reaction favoured
and vice-versa

Equilibrium
Effect of Temperature Effect of Inert Gas (N2, Xe, Kr, etc.)
!H
K2 1 1 If inter gas is added at constant condition then
log = = R ( –) no effect is observed
K1 2.303 T 1 T1
If inter gas is added at constant pressure then
For endothermic reaction !H is + at !ng = 0 No effect
If T increases, forward reaction favoure
!ng > 0 Forward reaction fovoured
and otherwise backward reaction

109
If T decreases, For Exothermic opposite effect !ng < 0 Forward reaction fovoured
110 Chemistry Class XI
 MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTION (MCQ)
1. For the hypothetical reactions, the equilibrium constant (k) values are
given

A B : k1 = 2

B C: K2 = 4

C D : K3 = 8

The equilibrium constant (K) for the reaction A D is

(a) 48 (b) 24 (c) 12 (d) 64
2. The equilibrium constant for the reaction
1
SO2(g) + O (g) SO3(g) is 5 × 10–2 atm–1/2
2 2
The equilibrium constant for the reaction

2SO3(g) 2SO2(g) + O2(g) would be

(a) 100 atm (b) 25×10–4 atm (c) 400 atm (d) 125 ×19-6 atm–3/2

3. A(g) + 3B(g) 4C(g) initial concentration of A is equal to that of B. The

equilibrium concentrations of A and C are equal. What is the equilibrium
constant for

4C(g) A(g) + 3B (g)

(a) 4 (b) 1/8 (c) B (d) 16
4. The equilibrium reaction that is not affected by volume change at constant
temperature is

(a) H2(g) + Cl2(g) 2HCl(g) (b) 2(g) + 3H2(g) 2 H3(g)

(c) PCl5(g) PCl3(g) + C12(g) (d) H2(l) + CO2(g) H2CO3(l)

5. For the reaction CO(g) + Cl2 (g) COCl2(g), the value of Kc/Kp is
equal to
(a) RT (b) RT (c) 1/RT (d) 1.0
6. At 90°C pure water has Kw = 10–12. The solution with pH value 6.5 is
(a) Acidic (b) Basic (c) Amphoteric (d) ata insufficient

Equilibrium 111
 . 40 ml of 0.1 M H4OH is mixed with 20 mL of 0.1 M HCl. What is the
pH of the mixture? (pKb of ammonia solution = 4.74)
(a) 4.74 (b) 2.26 (c) 9.26 (d) 5
8. Identify Bronsted Lowry Acids in the reaction
[Al(H2Ol6]3– + HCO3 [Al(H2O)5(OH)]2+ + H2CO3
(X) (Y) (P) (Q)

(a) X, Y (b) Y, P (c) P, Q (d) X, Q

9. The pKa of weak acid HA is 4.80 and pKb of a weak base BOH is 4.78.
The pH of an aqueous solutions of corresponding salt BA will be
(a) 7.01 (b) 4.79 (c) 9.22 (d) 10.0
10 If ‘P’ M is the solubility of KAl(SO4)2, then Ksp is equal to
(a) p3 (b) 4p4 (c) p4 (d) 4p3

TRUE AND FALSE TYPE QUESTIONS

1. Equilibrium state can be achieved if a reversible reaction is carried out in
closed or open container.

2. For a reaction 2A(g) B (g) Qc > K if ‘A’ is added maintaining

Qc > K, the reaction will move in backward direction.
3. For the reaction at equilibrium
CaCO3 CaO(s) + CO2(g)
What CaO(s) is removed reaction moves in forward direction.
4. For a reaction aA + bB cC + dD at eqilibrium G = 0 always.

5. For a reaction at equilibrium H2(g) + Cl2(g) 2HCl(g)

K b [HCl]2
K = 4, the value of is 1.
K f [H 2 ][Cl2 ]
6. For the electrolyte A2B if Ksp is solubility product then its solubling ‘S’
M is [Ksp] 4.
7. HCO–3 is conjugate base of H2CO3.
8. H2O can act as acid as well as base.
. The pH of buffer solution remain same when any amount of dilution is
done.

112 Chemistry Class XI

 10. For a salt AB2(s) solution if Ionic product (I.P) > Ksp, then precipitation
will take place.

Ans. 1. False 2. True 3. False 4. False 5. True

6. True 7. True 8. True 9. False 10. True

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. At equilibrium rate of forward reaction is always equal to ..................

2. Kp & Kc are ....... for reaction at equilibrium of type H2(g) + Br2(g) 2HBr(g).
3. If Kc for reaction CH3COOH(l) + C2H5OH CH3COOC2H5(l) + H2O(l)
is 4. Then Qc and Kc are .................
4. If A+B –70J/mol D, reaction temperature is increased then reaction
moves in ............... direction.
5. Presence of catalyst will ...... the equilibrium constant.
6. The conjugate acid of H2O is ..............
7. On dilution, the degree of dissociation of acetic acid will ..............
8. The presence of H4Cl in H4OH solution will ............. the degree of
dissociation of H4OH.
9. If Ionic product (IP) < Ksp for a salt solution of AB, then addition of AB
further ........... lead to precipitation initially.
10. Kp is always equal to Kc if ng is ............
Ans. 1. rate of backward reaction, 2. equal, 3. equal, 4. forward,
5. not change, 6. H3O+, 7. increase, 8. decrease, 9. will not, 10. zero

MATCH THE COLUMNS

1.
Column-I Column-II
A) a(g) 3H2(g) 2 H3(g); H = - ve P) K increases with increase in temp
B) 2N (g) + 2O (g) 4 NO(g) : H = +ve Q) K decreases with increase in tem-
2 2
perature
C) X(g) 2Y(g) H = +ve R) Pressure has no effect
D) PC1 (g) PC13 + Cl2 ; H = +ve S) Product moles increases due to
5
addition of inert gast at constant
pressure.

Ans. (A) Q (B) P, R (C) P, S (D) P, S

Equilibrium 113
 2.
Coloumn-I Column-II
A) Salt of weak acid and weak base P) pH = ½ (pKw + pKa + logc)
B) Salt of weak Acid and strong Base Q) pH = ½ (pKw + pKa – pkb)
C) Salt of strong acid and strong base R) pH = ½ (pKw – pKb – logc)
D) Salt of strong acid and weak base S) pH = ½ (pKw)

Ans. (A) Q (B) P (C) S (D) R

ASSERTION - REASON TYPE QUESTION

Each question contains statement-1 (assertion) and Statement-2 (Reason)
Examine the statements carefully and mark the correct answer according
to the instruction given below :
A. If both the statements are true and statement -2 is the correct explanation
of statement-I
B. If both the statements are true but statement-2 is not the correct explanation
of statement-I
C. If statement-I is true and statement-2 is false
D. If statement-I is false and statement-2 is true.
1. Statement-1 : The endothermic reactions are favoured at lower temperature
and the exothermic reactions are favoured at higher temperature.
Statement-2 : when a system in equilibrium is disturbed by changing the
temperature, it will tend to adjust itself so as to overcome the effect of
change.
2. Statement-1 : The melting point of ice decreases with increase of pressure
Statement-2 : Ice contracts on melting.
3. Statement -1 : The gas phase reaction PCl3(g) + Cl2(g) PCl5(g) shifts
to the right on increasing pressure.
Statement-2 : When pressure increase, equilibrium shifts towards more
number of moles.
4. Statement-1 : The physical equilibrium is not static but dynamic in nature.
Statement-2: The physical equilibrium is a state in which two opposing
process are proceeding at the same rate.
5. Statement-1 : The catalyst does not after the equilibrium constant.
Statement-2 : Because for the catalysed reaction and uncatalysed reaction
H remains same and equilibrium constant depends on H.

114 Chemistry Class XI

 6. Statement-1 : If water is heated to 59°C, the pH will increase.
Statement-2 : Kw increases with increase in temperature.
7. Statement-1: Addition of HCl(aq.) to CH3COOH (aq.) decrease the
ionisation of CH3COOH (aq.).
Statement-2 : ue to common ion effect H+, ionisation of CH3COOH
decreases.
8. Statement-1: Sparingly soluble salts AB and XY2 with the same solubility
product, will have different solubility.
Statement 2: Solubility of sparingly soluble salts depends upon solubility
product.
9. Statement-1 : The ionisation constants of weak diprotic acid are in the
order of Ka1 > Ka2.
Statement-2 : Removal of H+ from anion is difficult as compared to neutral
atom.
10. Statement-1 : In a titration of weak acid with strong base, the pH at the
half equivalence point is pKa.
Statement-2 : At half equivalence point, it will form acidic buffer at its
maximum capacity where [Acid] = [Salt].
Ans.: 1. D, 2. A, 3. C, 4. A, 5. A, 6. D, 7. A, 8. B, 9. A, 10. A

ONE WORD ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS

1. What is sum of pH + pOH at 25ºC? [Ans. 14]
2. rite the Henderson Hasselbalch equation for acidic buffer
[SALT]
Ans. pH = pka + l0g
[ACID]
3. How is degree of dissociation related with concentration terms and Ka,
for weak electrolyte. Ans. Ka / c
4. How H3 is defined as ewis base
[Ans. It contain Lone paid of electrons]
5. How are Kp and Kc related? [Ans. Kp = Kc (RT) n]
6. How does affected for endothermic reaction if temperature is increased
[Ans. K get decreased]
. hat is the effect of catalyst on Ans. remains unaffected
8. How is pH scale affected by increasing temperature
[Ans. pH scale gets contracted]
9. What is the conjugate base of HCO3– ? [Ans. CO32–]
10. What is the nature of CH3COOH in conc. HCl solution?
[Ans. Bronsted Base]
Equilibrium 115
 1-MARK QUESTIONS
1. efine physical equilibrium. Give an example also.
2. Fizz is observed when soda water bottle is opened. Why ?
3. Justify the statement : ‘Both physical and chemical equilibrium are dynamic
in nature’
4. State Henry’s law.
5. In a reversible reaction, the two substances are in equilibrium. If the
concentration of each one is reduced to half, then what is the effect on the
equilibrium constant ?
6. K1 and K2 are equilibrium constant for reactions (1) and (2)
(i) 2(g) + O2(g) 2 O(g)
(ii) O(g) 12 2(g) + 1/2 O2(g)
Calculate the relation between K1 and K2.
7. Write the equilibrium constant expression for the following reaction :
3 Fe(s) + 4 H2O(g) Fe3O4(s) + 4 H2(g)
8. Classify the equilibrium as homogeneous or heterogeneous :
CH3COOC2H5(aq.) + H2O(1) CH3COOH(aq.) + C2H5OH (aq.)
(PNH3 )
9. Kp = 3 1
(PH2 ) 2 (PN2 ) 2

Write the balanced chemical equation corresponding to the above

expression.
10. Give the direction in which the reaction would proceed if Qc > Kc.
11. Hb(s) + O2(g) HbO2(s)
Predict the direction in which equilibrium gets shifted if partial pressure
of O2(g) is lowered.
12. Discuss the position of equilibrium if the following reaction is carried out
in the presence of catalyst.
2SO2(g) + O2(g) 2SO3(g)

13. Which of the following are Lewis acids ?

H2O, BF3, H+, H4+

116 Chemistry Class XI

14. Write the conjugate acids for the following Bronsted bases.
C6H5OH, H2O
15. Write the conjugate bases for the following Bronsted acids.
H2O, CH3COOH.
16. Which of the following are Lewis acids ?
(a) H2O (b) AlCl3 (c) H4+
17. efine Ostwald’s dilution law.
18. SO32– is Bronsted base or acid and why ?
19. Why pH of our blood remains almost constant at 7.4 though we quite often
eat spicy food ?
20. pH of black coffee is 5.0 at 25 C. Is black coffee acidic or basic
[Ans. Acidic]
21. What will be the value of (pKa + pKb) at 25ºC.
22. hat will be the pH of 1 M O3 solutions at 25ºC?
23. CaCl2(s) + H2O(l) CaCl2(aq.) + Heat
Discuss the solubility of CaCl2 if temperature is increased.
24. Why does the solubility of CO2 decrease with rise in temperature ?
25. The solubility of A2 X3 is y mol dm–3. Calculate its solubility product.
26. Write the Ksp expression for Al (OH)3.
27. What is the condition for precipitation of a salt ?
28. Pridict whether the solution is acidic, basic or natural when H 4 O3
undergo hydrolysis.
29. Explain why pure aCl precipitates out when HCl gas is passed through
the solution of aCl
30. Give the Henderson’s Hasselbalch equation for an acidic buffer solution.
31. On which of the factors the equilibrium depend : Temperature, nature of
reactant and product, initial concentration and pressure of the reactants.
32. Arrange the following in increasing acidic strength HCl, HBr, HF, HI
[Ans. HF < HCl < HBr < HI]

Equilibrium 117
 33. Arrange the following in increasing Lewis base strange
H3, BiH3, PH3, AsH3, SbH3
[Ans. BiH3< SbH3 < ASH3< PH3 H3]
34. Arrange following in increasing pH value
0.1M CH3COOH, 0.1 M aCl, 0.1MHCl, 0.1M aOH, 0.1M H4OH
[Ans. 0.1MHCl < 0.1M CH3COOH 0.1M aCl
0.1 H4OH 0.1M aOH
35. Arrange following in increasing order of degree of hydrolysis.
0.1M H4OH, 0.01 M H4OH, 10-5 M H4OH, 10-3 M H4OH, 10-6 M
H4OH
[Ans. 0.1M H4OH < 10-2 M H4OH, 10-3M H4OH<
10-5M H4OH < 10-6 M H4OH]
36. Arrange following in increasing order of acidic strengh
CH3COOH, HCOOH, CH3CH2COOH, C6H5COOH, CH2COOH
[Ans. CH3COOH < C6H5COOH < HCOOH < CH2FCOOH]
37. Arrange following in increasing order of basic strength in gas phase
H3, (CH3)2 H, (CH3)3 , CH3 H2
[Ans. H3 H3 H2 < (CH3)2 H (CH3)3
38. Arrange the following pkb in increasing order

[Ans. pK2 < pK1 < pK4 < pK3]

39. Arrange the basic strength of following
F–, Br–, Cl–, I–
[Ans. I– < Br– < Cl– < F–]
40. Arrange the following in increasing base strength
CH3–, H2–, OH–, F–
[Ans. F– < OH– H2 < CH3]

118 Chemistry Class XI

 2-MARKS QUESTIONS

1. The standard Gibbs energy change at 300 k for the reaction 2A B+

C is 2494. 2 J. At a given temperature, and time. the composition of the
reaction mixture is [A] = ½, [B] = 2, [C] = ½. The reaction proceed in the
(R = 8.314J/K/mo1, = 2.718) [Ans. Reverse direction]

2. The equilibrium constant for

2(g) + O2(g) 2 O(g) is , then calculate equilibrium constant

for 2(g) + ½O2(g) O(g). Ans. K]

3. or the reversible reaction 2(g) + 3H2(g) 2 H3(g) at 500°C, the

value of Kp is 1.44×10–5 atn–2. Find the Kc value.
[Ans. 1.44 × 10–5 / (0.082 × 773)–2]

4. The equilibrium constant at 298 K for the reaction A + B C + D is

100. If the initial concentration of all the four species were 1M each, then
equilibrium concentration of D will be [Ans. 1.818]

5. For the reaction

H4COO H2(g) 2 H3(g) + CO2(g)
If equilibrium pressure is 3 atm. Find the value of Kp [Ans. 4]

6. A buffer solution with pH is to be prepared by mixing H4Cl that should

be added to one litre of 1.0m H4OH kb 1.8 × 10-5
[Ans. H4Cl = 1.8 M]

7. Calculate the solubility of silver chloride in water at room temperature if

the Ksp of AgCl is 1.6×10-10. [Ans. 1.26 × 10-5M]

8. Calculate the molar solubility of i(OH)2 in 0.10m aOH. The ionic

product of i(OH)2 is 2.0 × 10-15. [Ans. 2.0 × 10-13M]

9. Calculate the pH of 10-8 M HCl solution. [Ans. 6.96]

10. How many grams of aOH must be dissolved in I of the solution to give
it a pH value of L2? [Ans. 0.4g]

Equilibrium 119
 3-MARKS QUESTIONS

1. The equilibrium constant for the reaction H2(g) + Br2(g) 2HBr(g) at

5
1024 K is 1.6×10 . Find the equilibrium pressure of all gases if 10.0 bar
of HBr is introduced into a sealed container at 1024K. [Ans. 10 bar]
2. For the reaction 2BrCl(g) Br2(g) + Cl2(g) Kc is 32 at 500 K. If initially
pure BrCl is present at a concentration of 3.30 ×10-3 M, what is its molar
concentration in the mixture at equilibrium? [Ans. 3.0 × 10-4 M]
3. What is the equilibrium constant Kp and Kc for the reaction PCl5(g)
PCl3(g) + Cl2(g) if the pressure is 1.0 atm in 8.0L container at equilibrium.
[Ans. Kc = 0.04 Kp = 1.77]
4. The Kp for the reaction, 2O4(g) O2(g) is 640 mm at 775 K. Calculate
the percentage dissociation of 2O4 at equilibrium pressure of 160mm.
At what pressure the dissociation will be 50%.
[Ans. 70.7%, P = 480 mm]
5. Show that degree of dissociation ( ) for the dissociation of PCl5 into PCl3
1/ 2
Kp
and Cl2 at pressure P is given by
P kp
6. How much of 0.3M H4OH should be mixed with 30 mL of 0.2m solution
of H4Cl to give a buffer solution of pH 10. pkb for H4OH is 4.75.
[Ans. V = 112.5 mL]
7. Predict whether a precipitate will be formed or not on mixing 20 mL of
0.001 aCl solution with 80 m of 0.01 M Ag O3 solution. Ksp for
AgCl is 1.5 × 10-10. [Ans. Yes, ppt will formed.]
8. The values of sp of two sparingly soluble salts i(OH)2 and AgC are
2.0 × 10-15 and 6.0 × 10-17 respectively. Which salt is more soluble. Explain
[Ans. S i(OH) = 5.8 × 10-5M : S(Ag C ) = 7.8×10-9M . i(OH)2
2
is more soluble]
9. The ionization constant of propanoic acid is 1.32×10-15. Calculate the
degree of ionization if its solution is 0.05 M. What will be its degree of
ionization if the solution is 0.01 M in HCl solution.
[Ans. 1.62 × 10-2, 1.32 × 10-3]
10. Calculate the pH of a solution obtained by mixing 50ml of 0.2M HCl with
4 . m of 0.2m aOH solution. Ans. 3.699]

120 Chemistry Class XI

 HOTS QUESTIONS

1. The molar solubility of Cd(OH)2 is 1.84 × 10-5M. Calculate the expected

solubility of Cd(OH)2 in a buffer solution of pH 12.
2 —
Ans. Cd(OH) 2  Cd (aq.) 2OH (aq.)
S 10–2
2.49 × 10-14 = S(10-2)2 ∴ S = 2.49 × 10-10M
2. An aqueous solution contains an unknown concentration of Ba2+. When 50
ml of a 1M solution of a2SO4 is added. BaSO4 just begins to precipitate.
The final volume is 500ml. The solubility product of BaSO4 is 1×10-10.
Find the original concentration.
50 1
Ans. K sp Ba 2 SO 42— Ba 2 10 —9 500
500
Ba2+ = 10–9 M
10–9 × 500 = 450 × M ∴ M = 1.11 × 10–9M
3. An aqueous solution contains 0.10 M H 2S and 0.20 M HCl. If the
equilibrium constants for the formation of HS– from H2S is 1.0 ×10–7 and
that of S2– from 4S– ions is 1.2×10–13, then find the concentration of S–2
ions in aqueous solution.
Ans. H2S(aq.) 2H+ + S2–
(0.1 – x) (2x + 0.29) x
Ka = Ka × Ka = 1.2 × 10–20
1 2
2
0.2 S2—
1.2 × 10–20 = , [S2–] = 3 × 10–20
0.1
4. How many litres of water must be added to 1 litre of an aqueous solution
of HCl with a pH of 1 to create an aqueous solution with pH of 2?
Ans. 0.1 × 1 = (1 + v) (0.01) v = 9L
5. A certain buffer solution contains equal concentration of X– and HX. The
Kb for X– is 10–10. ind the pH of the buffer .
10 —14
Ans. ka.kb = 10–14 ∴ ka 10 —4
10 —10
[x — ]
pH = pka + log
[Hx]
1
∴ pH = 4 + log = 4 ∴ pH = 4
1

Equilibrium 121
 6. The yield of Ammonia as a function of time in the reaction 2(g) +
3H2(g) 2 H3(g), H < O at (P, T) is given below:

If this reaction is conducted at T2 > T1, then plot the yield of H3 as a

function of time on same graph
T1
Ans. Initially on increasing temperature the
T2
rate of reaction increases, however since the %
reaction is exothermic therefore yield of H3 (yield)

get decreased overall after a certain interval of

time.
Time

. Consider the reaction H4COO H2(s) 2 H3(g) + CO2(g) at a certain

temperature, the equilibrium pressure of the system is 0.318 atm. Find Kp
of the decomposition of ammonium carbonate.
Ans. Ptotal = 3P ∴ P = 0.318/3 = 0.106
Kp = 4P3 = 4.76 × 10–3
8. The equilibrium constant for the reaction CO(g) + H2O(g) CO2(g) +
H2(g) is 5. How many moles of CO2 must be added to 1 litre container
already containing 3 moles each of CO and H2O to make 2M equilibrium
concentration of CO?
Ans. CO + H2O CO2 + H2
t=0 3 2 x 0
At equilibrium 2 2 x+1 1
x 1
∴ S x 19
4

9. At constant temperature, the equilibrium constant Kp

2O4 2 O2 is given by
2
4x P
kp where, P = Pressure and X = Extent of reaction
1— x

122 Chemistry Class XI

 How does the value of Kp change on following changes
(a) ‘P’ increases
(b) X changes
(c) ‘P’ decreases
Ans. Kp is equilibrium constant which does not change on changing the
P, x.Kp depends on temperature.
10. When two reactants A and B are mixed to give product 'c' and 'p' the
reaction quotient 'Q' at the initial stages of the reaction will be?
Ans. In the beginning of the reaction Q = 0. As the reaction proceeds in
the forward direction Q starts increasing.
At chemical equilibrium Q = K

Equilibrium 123
 UNIT TEST
Time Allowed: 1 hr Maximum Marks : 20
General Instructions:
(i) All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Maximum marks carried by each question are indicated against it.

1. What is the pH 10–3 M HCl solution ? [1]

(a) 1 (b) 11 (c) 3 (d) 14
2. Which one can act as Arrhenius Acid ? [1]
(a) H3 (b) H2O (c) HCl (d) C6H5OH
3. Write the conjugate base of CH3COOH + H2. [1]
4. Write the relation between Kp and Kc. [1]
5. What is the nature of following reaction [1]
Exothermic or endothermic
A + B – 70J —→ C
6. The pKa of CH3COOH and p b of H4OH are 4.76 and 4.75 respectively.
Calculate the pH of CH3COO H4. [2]
. hat is a buffer solution. Calculate the pH of the solution obtained by
adding 4mol of CH3COOH with 3 mol of aOH in 1 litre container. 2
pKa, CH3COOH = 4.74 log2 = 0.3010 log3 = 0.4771
8. Calculate the molar solubility of i(OH)2 in 0.1M KOH solution. The Ksp
for i(OH)2 is 2.0×10–15. [3]
9. Kp = 0.04 atm at 899 K for the equilibrium shown below. What is the
equilibrium concentration of 2H6 when it is placed in a flask at 4.0 atm
pressure and allowed to come to equilibrium. [3]
C2H6(g) C2H4(g) + H2(g)
10. Ionization constant of Benzoic acid is 6.46×10-5 and Ksp for silver benzoate
is 2.5 × 10-13. How many times is silver benzoate more soluble in buffer
of pH 3.19 compared to its solubility in pure water.
[H+] = 6.46 ×10–4 [5]
*****

124 Chemistry Class XI

 Chapter - 8 Redox
Redox
Reactions
Reactions
FAST TRACK : QUICK REVISION

Oxidation and Reduction :

Oxidation Reduction
1. Addition of oxygen 1. Removal of oxygen
2. Removal an Hydrogen 2. Addition of Hydrogen
3. Addition of an electronegative 3. Removal of an electronegative
element. element.
4. Removal of an electropositive 4. Addition of an electropositive
element element.
5. Loss of electron(s) 5. Gain of electron(s)
6. Increase in oxidation number. 6. Decrease in oxidation number.

 Reducing Agent : Donor of electrons.

 Oxidising Agent : Acceptor of electrons.
 Redox Reaction : Reactions in which oxidation and reduction takes place
simultaneously.
 Oxidation Number : It is charge that an atom appears to have in a given
species when the bonding electron are counted towards more electro-
negative atom.
 Calculation of Oxidation Number :
(a) Oxidation number of all the elements in their elemental form (in
standard state) is taken as zero. Oxidation number of element in a
molecule Cl2, F2, O2, P4, O3, Fe, H2, N2, C (graphite) is zero.
(b) Common Oxidation number of elements of first group is 1. Common
Oxidation number of elements of second group 2.
(c) For ions composed of only one atom, the oxidation number is equal
to the charge on the ion.
 (d) The oxidation number of oxygen in most compounds is – 2. While in
peroxides (e.g., H2O2, Na2O2), each oxygen atom is assigned an
oxidation number of 1, in super oxides (e.g., KO2, RbO2) each
oxygen atom is assigned an oxidation number of – (½).
(e) In oxygen difluoride (O 2) and dioxygen difluoride (O2F2), the oxygen
is assigned an oxidation number of 2 and 1, respectively.
(f) The oxidation number of hydrogen is 1 but in metal hydride its
oxidation no. is 1.
(g) In all its compounds, fluorine has an oxidation number of 1.
(h) The algebraic sum of the oxidation number of all the atoms in a
compound must be zero.
(i) In polyatomic ion, the algebraic sum of all the oxidation numbers of
atoms of the ion must equal the charge on the ion.
 Types of Redox Reactions:
(i) Combination Reaction : 0 0 +2 –3
3 Mg (s) 2 (g) → Mg3N2 (s)
(ii) Decomposition Reaction : +1 +5 – 2 +1–1 0
2KClO3(s) → 2 C1(s) 3O2 (g)
(iii) Metal Displacement : + 2 + 6 – 2 0 +2+6–2 0
CuSO4 (aq) n(s) → nSO4 (aq) Cu (s)
(iv) Non-metal displacement : 0 +1–2 +2–2+1 0
Ca (s) 2 H2O (1) → Ca (OH)2 H2 (g)
(v) Disproportionation reactions : It is a reaction in which same
element is reduced and oxidized simultaneously.
0 –1 +1
C12 (g) 2 OH– (aq) → Cl– (aq) ClO– (aq) H2O (1)

 Stock Notation : Representing oxidation number of metal in Roman

numerals within parenthesis after the symbol or name of metal in the
molecular formula or name of a compound. For e.g., Stock Notation of
Ferric oxide is Fe2(III)O3 or Iron (III) oxide.
 Fractional Oxidation Number : When two or more atoms of an element
are present in different oxidation states, then calculated oxidation number
may comes out as fractional due to average of all the different oxidation
states.

126 Chemistry Class XI

 In reality no element can have a fractional oxidation state.
 Balancing of Redox Reactions :
(A) Oxidation number method
(B) Half reaction method
 Electrode Potential (E) : Potential difference between electrode and
electrolytic solution due to charge separation.
 Standard Electrode Potential (E ) : Electrode Potential measured at 298
and 1M concentration of metal ions (or 1 bar pressure of gas).
 Electrochemical Cell : A device in which chemical energy of a spontaneous
redox reaction is converted into electrical energy.

Cell diagram: Zn | Zn2+ || Cu2+ | Cu

HS oxidation, n → n2 2e–
RHS reduction Cu2 2e– → Cu
Overall reaction n(s) Cu2 (aq) → n2 (aq) Cu(s)
 Representation of an Electrochemical cell :
———— Flow of electrons ———→
———— Flow of current ———
n(s) n2 (aq) || Cu2 (aq) | Cu(s)

Left Electrode Salt Bridge Right Electrode

LOAN Oxidation Reduction
Anode Cathode
Negative Positive

 Functions of Salt Bridge : (i) To complete inner circuit. (ii) To maintain

electrical neutrality around electrodes.

Redox Reactions 127

 MIND MAP : REDOX REACTIONS

128
REDOX
REACTION
ELECTROCHEMICAL
2+ 2+
Zn |Zn | |Cu |Cu
REDUCTION OXIDATION
E°Cell = E – EL° = E°Cathode– E °Anode
2+ 2+
Zn + Cu Zn + Cu
2+
! Addition of Hydrogen ! Addition of oxygen Types of Redox Reaction
E ° – 0.0591 log [Zn 2+]
= ECell
Na + H2 !" NaH Mg + O2 !" MgO ! Combination Reactioin Cell 2 [Cu ]
O O
+4 –2
C + O2 !" C O2
! Addition of electropositive element ! Addition of electronegative E °Cell = 0 At equilibrium

Chemistry Class XI
2HgCl2 + SnCl2 !" Hg2Cl2 + SnCl4 element ! Decomposition Reaction ECell < 0 Non spontaneous reaction
+5 O
–2 –1
Mg + F2 !" MgF2 2KCl O3 !" 2KCl + 3O2
! Removal of Oxygen ECell > 0 Spontaneous reaction
2HgO !" 2Hg(l) + O2(g) ! Removal of Hydrogen ! Displacement Reaction

! Removal of electronegative element

2H2S + O2 !" 2S + 2H2O a) Metal Displacement
2FeCl3 + H2 !" 2FeCl2 + 2HCl ! Removal of electronegative Cr2O3 + 2Al !" Al2O3 + 2Cr
element b) Non-Metal Displacement
! Gain of electron or decrease in
2K4[Fe(CN)6] + H2O2 !" 2Na + 2H2O !" 2NaOH + H2
oxidation number
+ – 2K3[Fe(CN)6] + 2KOH
2Na + Cl2 !" 2NaCl ! Disproportionation Reaction
Cl get reduced ! Loss of electron or increase in H2O2 !" 2H2O + O2
oxidation number
+ –
2Na + Cl2 !" Na Cl
Oxidant or Oxidising Agents Na — oxidise
Substance which get reduced and help
to oxidise other substance.

Reduction / Reducing Agent

Substance which get oxidised itself but
help to reduce others substance is called
Reducing Agent / Reductant.
 MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (MCQ)
1. The oxidation state of e in e3O4 is
(a) 2 (b) 3
8
(c) (d) 2, 3
3
2. The oxidation state of 'S' in KAl(SO4)2 .12H2O is
(a) 2 (b) 1
(c) 2 (d) 6
3. Oxidation state carbon in C3O2 is
4
(a) (b) 0
3
(c) 2 (d) 0, 2
4. The reaction S8 12OH– —→ 4S2– 2S2O32– 6H2O is
(a) Combination reaction (b) Decomposition reaction
(c) Non-metal displacement (d) Disproportionation reaction
5. E0 for H /H2 is
(a) 0 (b) 1V
(c) 1.0V (d) 2.0V
6. hich one act as strong oxidising agent
K 2. 3V, Ag /Ag = 0.80, Hg2 Hg 0. V
(a) K (b) K
(c) Hg2 (d) Ag
. The coefficient of HCl in balance reaction is
Pb3O4 HCl → PbCl2 Cl2 H2O
(a) 1 (b) 8
(c) 3 (d) 4
8. Sum of oxidation numbers of all Bromine atoms in Br3O8 is
(a) 6 (b) 4
(c) 16 (d) 20
. In the reaction 6ClO2– —→ 4ClO3– 2Cl–, Cl– ion is
(a) Oxidised Reduced (b) Reduced
(c) Odixised and (d) Neither Oxidised nor reduced

Redox Reactions 129

10. 'I' can not act as reducing agent in following state
(a) 1 (b) 1
(c) (d) 5
Ans: 1. (d) 2. (d) 3. (d) 4. (d) 5. (a) 6. (d) . (b) 8. (c) . (c) 10. (d)

FILL IN THE BLANKS

(i) Oxidation is __________ of electrons.
(ii) S.H.E. stands for __________.
(iii) Oxidation state of Oxygen in O2F2 is __________.
(iv) Disproportionation is a type of __________ reaction.
(v) Oxidant is one which __________ electron..
(vi) Cl2 2OH– —→ ClO– C1– is a __________ type of reaction.
(vii) Oxidation state of F is always either ______ or _____ .
(viii) Oxidation state of Oxygen in O3 is __________ .
(ix) Reducing agent are also called __________.
(x) Hydrogen economy is use of Hydrogen as _________.
Ans: (i) loss, (ii) standard hydrogen electrode, (iii) 1, (iv) redox, (v) gain,
(vi) disproportionation, (vii) 0, 1, (viii) zero, (ix) reductant, (x) fuel

TRUE AND FALSE TYPE QUESTIONS

(i) In Redox reaction first oxidation take place.
(ii) Oxidising agents are also called reductant.
(iii) luorine cannot have 1 oxidation state.
(iv) O2 has oxidation state of oxygen as .
(v) If for the reaction Ca2 2e– —→ Ca(s); EO = –2.87
Then for the reaction 2Ca2 4e– —→ Ca(s); EO 2( 2.8 )V
(vi) Salt bridge is used for enhancing E° values of individual half reaction.
(vii) Anode is –ve charged in Galvanic cell.
(viii) KCl can be use in salt bridge.
(ix) Current flows in galvanic cell from Anode to cathode.
(x) MnO4– is colourless in basic medium.
Ans: (i) False (ii) False (iii) True (iv) True (v) False
(vi) False (vii) True (viii) True (ix) False (x) False
130 Chemistry Class XI
 MATCH THE COLUMNS
1. Column-I Column-II
(a) CH4 2O2 —→ CO2 2H2O (p) Disproportionation
(b) Cr2O3 2A1 → Al2O3 2Cr (q) on-metal displacement
(c) e 2HCl → FeCl2 H2 (r) Metal displacement
(d) P4 3OH– 3H2O → PH3 3H2PO2– (s) Metal displacement
Ans. (a) – (s) (b) – (r) (c) – (q) (d) – (p)

2. Column-I Column-II
(Oxidation sate of N)
(a) O (p) 5
(b) NO2 (q) 3
(c) NO2– (r) 4
(d) NO3– (s) 2
Ans. (a) – (s) (b) – (r) (c) – (q) (d) – (p)

ASSERTION AND REASON TYPE QUESTIONS

Each question contain statement-1 (Assertion) and statement-2 (Reason)
Examine the statements carefully and work the correct answer according
to the instruction given below :
(a) If both the statements are True and Statement-2 is the correct
explanation of the statement-1
(b) If both the statements are True and statement-2 is not the correct
explanation of statement-1
(c) If statement-1 is true and statement-2 is alse.
(d) If statement-1 is false and statement-2 is True.

1. Statement - 1 : In H , the oxidation state of ' ' is 1

Statement - 2 : ' ' being most electronegative, will have -1 oxidation in
its compound.
2. Statement - 1 : Oxygen has zero oxidation state in O2.
Statement - 2 : Element in their elemental form have zero oxidation state.
3. Statement - 1 : Oxidation state of Oxygen in H2O is 1.
Statement - 2 : H2O has peroxide linkage.
Redox Reactions 131
4. Statement - 1 : or the reaction n Cu2 —→ n2 Cu Ecell is ve.
Statement - 2 : For standard Hydrogen electrode E° = 0
5. Statement - 1 : 2H2O2 —→ 2H2O O2 is Decomposition reaction
(Redox).
Statement - 2 : Oxygen has -2 oxidation state in H2O.
6. Statement - 1 : C O2 —→ CO2 ; carbon get oxidised.
Statement - 2 : Gain of Hydrogen is reduction.
. Statement - 1 : CaCO3 —→ CaO CO2 is not redox reaction.
Statement - 2 : C, Ca, O do not change their oxidation number in the
reaction.
8. Statement - 1 : Oxidation also occurs when decrease in electron density
is observed.
Statement - 2 : Oxidation is gain of electro-positive element.
. Statement - 1 : Cr2O72– is a self indicator.
Statement - 2 : MnO4– acts as a self indicator.
10. Statement - 1 : Equivalence point comes first before end point.
Statement - 2 : Equivalence point cannot be obtained even by graphical
method.
Ans: 1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (b) 5. (d) 6. (b) . (a) 8. (c) . (d) 10. (d)

ONE WORD ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS

1. hat is the oxidation number of S in S8.
2. What is the oxidation state of Oxygen in H2O2.
3. Name the substance used in salt-bridge.
4. Name an indicator which can act as self-indicator.
5. When a substance gains electron, it is called :
6. ame the ion which is used for balancing the hydrogen atom in acidic
medium.
. In the reaction 3Mg 2 ––→ Mg3N2, Nitrogen is oxidised or reduced.

Ans: 1. zero 2. 1 3. NH4Cl or KCl 4. KMnO4

5. Reduction 6. H 7. Reduced

132 Chemistry Class XI

 1-MARK QUESTIONS
1. efine oxidation and reduction according to electronic concept.
2. efine oxidation and reduction according to oxidation number.
3. A freshly cut apple is almost white but it turns reddish brown after
sometime. Give reason.
4. efine oxidation number.
5. Write oxidation number of Mn in KMnO4.
6. Write oxidation number of Cr in Cr2O72–.
7. Write Stock notation of MnO2 and AuCl3.
8. efine redox reaction with example.
9. efine disproportionation reaction. Give one example.
10. efine the term redox titration.
11. Name the indicator used in redox titration involving K2Cr2O7 as an
oxidizing agent.
12. At what concentration of Cu2 (aq.) will electrode potential become equal
to its standard electrode potential ? [Ans. 1 M
13. The standard reduction potentials of three metals cations X, and are
0.52, 3.03 and 1.18 V respectively. Arrange X, and in order of
increasing reducing power. [Ans. X
14. An electrochemical cell consists of two electrodes i.e., Anode and Cathode.
hat is the direction of flow of electrons in this cell
15. Why anode is negatively charged in an electrochemical cell?
16. Out of n and Cu vessel one will be more suitable to store 1 M HCl
[Ans. Cu
Given 0. 6 V, 0.34 V.
15. Is it safe to stir 1 M Ag O3 solution with copper spoon ?

Given 0.80 V, 0.34 V. Ans. o

Redox Reactions 133

 2-MARKS QUESTIONS
1. Identify oxidant and reductant in the reaction :
I2 (aq) 2S2O32– (aq) ––→ 2 I– (aq) S4O62–(aq).
2. Calculate oxidation number of Fe in Fe3O4 and write a suitable justification
of your answer.
3. Oxidation-reduction reactions are complementary. Explain.
4. Write formula for the following compounds :
(i) Mercury (II) chloride
(ii) Nickel (II) sulphate
(iii) Iron (III) sulphate
(iv) Chromium (III) oxide
5. Justify that the reaction : H2O(s) 2 ––→ H HO is a redox reaction.
6. A decomposition reaction may or may not be a redox reaction. Write two
decomposition reactions in support of the statement.
7. Split the reaction 2 (s) C12 (g) ––→ 2 C1 (s) into oxidation and
reduction half reactions.
8. Calculate the oxidation number of underlined elements in following
compounds :
(i) CaO2 (ii) H2S2O7 (iii) K2MnO4 (iv) KI3
9. Write the functions of salt bridge in an electrochemical cell.
10. efine the term redox couple. rite the practical application of redox
couple.
11. The standard reduction potentials of two metals A and B are 0. 6 V and
0.34 V respectively. An electrochemical cell is formed using electrodes
of these metals.
(i) Identify the cathode and anode.
(ii) rite the direction of flow of electron.

134 Chemistry Class XI

 3-MARKS QUESTIONS
1. Calculate oxidation number of :
(i) Cr in Cr2O42–
(ii) O in KO2
(iii) Na in Na2O2.
2. Account for the following :
(i) HNO3 acts as oxidizing agent while HNO2 can act both as reducing
and oxidizing agent.
(ii) AgF2 is unstable compound and act as a strong oxidizing agent.
(iii) Ozone acts as an oxidising agent.
3. Permanent ion (MnO4–) reacts with sulfur dioxide gas in acidic medium
to produce Mn2 ion and hydrogen sulphate ion. Write ionic equation and
balance by ion electron method.
4. Balance the following equation by oxidation number method :
P4(s) OH– (aq) ––→ PH3 H2PO2– (aq) [Basic Medium
5. Balance the following equation by ion electron method :
C12O7 (g) H2O2 (1) → ClO2– (aq) O2 (g) [Basic medium
6. Depict the galvanic cell in which the reaction
n (s) 2 Ag (aq) ––→ n2 (aq) 2 Ag (s) takes place. urther show :
(i) Which electrode is negatively charged ?
(ii) The carriers of the current in the cell
(iii) Individual reaction at each electrode.
7. Explain with suitable reasons :
(i) Reaction FeSO4 (aq) Cu (s) → CuSO4 (aq) e does not occur.
(ii) inc can displace copper from aqueous CuSO4 solution but Ag cannot.
(iii) Solution of AgNO3 turns blue when copper rod is immersed in it.

Redox Reactions 135

 5-MARKS QUESTIONS
1. (i) MnO42– undergoes disproportionation reaction in acidic medium but
MnO4– does not. Give reason.
(ii) Give one example each of the following redox reactions:
(a) Combination reaction
(b) Decomposition reaction
(c) Metal displacement reaction
2. Consider the cell reaction of an electrochemical cell : i(s) 2 Ag (aq) →
Ni2 (aq) 2 Ag (s) and answer the following questions :
(i) Write anode and cathode half reactions.
(ii) Mention the direction of flow of electrons.
(iii) How is the electrical neutrality maintained in the solutions of the two
half cells ?
(iv) Write the formula for calculating standard emf of this cell.
(v) How does the emf change when the concentration of silver ions is
decreased ?
3. Justify the reason that following reactions are redox reactions.
(a) CuO (s) H2 (g) ——→ Cu (s) H2O (g)
(b) Fe2O3 3CO (g) → 2 e (g) 3CO2 (g)
(c) NH3 (g) 5O2 (g) ——→ 4 O (g) 5H2O (g)
(d) BCl3 (g) 3 iAlH4 ——→ B2H6 iCl AlCl3
(e) 2 2 ——→ 2KF
[Hints:– CuO is oxidizing agent, H2 is acting as reducing agent because Cu (II)
is changing to Cu (0) by gain of e– H2 is getting oxidised to H2O (g), its
oxidations sate is changing from 0 to 1, by loss of electrons.
(ii) It is redox reaction: Fe2O3 is getting reduced to fe. CO is getting oxidised
to CO2.

136 Chemistry Class XI

4. Using standard electrode : Predict if the reaction between as the following is
feasible.
(i) Fe3 (aq) and I– (aq)
(ii) Ag and Cu
(iii) Fe3 and Br– (aq)
(iv) Ag and Fe3 (aq)
(iv) Br2 (aq) and Fe2 (aq)
Hint:– E I /I– 0.541 V, E Cu2 /Cu, 0.34V, E Br2/Br– 1.0 V, E Ag /Ag 0.80V,
2
E Fe3 /Fe2 0. V.
5. Draw the diagram for the galvanic cell which would have overall chemical
reaction as
n 2Ag ——→ n2 2Ag.
Answer the following :
(i) Write the reactions occurring at each electrode.
(ii) In which directions do the electrons flow in the external circuit
(iii)Name the salt to be taken in salt bridge.
(iv) Label the anode and cathode.
(v) How does the EMF change when the concentration of solvers ions is
decreased?

HOTS QUESTIONS
1. 6 10–3 mole K2Cr2O7 reacts completely with 10–3 mole Xn to give
XO3– and Cr3 . Find the value of X.
5
Ans. K2Cr2O7 Xn —→ X O3– Cr3
6 10–3 6 (5-n) 10–3 —→ n 1
2. For the redox reaction
K2Cr2O7 X H2SO4 SO2 —→ K2SO4 Cr2(SO4)3 H2O
hat is the sum of x y z
Ans. K2Cr2O7 H2SO4 3SO2 —→ K2SO4 Cr2(SO4)3 H 2O
∴x 1 y 3 z 1 ∴x y z 5

Redox Reactions 137

3. An aqueous solution containing 1M each of Au 3, Cu 2, Ag , Li is being
electrolysed using inert electrodes the value of standard potentials are
E Ag /Ag
0.80 V, E Cu 2 Cu
/C4
0.34 V, E Au 3 /Au
1.50 V, E Li /Li
3.03V

ith increasing voltage, find the sequence of deposition of metals on the

cathode.
Ans. Only Au3 , Ag and Cu2 will deposit at cathode.
Li will not deposit at cathode be cause SRP of water is -0.82 4V
So after Cu2 ; H2 will evolve at cathode.
4. E for Cl2 (g) 2l– —→ 2Cl– (aq.) is 1.36 V, then calculate.
E for 4C1– (aq.) —→ 2Cl2(g) 4e–
Ans. E Cl /Cl2
1.36 E is independent of amount of substance

5. Why salt bridge is made up of saturated solution of KNO3 in agar–agar.

Ans. Velocities of both and NO3– are nearly the same.

138 Chemistry Class XI

 UNIT TEST
Time Allowed: 1 hr Maximum Marks : 20
General Instructions:
(i) All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Maximum marks carried by each question are indicated against it.

1. Identify the oxidised and Reduced species in the following reaction 1

H2S Cl2 —→ 2HCl S
(a) H2S (b) Cl2 (c) Both H2, Cl2 (d) None of these

2. What is the oxidation state of Br in BrO3– ? 1

(a) 1 (b) 3 (c) 4 (d) 5
3. Classify the type of reaction in Redox Reaction form : 1
3H2O P4 3OH– —→ PH3 3H2PO2–
4. What is a redox couple? Give one example.
5. Identify oxidant in reaction given below : 1
CuO(s) H2 (g) —→ Cu(s) H2O(g)
6. Assign oxidation number to the underlined elements 2
(a) NaH 2 PO 4NaH PO
P2(b)
H24 NaH HNaH
O4 72 PO44 P
K OH
PO
2 22MnO 442K
74 P OH MnO
HP2 S
(c)
72 4 2K
O247O
2 MnO7
K
H22 MnO
4
S2 OH7 4(d) H SO
2 S2 O 7 2 2 7

. Predict product of electrolysis in following case 2

- An aqueous solution of CuCl2 with platinum electrodes.
8. Consider the reaction n(s) 2Ag (aq.) —→ n2 (aq.) 2Ag(s)
Answer following : 3
(i) Which electrode is negatively charged ?
(ii) What are carrier of current in the cell ?
(iii) Individual reaction at each electrode.
9. E values are given : K 2. 3V, Ag Ag 0.80V 3
2
Hg Hg 0. V Mg Mg 2 3
2.3 V, Cr Cr 0. 4V
(i) Which one is strong reducing agent ?
(ii) Which one is strong oxidising agent ?
(iii) Which redox couple is a stronger reducing agent than H /H2 ?
10. Balance the reaction (ion-electron or oxidation number) 5
– –
P4(s) OH (aq.) —→ PH3 (g) H2PO2 (aq.) Basic medium
*****
Redox Reactions 139
 Chapter - 9
Hydrogen
FAST TRACK : QUICK REVISION

 Hydrogen is the first element in the periodic table and also the lightest
element known. Electronic configuration of Hydrogen is 1s1.
 Isotopes of hydrogen :
(i) Protium (11H)
(ii) euterium (12H or 12D)
(iii) Tritium (13H or 13T)
 Preparation of Dihydrogen :
(i) Laboratory preparation : Zn + 2H+ → Zn2+ + H2.
(ii) Commercial preparation : By electrolysis of acidified water.
(iii) High purity dihydrogen is obtained by electrolysing warm aqueous
barium hydroxide.
 Properties :
Reaction with halogen: H2 + X2 → 2HX X , Cl, Br, I
Reaction with oxygen: H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O(l);
Hø 285. k mol 1

Reaction with nitrogen: 3H2(g) + N2(g) → 2NH3(g);

Hø 2 k mol 1

Reaction with alkali metals: H2(g) + 2M(g) → 2MH(s)

It is relatively inert at room temperature due to the high H-H bond enthalpy.
 Uses of Dihydrogen :
(i) or synthesis of Ammonia ( H3)
 (ii) or production of Methanol (CH3OH)
(iii) In oxyhydrogen torches
(iv) In a fuel cell.
 Hydrides
(i) Ionic or salt like or saline hydrides are formed with most of the
s-block elements. Significant covalent character is found in iH, BeH2
and MgH2.
(ii) Covalent or Molecular hydrides are formed with most of the p-block
elements. There are further classified as :
(a) Electron deficient hydrides are formed by group 13 elements e.g.,
B2H6. They acts as ewis acid.
(b) Electron Precise hydrides are formed by group 14 elements e.g.,
CH4.
(c) Electron rich hydrides have lone pair of electrons on central atoms of
the molecules. Elements of group 15-1 form these types of hydrides.
NH3, H has high m.p. b.p. due to presence of intermolecular hydrogen
bonding.
(iii) Metallic or Non-stoichiometric or Interstitial hydrides are formed
by d and f -block elements. or example a H2.8 or NiH0.6 0. .
 Water : (H2O)
Hard water : Hard water contains calcium and magnesium salts in the
form of hydrogencarbonate, chloride and sulphate. Hard water does not
give lathers with soap.
Soft water : ater free from soluble salts of calcium and magnesium is
soft water.
Types of Hardness :
Temporary hardness is due to presence of calcium or magnesium
hydrogen carbonate in water. Temporary hardness can be removed by :
(i) Boiling
(ii) Clark’s Method
Permanent hardness :
Such hardness is due to presence of calcium or magnesium chlorides and
sulphates.

Hydrogen 141
 Permanent hardness can be removed by :
(i) Treatment with washing soda
(ii) Calgon’s method
(iii) Ion exchange method.
Demineralised or Deionised water : ater free from all soluble mineral
salts is known as demineralised water.
 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2)
Preperation :
(i) By electrolytic oxidation of acidified sulphate solutions at high current
density.

(ii) 2-Ethylanthraquinol H2O2 (Oxidised product)

 Physical Properties
(i) Miscible with water in all proportions.
(ii) A 30 of H2O2 solution is marked as ‘100 volume’ hydrogen
peroxide.
 Chemical Properties :
(i) It acts as an oxidising as well as reducing agent.
(ii) Oxidising action in acidic medium :
2Fe2+(aq) 2H+ (aq) H2O2 (aq) → 2Fe3+ (aq) 2H2O(l)
(iii) Reducing action in acidic medium :
2MnO4– + 6H+ + 5H2O2 → 2Mn2+ + 8H2O SO2
 Storage of H2O2 :
(i) Stored in wax-linked glass or plastic vessels in dark. Urea can be
added as a stabiliser.
(ii) It is kept away from dust because dust can induce explosive
decomposition of the compound.
 Uses of H2O2 :
(i) As an antiseptic it is sold in the market name perhydrol.
(ii) In synthesis of hydroquinone.
(iii) As a bleaching agent.

142 Chemistry Class XI

1. Auto–protolysis of water: ater accepts a proton from other water
molecule to from H3O+ and OH– this porous is called auto protolysis of
water
H2O(l) !!
H2O(l) ↽!⇀! H3O+ (aq) OH– (aq)
Its significance is that water can act as acid as well as base i.e. it is
amphoteric in nature.
2. Hydrogen economy: It is transportation and storage of energy in the form
of liquid or gaseous hydrogen. Advantage of hydrogen economy is that
energy is transmitted in the form of dihydrogen and not as electric power
3. Hydrogenation: It is a process of converting polyunsaturated oils in edible
fats.
Ni
Vegetable oil H2 > Vanaspati ghee (fat).
473K
4. Syngas: It is a mixture of CO and H2 in 1:1 ratio and also known as water
gas or syntnesis gas.
1270 K
C(s) + H2O(g) > CO2 + H2(g)
Ni
Carbon Carbon monoxide

5. ater gas shift reaction.

673 K
CO + H 2 O >CO 2 + H 2
iron chromate as catalyst

6. Fuel-cell: uel cell is a cell in which chemical energy of fuel is converted

into electrical energy.
7. Structure of water: It is bent molecule in gas phase with HOH bond
angle 104.5 and O H bond length of 5. pm as shown if figure

Hydrogen 143
 8. Calgon:– It is sodium polymetaphosphate ( aPO3)n it is used to remove.
Permanent hardness of water.
9. De-ionized water:– Pure di-mineralised (ionized water) free from all
soluble mineral matter is obtained by passing water successively through
a cation exchanger (in the H+ form) and an anion exchanger for removal
by cation and anions

144 Chemistry Class XI

 MIND MAP : HYDROGEN

Hydrogen
145
 MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (MCQ)

1. hat is the strength of 20 volume solution of H2O2?

(a) 5g (b) 10g (c) 30g (d) 60g
2. The number of H2O molecules which are involve in Hydrozen bonding
in CuSO4.5H2O molecule itself is
(a) H3PO2 (b) H3PO3 (c) H3PO4 (d) PH3
3. P4O10 on hydrolysis produces
(a) H3PO2 (b) H3PO3 (c) H3PO4 (d) PH3
4. D2O has higher value of following physical parameters than H2O, except
(a) Molecular Mass (b) Melting Point
(c) ensity (d) ielectric Constant
5. hich one is ionic hydride in nature
(a) CrH (b) H3 (c) H2O (d) aH
6. Syn-gas is a mixture of
(a) CO 2 (b) O3 (c) CO H2 (d) CO + H2CO3
7. The electronic conguration of ' ' (Isotope of Hydrogen)
(a) 1s2 (b) 1s22s1 (c) 1s1 (d) 1s22s22p1
8. hich group forms hydride
(a) 6 (b) (c) 8 (d)
9. When MnO4– reacts with H2O2 in basic medium then following species
are involved, except
(a) MnO2 (b) O2 (c) OH– (d) Mn2+
10. Select the incorrect statement for H2O2 structure
(a) It is non planar
(b) O – O bond length is more in gaseous state than in solid phase
(c) Both OH bond are in different plane
(d) O – O – H bond angle in gas phase is more than in solid phase
Ans: 1. (d) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (d) 5. (d) 6. (c) . (c) 8. (a) . (d) 10. (d)

146 Chemistry Class XI

 TRUE AND FALSE TYPE QUESTIONSE

1. H2O2 decomposes slowly on exposure to light.

2. H2O2 on reaction with Pbs convert Pbs into Pb.
3. Chemically calgon is sodium hexametaphosphate a6P6O18.
4. NH3 is electron rich hydride.
5. Phosphorus form PH5.
6. H2 gas cannot reduce Pb2+ ion.
7. Hydroformylation of olefins yields aldehydes which futher undergoes
reduction to give alcohols.
8. Hydrogenation of vegetable oils using nickel as catalyst gives edible fats.
9. Ice has cage like structure with air spaces.
10. Soft water gives lather with Soap.
Ans: 1. True 2. alse 3. True 4. True 5. alse
6. alse . True 8. True . True 10. True

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. Cation exchange resin contain large organic molecule with group.
2. At atmospheric pressure ice crystallises in for.
3. ue to high of H2O, H2O has a very strong hydrating tendency.
4. ater is present in Cr(H2O)6 3+.3Cl– in the form of .
5. The H-H bond dissociation enthalpy of H2 is , is the highest
for a single bond between two atoms of any elements.
6. In the Clark's method for softening compound is used.
7. uring photosynthesis H2O is .
8. BeH2 and MgH2 are ionic and in nature.
9. hen aH is electrolysed, then is released at anode.
10. Hydrated sodium aluminium silicate is .
Ans: 1. SO3H 2. Hexagonal 3. ielectric 4. Coordinated water
5. 435.88 kj mol-1 6. Ca(HCO3)2 . Oxidised 8. Polymeric
. H2 10. eolite Permutit

Hydrogen 147
 MATCH THE COLUMNS

1. Column -I Column-II
A. Boiling p. CaCO3
B. Clark's Method q. Mg(OH)2
C. ashing soda r. aAISiO4
. Ion-exchange method s. aCl

2. Column -I Column-II
A. H2O + NH3 !!
↽!⇀! OH + NH4+ p. Hydroformylation
B. 2H2O 2 a → 2 aOH H2 q. Acid base reaction
C. P4O10 + 6H2O → 4H3PO4 r. Redox Reaction
. 2H2 + CO + RCH = CH2 s. Hydrolysis reaction
→ RCH2CH2CH2O4
Ans. 1. A→ q, B → p, C → s, D→ r
2. A→ q, B → r, C → s, D→ p

ONE WORD ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS

1. ame the gas release when zinc reacts with aOH.

2. hen brine solution is electrolysed then nature of solution will be
3. hat happens when Al4C3 reacts with 2O?

4. In which medium H2O2 act as reducing agent

5. hat is the chemical name of calgon's
6. hat happens when iH reacts with Al2C16?
7. hat happens when warm aqueous Barium hydroxide solution is
electrolysed
8. hat type of particles are emitted by Tritium
9. hat is the name for the following chemical reaction
CO(g) + H2O(g) → CO2(g) + H2(g)

148 Chemistry Class XI

 10. hat is the term used to refer Transportation and storage of energy in
the form of liquid or gaseous dihydrogen
Ans: 1. H2 2. Basic 3. Al4C3 12 2O → 3CD4 4Al(O )3
4. Acidic, Basic
5. Sodium hexameter phosphate ( a6P6O18)
6. 8 iH Al2Cl6 → 2 iAlH4 6 iCl
. H2 gas is produced 8. (beta negative)
. ater gas shift reaction 10. Hydrogen economy

ASSERTION AND REASON TYPE QUESTIONS

Each question contain statement-1 (Assertion) and statement-2 (Reason). Examine

the statements carefully and mark the correct answer according to the instruction
given below :
(A) If both the statements are True and statement-2 is the correct explanation of
statement-1
(B) If both the statements are True and statement-2 is not the correct explanation
of statement-1
(C) If statement-1 is true and statement-2 is false
( ) If statement-1 is false and statement-2 is true

1. Statement-1 : H form extensive hydrogen bonding.

Statement-2 : has highest tendency to form hydrogen bonding.
2. Statement-1 : MgCl2 solution produces lather with soap.
Statement-2 : Hard water does not produce lather with soap.
3. Statement -1 : ensity of ice is less than water.
Statement-2 : Ice has open cage structure.
4. Statement-1 : ater can act as acid as well as base.
Statement-2 : ater can accept as well as donate H+ ion.
5. Statement-1 : MnO4 act as self indicator.
Statement-2 : MnO4 only act as reducing agent.
6. Statement-1 : ashing soda ( a2CO3) is use to remove temporary
hardness.
Statement-2 : Clark's method is used to remove temporary hardness.

Hydrogen 149
 . Statement-1 : In cation exchange process, H+ exchanges for a+, Ca2+,
Mg2+.
Statement-2 : In anion exchang process OH– exchanges for anion like
Cl–, HCO3–, SO42-.
8. Statement-1 : hen a reacts with H2O, H2 gas is release.
Statement-2 : P4O10 on hydrolysis produce H3PO3.
. Statement-1 : CH4 is a covalent hydrides.
Statement-2 : CH4 is dectron precise type hydrides.
10. Statement-1 : H2 gas is use in metallurigical process.
Statement-2 : H2 gas is use as fuel.
Ans: 1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (a) 5. (c) 6. (d) . (b) 8. (c) . (a) 10. (b)

1-MARK QUESTIONS
1. ame the isotope of hydrogen which is radioactive in nature. Ans. Tritium
2. H+ ions does not exist freely and is always associated with other atoms or
molecule. Explain.
3. Give the composition of water gas. Ans. CO, H2
4. ame the compound whose electrolysis in aqueous state, give high purity
( . 5 ) dihydrogen. Ans. aq Ba(OH)2 solution
5. Give the main purpose of water gas shift reaction.
6. rite the chemical reaction occuring during coal gasification.
7. ame the element used in fuel cell for generating electricity. Ans. H2
8. Give an example of electron deficient covalent hydride. Ans. B2H6
9. ame the hydrides which have high potential for hydrogen storage.
[Ans. Metallic hydrides
10. ame the groups in d-block elements which do not form metallic hydrides.
[Ans. , 8,
11. H2 is relatively inert at room temperature. Explain.
12. Complete the reaction :
C(s) + H2O(g) (A) (g) (B) (g) . Ans. CO, H2

150 Chemistry Class XI

13. ame the phenomenon as a reason of which water has unusual boiling
point. Ans. Extensive hydrogen bonding
14. raw structure of water.
15. At atmospheric pressure ices crystallised in the ......... form but at very
low temperature it condenses to ......... form. Ans. Hexagonal, cubic
16. Mention the temperature at which density of ice is maximum. Ans. 4 C
17. ensity of ice is .......... than density of liquid water. Ans. ess
18. Complete the reaction :
2H2O(l) 2 a(s) →
19. How many hydrogen-bonded water molecules (s) are associted in
CuSO4.5H2O. Ans. One
20. ame the compound used in Clark’s method to remove temporary hardness
of water. Ans. ime
21. rite the chemical formula of Calgon . Ans. a4P6O18
22. A 30 solution of H2O2 is marketed as ........ volume. Ans. 100 volume
23. raw gas phase structure of H2O2.
24. ame the organic compound whose auto-oxidation is used to produce
H2O2 commercially or industrially. Ans. 2-Ethylanthraquinol
25. How is heavy water obtained from ordinary water

2-MARKS QUESTIONS
1. Complete the following reactions :
(i) CO(g) + H2(g)

(ii) Zn(s) aOH(aq)

2. Among H3, H2O and H which would you except to have highest
magnitude of hydrogen bonding and why
3. How do you except the metallic hydrides to be useful for hydrogen storage
Explain.
4. How can the production of dihydrogen obtained from Coal gasification
be increased

Hydrogen 151
 5. rite the name of isotopes of hydrogen. hat is the mas ratio of these
isotopes
6. Complete the reactions :
(i) CO(g) + 2H2(g)

(ii) CH4(g) + H2O(g)

7. Comment on the reactions of dihydrogen with :
(i) Chlorine, (ii) Sodium.
8. Arrange the following :
(i) iH, aH, CsH (In increasing order of ionic character)
(ii) H H, , (In decreasing order of bond dissociation
enthalpy)
9. ist two uses of dihydrogen.
10. Complete the reactions :
(i) H2 + CO + RCH = CH2 →
(ii) H2 + RCH2CH2CHO →
11. Give two reactions to show amphoteric nature of water.
12. Complete the reactions :
(i) 2F2(g) + 2H2O(l) →
(ii) 6CO2(g) 12H2O(l) →
13. hat is the difference between the term hydrolysis and hydration.
14. hat do you understand by term autoprotolysis’ of water hat is its
significance
15. hat causes the temporary and permanent harness of water
16. Is demineralised or distill water useful for drinking purposes If not, how
can it be made useful
17. Explain the terms :
(i) Hydrogen economy.
(ii) uel cell.
18. rite chemical reactions to justify that hydrogen peroxide can function
as an oxidising as well as reducing agent.

152 Chemistry Class XI

19. Compare the structure of H2O and H2O2.
20. How does H2O2 behaves as a bleaching agent
21. H2O2 acts as an oxidizing as well as reducing agent. hy

3-MARKS QUESTIONS
1. Complete the chemical reactions :
(i) 8 iH Al2Cl6 →
(ii) 2 iH B2H6 →
2. hat do you understand by : (i) Electron deficient, (ii) Electron precise,
(iii) Electron rich compounds of hydrogen Provide justifications with
suitable examples.
3. hat do you understand by the term non-stoichiometric hydrides o
you expect this type of the hydrides to be formed by alkali metals. Explain
and ustify your answer.
4. Arrange the following :
(i) CaH2, BeH2, TiH2 (in order of increasing electrical conductance)
(ii) aH, MgH2, H2O (in order of increasing bond dissociation enthalpy)
(iii) i, , H (in order of increasing ionisation enthalpy)
5. hat do you understand by the terms :
(i) Syn gas (ii) ater gas shift reaction (iii) Producer gas.
6. ould gas except the hydrides of , O and to have lower boiling point
than the hydrides of their subsequent group members Give reasons.
7. Can phosphorous with outer electronic configuration 3s23p3 form PH5 ?
Explain.
8. hy and how the hydrogen is regarded as a fuel of future Explain.
9. rite the reactions when dihydrogen reacts with (i) O2 (ii) N2 (iii) Cl2
under specific conditions.
10. ame the hydrides :
(i) hich is non stoichiometric in nature
(ii) hich are stoichiometric compounds
(iii) hich has electron rich type hydrides

Hydrogen 153
 11. Complete the reactions :
(i) CaO(s) + H2O(g) →
(ii) AlCl3(g) + H2O(l) →
(iii) Ca3N2(s) + H2O(l) →
12. iscuss the principle and method of softening of hard water by synthetic
exchange of resin method.
13. hat is meant by demineralised’ water and how can it be obtained
14. hat properties of water make it useful as a solvent hat types of
compound can it (i) dissolved (ii) hydrolyse
15. Calculate the strength of 10 volume solution of H2O2.
16. Complete the reactions :
(i) 2Fe2+ (aq) 2H+(aq) H2O2(aq) →
(ii) HOCl H2O2 →
(iii) Mn2+ + H2O2 →
17. Give three uses of H2O2.
18. Complete the reactions :
(i) CaC2 + 2D2O →
(ii) SO3 + D2O →
(iii) Al4C3 12 2O →
19. Give the limitations of using H2 as a fuel.
20. H2O2 is stored in a wax lined glass or plastic vessels. Explain an equation
showing decomposition of H2O2 on exposure to light.

5-MARKS QUESTIONS
1. Answer the following :
(a) ame the most abudant form of hydrogen isotope. Ans. 11H
(b) ame the particles emitted by tritium. Ans. –

(c) Mixture of CO and H2 is used for preparation ......... . Ans. Methanol

(d) ame the catalyst used in Haber’s Process for manufacture of H3(g).
[Ans. e
(e) ame two electron rich hydrides. Ans. NH3, H2O

154 Chemistry Class XI

2. Answer the following :
(a) uring Clark’s method. ame the compound in which Mg is
precipitated out. Ans. Magnesium Hydroxide
(b) Give the formula of eolite used in ion exchange method to remove
permanent hardness of water. Ans. aAlSiO4
(c) Complete the reaction :
BaO2.8H2O(s) + H2SO4(aq) →
(d) H2O2 is miscible with water. Assign reason.
(e) ame the compound when can be used as a hair beach, mild antiseptic
in the form of perhydrol. Ans. H2O2

3. (a) Complete the following chemical equations

(b) water → CaCO3 + NH3 (Ammonia)
+
H→
(c) Hydrogen peroxide CrO5
(d) a2O + H2O →
(e) D2O a3As →

4. escribe the usefulness of water in biosphere and biological systems.

HOTS QUESTIONS

1. Calculate the hardness of water sample which contains 0.001 mole of MgSO4
dissolved per litre of water.
Ans. 1 mole MgSO4 1 mole CaCO3
10-3 Mole MgSO4 10-3 mol CaCO3
∴ 0.120g MgSO4 0.1g CaCO3 in 1000 m
∴ Hardness 100ppm

2. 2g of Al is treated separately with excess dilute H2SO4 and excess aOH.

x
The ratio of volumes of Hydrogen evolved under similar condition is y .
x
Find y
Ans. 2Al 3H2SO4 → Al2(SO4)3 + 3H2
2Al 2 aOH 2H2) 2 aAlO2 + 3H2
∴ Ratio is 1 : 1

Hydrogen 155
3. hat mass of CaO will be required to remove the hardness of 1000 litres
of water containing 1.62g of Ca(HCO3)2 per litre
Ans. Ca(HCO3)2 CaO → 2CaCO3 + H2O + CO2
162g 56g
∴ 5.6 102g be cause solution has 1620 g Ca(HCO3)2

4. hat is the volume of O2 liberated at .T.P. by complete decomposition

of 100m of 2m solution of H2O2?
Ans. Volume strength 11.2 M 22.4
100m 0.1 i.e. 22.4 0.1 2.24 O2 released

5. Mention an example in which H2O acts as reducing agent.

Ans. 2F2 + 2H2O → O2 4H

156 Chemistry Class XI

 UNIT TEST
Time Allowed: 1 hr Maximum Marks : 20
General Instructions:
(i) All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Maximum marks carried by each question are indicated against it.

1. Hydrogen has maximum oxidation state in 1

(a) aH (b) MgH2 (c) H2O (d) C & H

2. hich one does not cause hardness of water

(a) MgCl2 (b) CaCl2 (c) MgSO4 (d) AlCl3

3. Give one reaction for preparation of hydrogen gas in laboratory. 1

4. hat causes the hardness of water 1
5. raw the structure of H2O2. 1
6. Complete the reaction with balancing 2
(a) e2+ (aq.) H+(aq.) H2O2(aq.) →
(b) HOCl H 2O 2 →

. hat is Hydrogen Economy. hat are its advantage 2

8. Explain the following 3

(i) Atomic hydrogen or oxy-hydrogen torch function for cutting
and welding purposes. hy
(ii) CaH2, BeH2 and TiH2 arrange in order of increasing electrical
conductance and give reason.
(iii) ater shows amphoteric behaviour, support by giving
appropriate example.

. hat are different types of hydrides Give example. 3

10. iscuss the principle and method of softening of hard water by 5

synthetic ion-exchange resins.
*****

Hydrogen 157
 Chapter - 10 s-Block
s-Block
Elements
Elements
FAST TRACK : QUICK REVISION

 s-block elements consists of group-I (Alkali metals) and group-2 (Alkaline

earth metals).
 Group 1st elements — Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr.
 Group 2nd elements — Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra.
 Atomic radius : Atomic radius of alkali metals are greater than alkaline
earth metals.
 Hydration enthalpy : Decreases with increases in ionic sizes.
 Ionic mobility : Smaller the size of ion, more highly it is hydrated and
hence lower is its ionic mobility.
Li+ < Na+ < K+ < Rb+ < Cs+
 Ionisation enthalpies : 1st I.E. of group 1st is smaller than group 2nd
elements but 2nd I.E. of group 2nd is smaller than group 1st elements.
 Flame colouration : Due to low I.E., s-block elements and their salts
imparts characteristics colour of oxidising flame (except Be and Mg). Be
and Mg do not show flame colouration because they have small size and
very high ionisation enthalpy.
 Reducing character : ue to large negative electrode potentials alkali
metals are stronger reducing agent than alkaline earth metal.
 Reactivity towards air :
4Li + O2 —→ 2Li2O (Lithium oxide)
2Na + O2 —→ Na2O2 (Sodium peroxide)
M + O2 —→ MO2 (M = K, Rb, Cs metal superoxide)
Alkaline earth metals being smaller in size do not from superoxides.
 Reactivity towards H2O :
2M + 2H2O —→ 2MOH + H2
(Alkali metal)
M + 2H2O —→ M(OH)2 + H2
(Alkaline earth metals)
 Reactivity towards hydrogen :
2M + H2 —→ 2MH (M = Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs)
M + H2 —→ MH2 (M = Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba)
2BeCl2 + LiAlH4 —→ 2BeH2 + LiCl + AlCl3.
 Reactivity towards halogens :
2M + X2 —→ 2MX (M = Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs)
M + X2 —→ MX2 (M = Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba)

BeO + C + Cl2 BeCl2 + CO

 Solution in liquid ammonia : The fresh solution of alkali metals and
alkaline earth metals (except Be and Mg) is deep blue, paramagnetic and
highly reducing due to presence of ammoniated electrons.
 Solubility of alkaline earth metal carbonate in water :
Li2CO3 < Na2CO3 < K2CO3 < RbCO3 < Cs2CO3
 Solubility of alkaline earth metal carbonates in water.
BaCO3 < SrCO3 < CaCO3 < MgCO3 < BeCO3
 Solubility of alkaline earth metal sulphates in water :
BaSO4 < SrSO4 < CaSO4 < MgSO4 < BeSO4
 Thermal stability of alkali metal carbonates :
Li2CO3 < Na2CO3 < K2CO3 < Rb2CO3 < Cs2CO3
 Thermal stability of alkaline earth metal carbonates :
BeCO3 < MgCO3 < CaCO3 < SrCO3 < BaCO3
 Anamolous behaviour of Li and Be : It is due to very small size, high
I.E. and high polarising power (i.e., charge/radius)
 Diagonal relationship (similarities) between Li and Mg :
(i) Both Li and Mg are hard.

s-Block Elements 159

 (ii) Both react with N2 to form nitrides.
6Li + N2 —→ 2Li3N
3Mg + N2 —→ Mg3N2
(iii) Decomposition of carbonates :
Li2CO3 Li2O + CO2
MgCO3 MgO + CO2
(iv) Both iCl and MgCl2 are deliquescent. They form hydrates salts
LiCl.2H2O and MgCl2.6H2O.
(v) Decomposition of nitrates :
4LiNO3 2Li2O + 4NO2 + O2
2Mg(NO3)2 2MgO + 4NO2 + O2
 Diagonal relationship (similarities) between Be and Al :
(i) Both are passive to acids due to formation of oxide layer.
(ii) Hydroxides of both dissolve in alkali to form Be(OH)4]2– and
Al(OH)4]–.
(iii) Chloride of both has bridged structure.
(iv) Both have tendency to form complexes of Be 2–, AlF 3–.
4 6
 Manufacturing of washing soda (Na2CO3.10H2O) :
Solvay process :
NH3(g) + CO2(g) + H2O (l) —→ NH4HCO3 (aq)
NH4HCO3 (aq) + NaCl (aq) —→ NaHCO3(s) + NH4Cl (aq)

2NaHCO3 Na2CO3 + H2O(l) + CO2(g)

2NH4Cl (aq) + Ca(OH)2 → CaCl2(s) + 2H2O(l) + 2NH3 (g)
 Manufacturing of caustic soda (NaOH) : Castner-Kellner cell.

Cathode : Na+ + e– Na-Hg

Anode : Cl– —→ + e–
2Na-Hg + 2H2O —→ 2NaOH + 2Hg + H2
 Plaster of paris : (CaSO4.½H2O)
2(CaSO4.2H2O) 2(CaSO4).H2O + 3H2O
Gypsum

160 Chemistry Class XI

 MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (MCQ)
1. The alkali metals are low melting. Which of the following alkali metal is
expected to melt if the room temperature rises to 30°C?
(a) Na (b) K
(c) Rb (d) Cs
2. Alkali metals react with water vigorously to form hydroxides and dihydrogen.
hich of the following alkali metals reacts with water least vigorously
(a) Li (b) Na
(c) K (d) Cs
3. The reducing power of a metal depends on various factors. Suggest the
factor which makes Li, the strongest reducing agent in aqueous solution.
(a) Sublimation enthalpy (b) Ionisation enthalpy
(c) Hydration enthalpy (d) Electron-gain enthalpy
4. Metal carbonates decompose on heating to give metal oxide and carbon
dioxide. Which of the metal carbonates is most stable thermally?
(a) MgCO3 (b) CaCO3
(c) SrCO3 (d) BaCO3
5. hich of the carbonates given below is unstable in air and is kept in CO2
atmosphere to avoid decomposition.
(a) BeCO3 (b) MgCO3
(c) CaCO3 (d) BaCO3
6. Metals form basic hydroxides. Which of the following metal hydroxide is
the least basic?
(a) Mg(OH)2 (b) Ca(OH)2
(c) Sr(OH)2 (d) Ba(OH)2
. Some of the Group 2 metal halides are cavalent and soluble in organic
solvents. Among the following metal halides, the one which is soluble in
ethanol is
(a) BeCl2 (b) MgCl2
(c) CaCl2 (d) SrCl2

s-Block Elements 161

8. The order of decreasing ionisation enthalpy in alkali metals is
(a) Na > Li > K > Rb (b) Rb > Na > K > Li
(c) Li > Na > K > Rb (d) K > Li > Na > Rb
9. The solubility of metal halides depends on their nature, lattice enthalpy
and hydration enthalpy of the individual ions. Amongst fluorides of alkali
metals, the lowest solubility of LiF in water is due to
(a) Ionic nature of lithium fluoride
(b) High Lattice enthalpy
(c) High hydration enthalpy of lithium atom
(d) Low ionisation enthalpy of lithium atom
10. Amphoteric hydroxides react with both alkalies and acids. Which of the
following Group 2 metal hydroxides is soluble in sodium hydroxide?
(a) Be(OH)2 (b) Mg(OH)2
(c) Ba(OH)2 (d) Ca(OH)2

ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS

The question given below contains statement -1 (Assertion) and Statement-2
(Reason) Each question has four choice (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which
only one is correct. Choice the correct option as under.
(a) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is true.
Statement-2 is a correct explanation for statement-1.
(b) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is true ;
Statement-2 is not a correct explanation of statement-1.
(c) Statement -1 is true, statement-2 is false.
(d) Statement-1 is false, statement-2 is true.
1. Statement-1 : Sodium metal is softer than potassium metal.
Statement-2 : Metallic bonding in Potassium is weaker than in Sodium.
2. Statement-1 : Be(OH)2 is soluble in HCl and NaOH.
Statement-2 : Be(OH)2 is amphoteric in nature.
3. Statement-1 : Metallic character of alkali metals increases on going down
a group from top to bottom.

162 Chemistry Class XI

 Statement-2 : Ionisation enthalpy of alkali metals increases on going down
from top to bottom.
4. Statement-1 : Super oxides of alkali metals are diamagnetic.
Statement-2 : Super oxides contain the ion O2-which has one unpaired
electron.
5. Statement-1 : Alkali metals do not impart colour to the flame.
Statment-2 : Their ionization enthalpies are very low.
6. Statement-1 : Sodium cannot be obtained by chemical reduction of its ore.
Statment-2 : Sodium is one of the strongest reducing agent.
7. Statement-1 : Beryllium hydroxide becomes soluble in excess alkali
forming beryllate ion Be(OH)4]2–.
Statment-2 : Beryllium ion has greater tendency to form complexes.

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. In the synthesis of sodium carbonate, the recovery of ammonia is done
by treating NH4Cl with Ca(OH)2. The by product obtained in this process
is ..................
(a) NaCl (b) NaOH
(c) CaCl2 (d) NaHCO3
2. When sodium is dissolved in liquid ammonia, a solution of deep blue colour
is obtained. The colour of the solution is due to...............
(a) Sodium ion (b) Ammoniated electron
(c) Sodium amide (d) Ammoniated sodium ion
3. By adding gypsum to cement...............
(a) Setting time of cement becomes less.
(b) Setting time of cement increases
(c) Colour of cement becomes light
(d) Shining surface is obtain.
4. A substance which gives crimson red flame and breaks on heating to give
oxygen and a brown gas is
(a) Magnesium nitrate (b) Calcium nitrate
(c) Barium nitrate (d) Strontium nitrate

s-Block Elements 163

5. The hydration energy of Mg2+ is greater than that of............
(a) Al3+ (b) Be2+ (c) Na+ (d) Mg3+
6. The active constituent of bleaching power is ..........
(a) Ca(OCl)2 (b) Ca(OCl)Cl
(c) Ca(ClO2)2 (d) Ca(ClO2)Cl
7. KO2 is used in oxygen cylinder is space and submarines because it..........
(a) Absorbs CO2 and increases O2 content
(b) Eliminates moisture
(c) Produces ozone (d) one of the above
8. A metal M readily forms water soluble sulphate MSO4, water insoluble
hydrozide and oxide MO which becomes inert on heating. The hydroxide
is soluble in NaOH. The metal M oxide M is .................
(a) Be (b) Ca (c) Mg (d) Sr
. Photo electric effect is maximum in...............
(a) Cs (b) K (c) Na (d) Li
10. ill in the blanks with proper option given below for the following statement.
"All the halides of alkaline earth metals with exception of ............. are ionic
in nature."
(a) Barium halide (b) Strontium halide
(c) Beryllium halide (d) Calcium halide
11. lame test is not given by ...............
(a) Be (b) Sr (c) K (d) Ca

MATCH THE COLUMNS

In the following questions more than one option of column I and II may be
correlated.
1. Column-I Column-II
(i) Li (a) Insoluble sulphate
(ii) Na (b) Strongest monoacidic base
(iii) Ca (c) Most negative E value among alkali metals.
(iv) Ba (d) Insoluble oxalate
(e) 6s2 outer electronic configuration

164 Chemistry Class XI

2. Column-I Column-II
(i) CaCO3 (a) Dentistry, ornamental work
(ii) Ca(OH)2 (b) Manufacture of sodium carbonate from
caustic soda
(iii) CaO (c) Manufacture of high quality paper
(iv) CaSO4 (d) Used in white washing.

3. Column-I Column-II
(i) Cs (a) Apple green
(ii) Na (b) Violet
(iii) K (c) Brick red
(iv) Ca (d) ellow
(v) Sr (e) Crimson red
(vi) Ba (f) Blue

4. Column-I Column-II
(a) NaOH (a) Photo electric cells
(b) Na2CO3 (b) Coolant in nuclear reactors
(c) Liquid Na (c) SO2 absorber
(d) Caesium (d) Detergent

1-MARK QUESTIONS
1. What is the oxidation state of K in KO2 ?
2. Why are group I element called alkali metals ?
3. Potassium carbonate cannot be prepared by solvay process. hy
4. iCl is soluble in organic solvent. hy
5. Why are group I elements called alkali metals ?
6. Alkali metals are strong reducing agents. Why ?
7. hy do alkali metals give characteristics flame colouration
8. Arrange the following in order of increasing covalent character : MCl,
MBr, M , MI (where M Alkali metal) Ans. MF < MCl < MBr < MI]
9. Alkali metals can not be obtained by chemical reduction method. Explain.
10. Why is sodium metal kept under kerosene oil ?

s-Block Elements 165

 11. hy Be and Mg do not give characteristics colour to the flame
12. Arrange the alkaline earth metal carbonate in the decreasing order of
thermal stability.
13. Why do alkaline earth metals not form any superoxide ?
14. Why gypsum is added to cement ?
15. How plaster of paris is obtained from gypsum ?
16. BeO is insoluble in water but BeSO4 is soluble in water ? Why ?
17. Why second I.E. of group II elements is less than group I elements ?
18. What is quick lime ? How is it prepared ?
19. Why does Be show similarities with Al ?
20. Name the alkaline earth metal hydroxide which is amphoteric.

2-MARKS QUESTIONS
1. hy are alkali metals soft and have low melting points
2. Write any four similarities between Li and Mg.
3. Why are potassium and caesium rather than Lithium used in photoelectric
cells ?
4. Why is Li2CO3 decomposed at a lower temperature whereas Na2CO3 at
higher temperature ?
5. Among the alkali metals which has :
(i) Highest melting point.
(ii) Most electropositive character
(iii) Lowest size of ion.
(v) Strongest reducing character. Ans. (i) i (ii) Cs (iii) i (iv) i
6. Why does the solubility of alkali earth metal carbonates and sulphates
decrease down the group ?
7. Draw the structure of BeCl2 in (i) Vapour phase (ii) Solid state.
8. When CO2 gas is passed in lime water it turns milky but in case of excess
CO2 milkiness disappears. Support the statement by giving suitable
reaction equations.
9. (i) E for M2+ (aq) + 2e– —→ M(s) (where M = Ca, Sr, Ba) is nearly
constant.

166 Chemistry Class XI

 (ii) What is dead burnt plaster ? How is it obtained from gypsum?
10. Write two important uses of (i) Limestone (ii) Quick lime.

3-MARKS QUESTIONS
1. Assign reason for the following :
(i) Compounds of lithium are generally covalent.
(ii) Alkali metals are strong reducing agent.
(iii) iCl is more covalent than aCl.
2. iscuss the various reactions that occur in Solvay process.
3. Explain why ?
(i) Lithium salts are commonly hydrated.
(ii) Sodium peroxide is widely used as oxidising agent.
(iii) Sodium wire is used to remove moisture from benzene but can’t be
used for drying alcohol.
4. Sodium hydroxide is generally prepared by electrolysis of brine solution
in the Castner-Kellner cell :
(i) Write the reactions that occur in the cell.
(ii) Write any two uses of NaOH.
5. Explain with suitable reasons :
(a) A solution of Na2CO3 is alkaline.
(b) Alkali metals are prepared by electrolysis of their fused chlorides.
(c) Sodium is found to be more useful than potassium ?
6. Arrange the following in order of property mentioned against each :
(i) BaCl2, MgCl2, BeCl2, CaCl2 (Increasing ionic character)
(ii) Mg(OH)2, Sr(OH)2, Ba(OH)2, Ca(OH)2 (Increasing solubility in water)
(iii) BeO, MgO, BaO, CaO (Increasing basic strength)
7. What happens when :
(i) Mg is burnt in air.
(ii) Quick lime is heated with silica.
(iii) Chlorine is heated with slaked lime.
8. Write the raw material required for the manufacture of portland cement ?
Why gypsum is added into it ?
9. (i) Why alkaline earth metals cannot be obtained by reduction of their
oxides ?
s-Block Elements 167
 (ii) Why the elements of group 2 are known as alkaline earth metals ?
10. (i) Alkaline earth metals forms ionic salt having bivalent cations. Explain.
Why ?
(ii) A piece of magnesium ribbon continues to burn in SO2. Why ?

5-MARKS QUESTIONS
1. Explain the following observation :
(a) LiI is more soluble than KI in ethanol.
(b) Sodium reacts with water less vigorously than potassium.
(c) LiF is insoluble in water.
(d) The mobilities of the alkali metal ions in aqueous solution are
Li+ < Na+ < K+ < Rb+ < Cs+.
(e) Lithium is the only alkali metal to form a nitride directly.
2. Complete the following reaction equations :
(i) BeCl2 + LiAlH4 —→
(ii) CaO + SiO2 —→
(iii) Ca(OH)2 + Cl2 —→
(iv) CaO P4O10 —→
(v) Ca(OH)2 + CO2 —→
3. Compare the solubility and thermal stability of the following :
Compounds of the alkali metals with those of alkaline earth metals
(a) nitrates (b) carbonates (c) sulphates.
4. Explain the significance of Sodium ( a), Potassium ( ), Magnesium (Mg)
and Calcium(Ca) in biological fluids.
5. Explain the significance of Sodium Potassium, Magnesium and Calcium
biological fluids.
6. (i) A solutions of Na2CO3 is alkaline why?
(ii) BeO insoluble but BeSO4 in soluble in water. Why?
(iii) Lithium salts are commonly hydrated and those of other alkali metal
ions are usually anhydrous give reasons.
(iv) hat is the importance of cement
(v) hat happen when quick lime is heated with silica

168 Chemistry Class XI

 UNIT TEST
Time Allowed: 1 hr Maximum Marks : 20
General Instructions:
(i) All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Maximum marks carried by each question are indicated against it.

1. Photoelectric effect is maximum in 1

(a) Cs (b) K (c) Na (d) Li

2. lame test is not shown by 1

(a) Be (b) Sr (c) K (d) Ca

3. Oxidation state of K in KO2 is . 1

4. iCl is soluble in organic solvent. hy 1
5. hy is sodium kept under kerosene 1
6. rite only four similarities in properties of i and Mg. 2

7. Write two important uses of CaO and CaCO3. 2

8. iscuss the various reactions that occur in solvay process. 3

. hat happens when : 3

(a) Mg is burnt in air.
(b) Quick lime is heated with silica.
(c) Chlorine is heated with slaked lime.

10. Complete the following chemical reactions : 5

(a) CaO + SiO2 –—→
(b) Ca(OH)2 + CO2 –—→
(c) 2Mg(NO3)2 –—→
(d) 3Mg + N2 –—→
(e) NH4HCO3 + NaCl –—→
*****

s-Block Elements 169

 Chapter - 11 p-Block
p-Block
Elements
Elements
AST T AC : QUIC EVISIO

General outer Electronic configuration : ns2np1–6.

Inert Pair E ect:
 Reluctance of ns2 electrons of valence shell to participate in bond formation
is termed as inert pair effect.
 It arises due to poor or insufficient shielding of ns2 electrons by intervening
d- or f-electrons hence increases down the group.
Causes of Anomalous Beha iour of irst Element in groups of p Bloc :
(i) Very small size
(ii) Unavailability of vacant d-orbital
(iii) Tendency to form p – p multiple bonds.

roup o 13 Elements: (B, Al, Ga, In, Tl, Nh)

 eneral Electronic Configuration: ns2 np1
 Atomic radius: B < Ga < Al < In <TI
rGa < rAl due to ineffective shielding of valence electrons by intervening
3d-electrons in Ga.
 Ionization Enthalpies: B > Tl > Ga > Al > In
 Electronegati ity: B > Tl > In > Ga > Al
 O idation States: B (+3), Al (+3), Ga (+3, +1), In (+3, +1), Tl (+1, 3)
Tl (+1) is more stable than Tl ( 3) due to inert pair effect.
 ature of Compounds: Compounds of group 13 elements are electron
deficient i.e. ewis Acid and hence used as industrial catalyst e.g. BF3, AlCl3.
 O ides: B2O3 Al2O3, Ga2O3 ln2O3 Tl2O
Acidic Amphoteric Basic Strongly Basic
 Halides: MX3 type, Electron deficient ( ewis acid), AICI3 exist as dimer
 Bora : Na2B4O7.10H2O. On heating it form transparent glassy bead
consisting of aBO2 + B2O3.
 Boric acid: H3BO3, It acts as a ewis acid by accepting electron pair from
OH– ions of water.
 iborane: B2H6, Colourless toxic gas, acts as ewis acid due to having
electron deficient 3c-2e– bonds. Obtained by treating B 3 with iAIH4 or
aH, Also obtained by treating aBH4 with l2.
 Borazine: B3N3H6, It is isostructural with benzene and hence known as in-
organic benzene. Prepared by heating B2H6 with H3
roup 14 Elements: (C, Si, Ge, Sn, Pb, l)
 General Electronic Configuration: ns2 np2
 Atomic radius: C Si Ge Sn Pb
 lonisation Enthalpy: LiHx : C Si Ge Sn Pb
 O idation States: C ( 4), Si ( 4), Ge ( 4, +2), Sn ( 4, 2), Pb ( 4, +2)
Pb ( 2) is more stable than Pb ( 4) due to inert pair effect.
 O ides: Form di oxides (MO2) mono oxides (MO).
PbO2 is powerfull oxidizing agent because Pb stabilizes in 2 oxidation state
due to inert pair effect. CO2 is gas while SiO2 is network solid because C has
ability to form p — p multiple bonds.
 Halides: Form tetra halides (MX4) & dihalides (MX2).
Tetra halides are more covalent due to greater polarizing power of cation.
CCI4 is not hydrolysed with water as C has no vacant d-orbital to accept
electron pair from water.
 Catenation: C >> Si > Ge Sn Pb
 Allotrops of carbon: Diamond (sp ), Graphite (sp2), Fullerenes (sp2)
3

 Silicones: Silicones are synthetic organosilicon compounds containing

R2SiO repeating units. Silicones are water repellent, heat resistant, chemi-
cally inert, electrical insulators, resistant to oxidation.
 Silicates: Silicates are compounds in which anions are derived from
Si–o–si– tetrahedral units.
 eolites: Zeolites are 3D silicates in which some of the Si atoms are replaced
by Al3+ ions and negative charge is balanced by cations such as a+, K+,
Ca2+ etc.
 SM-5 is used in petrochemical industries to convert methanol into petrol.

p-Block Elements 171

 ULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIO S ( CQ)
1. The element which exists in liquid state for a wide range of temperature
and can be used for measuring high temperature is
(i) B (ii) Al
(iii) Ca (iv) Ga
2. hich of the following is ewis acid
(i) AlCl3 (ii) MgCl2
(iii) CaCl2 (iv) BaCl2
3. The geometry of a complex species can be understood from the knowledge
of type of hybridisation of orbitals of central atom. The hybridisation of
orbitals of central atom in Be(OH4]– and the geometry of the complex
are respectively
(i) sp3, tetrahedral (ii) sp3, square planar
(iii) sp3d2, octahedral (iv) dsp2, square planar
4. hich of the following oxides is acidic in nature
(i) B2O3 (ii) Al2O3
(iii) Ga2O3 (iv) In2O3
5. The exhibition of highest co-ordination number depends on the avilability
of vacant orbitals in the central atom. hich of the following elements is
not likely to act as central atom in MF63-
(i) B (ii) Al
(iii) Ga (iv) In
6. Boric acid is an acid because its molecule
(i) Contains replaceable H+ ion
(ii) Gives up a proton
(iii) Accepts OH– from water releasing proton
(iv) Combines with proton from water molecule
. Catenation i.e., linking of similar atoms depends on size and electronic
configuration of atoms. The tendency of catenation in Group 14 elements
follows the order:
(i) C > Si > Ge > Sn (ii) C >> Si > Ge = Sn
(iii) Si > C > Sn > Ge (iv) Ge > Sn > Si > c

172 Chemistry Class XI

8. Silicon has a strong tendency to form polymers like sillicones. The chain
length of silicone plymer can be controlled by adding
(i) MeSiCl3 (ii) Me2SiCl2
(iii) Me3SiCl (iv) Me4Si
. Ionisation enthalpy ( 1H1 kJ mol-1) for the elements of Group 13 follows
the order
(i) B > Al > Ga > In > T1 (ii) B < Al < Ga < In < T1
(iii) B < Al > Ga < T1 (iv) B > Al < Ga > In < T1
10. In the structure of diborane
(i) All hydrogen atoms lie in one plane and boron atoms lie in a plane
perpendicular to this plane.
(ii) 2 boron atoms and 4 terminal hydrogen atoms lie in the same plane
and 2 bridging hydrogen atoms lie in the perpendicular plane.
(iii) 4 bridging hydrogen atoms and boron atoms lie in one plane and
two terminal hydrogen atoms lie in a plane perpendicular to this
plane.
(iv) All the atoms are in the same plane.
11. A compound X, of boron reacts with H3 on heating to give another
compound which is called inorganic benzene. The compound X
can be prepared by treating B 3 with ithium aluminum hydride. The
compounds X and are represented by the formulas.
(i) B2H6, B3N3H6 (ii) B2O3, B3 N3 H6
(iii) BF3, B3N3H6 (iv) B3N3H6, B2H6
12. uartz is extensively used as a piezoelectric material, it contains ............
(i) Pb (ii) Si
(iii) Ti (iv) Sn
13. The most commonly used reducing agents is
(i) AlCl3 (ii) PbCl2
(iii) SnCl4 (iv) SnCl2
14. ry ice is
(i) Solid H3 (ii) Solid SO2
(iii) Solid CO2 (iv) Solid N2

p-Block Elements 173

 15. Cement, the important building material is a mixture of oxides of several
elements. Besides calcium, iron and sulphur, oxides of elements of which
of the group(s) are present in the mixture
(i) Group 2 (ii) Groups 2, 13 and 14
(iii) Groups 2 and 13 (iv) Groups 2 and 14

ATCH THE COLU S

In the following questions more than one correlation is possible between
options of Column I and Column II. Make as many correlation as you can
1. Column I Column II
(i) BF4 (a) Oxidation state of central atom is +4
(ii) AlCl3 (b) Strong oxidishing agent
(iii) SnO (c) ewis acid
(iv) PbO2 (d) Can be further oxidised
(e) Tetrahedral shape

2. Column I Column II
(i) iborane (a) Used as a flux for soldering metals
(ii) Galluim (b) Crystalline form of silica
(iii) Borax (c) Banana bonds
(iv) Aluminosilicate (d) ow melting, high boiling, useful for
measuring high temperature
(v) uartz (e) Used as catalyst in petrochemical industries

3. Column I Column II
(i) Boron in B(OH)4]– (a) Sp2
(ii) Aluminium in Al(H2O)6]3+ (b) Sp3
(iii) Boron in B2H6 (c) Sp3d2
(iv) Carbon in Buckminsterfullerene
(v) Silicon in SiO44–
(vi) Germanium in [GeCl6]2–

174 Chemistry Class XI

 ASSE TIO EASO T PE QUESTIO S
In the follo ing uestions a statement of Assertion (A) follo ed by a
statement of eason ( ) is gi en. Choose the correct option out of the choices
gi en belo each uestion
1. Assertion (A) : If aluminium atoms replace a few silicon atoms in
three dimensional network of silicon dioxide, the
overall structure acquires a negative charge
Reason (R) : Aluminium is trivalent while silicon is tetravalent.
(i) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(ii) Both A and R are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(iii) Both A and R are not correct
(iv) A is not correct but R is correct.
2. Assertion (A) : Silicon is water repelling in nature.
Reason (R) : Silicon is organosilicon polymers, which have
(–R2SiO ) as repeating unit
(i) A and R both are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(ii) Both A and R are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A
(iii) A and R both are not true.
(iv) A is not true but R is true.

1 A QUESTIO S
1. Mention two important ores of boron.
2. ame the elements of group 13 which forms only covalent compounds.
3. hy the atomic radius of gallium is less than that of Al
4. hy does Boron form electron deficient compounds
5. Boron does not exist as B3+ ion. hy
6. hy the trihalide of group 13 elements fume in moist air
7. Aluminum form [AlF6]3– but boron does not form [BF6]3–.
8. hy boric acid is a monobasic acid
9. hite fumes appear around the bottle of anhydrous AlCl3. Give reason.
10. AlCl3 exist as dimer while BCl3 exist as monomer, why

p-Block Elements 175

 11. Mention the type of hybridization of Boron in B2H6. Ans. sp3]
12. rite the formula of inorganic benzene.
13. hy aluminum utensils should not be kept in water overnight.
14. Explain what happens when boric acid is heated.
15. BCl3 exists but BH3 does not. Explain.

16. hy SnCl4 is more covalent than SnCl2

17. hy PbCl4 is good oxidising agent
18. hat are germanes and plumbanes
19. Give one example of zeolite.
20. Mention the type of hybridization of carbon in diamond and graphite.
21. hy CCl4 is insoluble in water but SiCl4 is soluble in water Explain.
22. Give two uses of silicones.
23. hy graphite is used as lubricant
24. ead (Pb) do not form PbI4. hy
25. CO2 is gas while SiO2 is solid at room temperature. Explain why
26. Explain why silicon shows a higher covalency than carbon
27. Out of carbon and silicon which can form multiple bonds and why
28. rite the formula of dry ice.
29. Mention the basic building unit of all silicates.
30. Graphite is a good conductor of electricity, but diamond is not. hy

2 A S QUESTIO S
1. raw the structure of diborane.
2. hat happens when :
(a) Borax is heated strongly.
(b) Boric acid is added to water.
3. rite balanced chemical equations for :
(a) BF3 iH →
(b) B2H6 H3 →

176 Chemistry Class XI

4. rite chemical reactions to justify amphoteric nature of Al.
5. Suggest reason why the B- bond length in B 3 and BF4– differ.
6. Give reason for the following :
(i) BF3 act as weak ewis acid.
(ii) Boron cannot show covalency more than four.
7. How can you explain higher stability of BCl3 as compared to TlCl3
8. Give reason for the following :
(i) Aluminium alloys are used to make aircraft body.
(ii) Aluminium wire is used to make transmission cables.
9. Describe the shapes of BF3 and BH4–. Assign the hybridization of boron
in these species.
10. Explain the chemistry of borax bead test.

11. [SiF6]2– is known whereas [SiCl6]2– not. Give reason.

12. Hydrolysis of SiCl4 take place but of CCl4 does not. hy
13. Account for the following :
(a) CO2 is gas while SiO2 is solid at room temperature.
(b) Solid CO2 is known as dry ice.
14. Elemental silicon does not form graphite like structure as carbon does.
Give reason.
15. Suggest a reason as to why CO is poisonous
16. How is excessive content of CO2 responsible for global warming
17. hat is allotropy ame two elements which exhibit allotropy.
18. rite equations for the production of water gas and producer gas from
coke.
19. efine zeolite. ame the zeolite which converts alcohols directly into
gasoline.
20. Arrange the hybrides of group 14 elements in increasing order of :
(a) Thermal stability
(b) Reducing power.

p-Block Elements 177

 3 A S QUESTIO S
1. Give reasons of the following :
(i) In diborane, two B H B bonds are different from common covalent
bonds.
(ii) Aluminium metal shows amphoteric behaviour.
(iii) uartz is used to develop extremely accurate clocks.
2. A certain salt X gives the following results :
(i) Its aqueous solution is alkaline to litmus.
(ii) It swells up to a glassy material on strong heating.
(iii) hen conc. H2SO4 is added to a hot solution of X, white crystal of
an acid separates out. rite equations for all the above reactions
and identify X, and .
3. rite balanced chemical equation for :
(i) B2H6 H 2O →
(ii) Al aOH →
(iii) aOH B2H6 →
4. ist two important properties in which boron differs from the rest of the
members of group. Mention the main reasons for the difference.
5. hat are electron deficient compounds Are BCl3 and SiCl4 electron
deficient species Explain.
6. Select the member(s) of group 14 that :
(i) orms the most acidic dioxide.
(ii) Is commonly found in 2 oxidation state.
(iii) Used as semiconductor.
7. hat are allotropes Sketch the structure of two allotropes of carbon
namely diamond and graphite.
8. Give suitable reasons for the following :
(a) CO2 turns lime water milky, but if passed for a long time, the solution
become transparent again.
(b) Graphite is a good conductor of electricity but diamond is insulator.
(c) ead (IV) chloride is highly unstable towards heat.

178 Chemistry Class XI

9. (i) rite the resonance structure of CO32– and HCO3–.
(ii) rite the name of thermodynamically most stable form of carbon.
10. (i) Explain why is there a phenomenal decreases in ionisation enthalpy
from carbon to silicon
(ii) rite an industrial application of silicones.

5 A S QUESTIO S

1. hen metal X is treated with aOH, a white precipitate A’ is obtained,

which is soluble in excess of aOH to give soluble complex (B). Compound
A’ is soluble in dilute HCl to form compound C’. The compound A’
when heated strongly gives ’, which is used to extract metal. Identify
X, A, B, C and . rite suitable equations to support their identities.
2. (i) If B-Cl bond has dipole moment explain why BCl3 molecules has
zero dipole moment.
(ii) A mixture of dil. aOH and aluminium pieces is used to open drain.
Give reason.
(iii) Aluminium wire is used to make transmission cables. hy
3. (i) Identify the compounds X and in the following reactions :
(a) Na2B4O7 2HCl 5H2O → 2NaCl + X

(b) X HBO2 .

(ii) rite the name of group 13 element which is used to measure high
temperature.
(iii) hy in case of thallium 1 oxidation state is more stable than 3
4. Compare the general trend in the following properties of the elements of
group 13 and 14 :
(a) Atomic size, (b) Ionisation enthalpy, (c) Metallic character,
(d) Oxidation states, (e) ature of halides.

p-Block Elements 179

 5. ame the following :
(a) The crystalline form of silica used in modern radio and T.V.
broadcasting and mobile radio communication.
(b) The oxides of carbon which form a complex with haemoglobin 300
times more faster than oxygen.
(c) The allotrope of carbon which has fH 0.
(d) A type of polymer is semiorganic in nature.
(e) Two man made silicates.
6. Explain the formation of (i) water gas (ii) producer gas. Give their uses.
hat happens when CO2 is passed through limewater
(i) for short duration
(ii) for long duration.

180 Chemistry Class XI

 U IT TEST
Time Allo ed: 1 hr a imum ar s : 20
General Instructions:
(i) All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Maximum marks carried by each question are indicated against it.

1. hich of the following is ewis acid 1

(a) AlCl3 (b) MgCl2 (c) CaCl2 (d) BaCl2

2. ry ice is 1
(a) Solid CO2 (b) Solid SO2 (c) Solid N2 (d) Solid H3

3. Chemical formula of diborane is . 1

4. rite an example of shape relative catalyst. 1
5. Allotrope of carbon with sp3 hybridisation state is 1
6. Complete the following chemical equations : 2
(a) B2H6 H3 →
(b) BF3 iH →

. rite the chemical reactions involved in borax bead test. 2

8. hat are allotrope Sketch the structure of two allotrope of 3

carbon namely diamond and graphite.

. Compare the properties of the elements of group-13 and 14 3

(a) Atomic size
(b) Ionisation enthalpy
(c) Oxidation state

10. (a) Explain the formation of (i) water gas (ii) producer gas 5
(b) Identify the compound X and in the following reactions
(i) Na2B4O7 2HCl 5H2O → 2NaCl + X
(ii) X 3 0 → HBO2 3 0→ Y
(c) rite two important applications of silicons.
*****

p-Block Elements 181

 3
SP –S
H
Hype
rconj
ugati
on

H
Organic Chemistry
Organic :
Chemistry:
σ bond

C
C C
H Some Basic
Some Basic
Principles And
Chapter - 12 Principles and
H
H

Techniques
Techniques
FAST TRACK : QUICK REVISION

ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
It deals with the study of hydrocarbons (compounds of carbon and hydrogen
elements) and their derivatives.
Some organic compounds may also contain nitrogen, oxygen, sulphur,
phosphorus, halogens, etc.
Berzelius, proposed that a 'vital force' was responsible for the formation of
organic compounds.
This was rejected by . ohler who synthesised first organic compound urea
from an inorganic compound.
NH4CNO NH2CONH2
Ammonium cyanate Urea

 Acetic acid was synthesised by Kolbe and methane by Berthelot.

 Types of hybridisation of C-atom :
Hybridisation Structure Bond angle Examples
sp3 Tetrahedral 109°28' Ethane, Methane
sp2 Trigonal 120° Ethene, Propene
sp Linear 180° Ethyne, Propyne

 Reasons for existence of large number of organic compounds:

 Catenation : The property of atoms of an element to link with one another
forming chains of identical atoms is called catenation. Carbon exhibits
catenation to the maximum extent.
 Isomerism : It is the property by virtue of which two or more compounds
have the same molecular formula but different physical or chemical
properties.
 Formation of multiple bonds : Because of its small size carbon atom
is capable of forming multiple bonds with other atoms and this gives a
variety of compounds.
 CLASSIFICATION OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS

H
(Pysrole)

 CLASSIFICATION OF CARBON ATOMS

On the basis of number of C attached
(i) Primary carbon atom : when carbon atom is attached with one other
carbon atom only, it is called primary or 1° carbon atom.
(ii) Secondary carbon atom : When carbon atom is attached with two
other carbon atoms, it is called secondary or 2° carbon atom.
(iii) Tertiary carbon atom : When carbon atom is attached with three
other carbon atoms, it is called tertiary or 3° carbon atom.
(iv) Quaternary carbon atom : When carbon atom is attached with four
other carbon atoms, it is called quarterly or 4° carbon atom.
 Functional Group : The atom e.g., –Cl, –Br, etc., or group of atoms
e.g., –COOH, –CHO, which is responsible for the chemical properties of
the molecule, is called functional group.

Organic Chemistry: Some Basic Principles and Techniques 183

  Homologous Series : The series in which the molecular formula of
adjacent members differ by a CH2 unit, is called homologous series and
the individual members are called homologous, e.g., The homologous
series of alkene group is
C2H4
C3H6
C4H8
C5H10
} difference of CH2 unit or 14 unit mass

The general characteristics of this series are :

1. All the homologues contain same functional group. That's why their
chemical properties are almost similar.
2. All the members of a series have same general formula, e.g.,
Series General Formula
Alkanes CnH2n+2
Alkenes CnH2n
Alkynes CnH2n–2
Alcohol and ether CnH2n+2O
Aldehyde and ketone CnH2nO
Acid and ester CnH2nO2

3. All the members can be prepared by almost similar methods.

4. With increase in the molecular weight of a series, the physical
properties vary gradually.
 Representation of Organic Compounds :
Organic compounds can be represented by the following ways:
(i) Complete Structural Formula : All the bonds present between any
two atoms are shown clearly. e.g.,

H H H H
H C C C C H
H Cl H H

184 Chemistry Class XI

 (ii) Condensed Formula : All the bonds are not shown clearly. e.g.,
CH3CHCH2CH3

Cl
CH3CH(CI)CH2CH3

(iii) Bond Line Formula : Every fold and free terminal represents a carbon
and lines represent the bond. e.g.,
Cl CH3 C CH CH2CH3
CH3

CH3 CH2 COOH OH

 IUPAC Nomenclature of Organic Compounds : Following rules are

used to write the IUPAC name of an organic compound.
Rule 1. : Longest chain rule : The chain containing the principal functional
group, secondary functional group and multiple bonds as many as possible
is the longest possible chain.
In the absence of functional group, secondary group and multiple bonds,
the chain containing the maximum number of C-atoms will be the longest
possible chain e.g.,

Word Root for Carbon Chain

Chain length Word root Chain length Word root
C1 Meth- C7 Hept
C2 Eth- C8 Oct
C3 Prop- C9 Non
C4 But- C10 Dec
C5 Pent- C11 Undec
C6 Hex- C12 Dodec

Organic Chemistry: Some Basic Principles and Techniques 185

 Rule 2 : Lowest number rule : Numbering is done in such a way so that
(i) branching if present gets the lowest number.
(ii) the sum of numbers of side chain is lowest.
(iii) principal functional group gets the lowest number.
Select the principal functional group from the preference series :
COOH > SO3H > acid anhydride COOR > COX > CONH2
> CN > NC > CHO > C = O > OH > SH
> NH2 > = > substituents
Functional group other than the principal functional group are called
substituents.
Rule 3: aming the prefi and su es : Prefix represents the substit-
uent and suffix is used for principal functional group.
Primary suffix are ene, ane or yne used for double, single and triple bonds
respectively.
Secondary suffixes are tabulated below :
No. Class Formula Prefi Su
1. Acid halides halocarbonyl oyl halide
carbonyl halide

2. Alcohols OH hydroxy ol
3. Aldehydes CHO formyl al
carbaldehyde
4. Ketones C=O oxo (keto) one
5. Amides CO H2 carbamoyl amide
6. Amine H2 amino amine
7. Carboxylic COOH carboxy carboxylic
acid acid
8. Ester COOR alkoxy alkyl
carbonyl alkanoate
9. Nitriles C cyano nitrile
10. Sulphonic acid SO2 OH sulpho sulphonic acid

186 Chemistry Class XI

 Nomenclature of substituted benzene compounds :

ISOMERISM

Structural isomerism Stereo isomerism

Same molecular formula but Same molecular and structural
different structures formula but different configuration
Types e.g., Geometrical isomerism
1. Chain Isomerism (cis-trans isomerism)
e.g., Pentane and H3C CH3
2-Methylbutane C C
2. Position Isomerism H H
e.g., But-1-ene Cis.But-2-ene
But-2-ene
3. Functional Isomerism H CH3
e.g., Propanal & Propanone C C
Ethanol & Methoxymethane CH3 H
4. Metamerism Trans.But-2-ene
e.g., Pentan-2-one and
Pentan-3-one

Organic Chemistry: Some Basic Principles and Techniques 187

  Fission of a Covalent Bond :
(i) Homolytic Fission : In this one of the electrons of the shared pair
in a covalent bond goes with each of the bonded atoms. The neutral
chemical species thus formed, are called free radicals. Generally,
homolytic fission takes place in non-polar covalent molecules in the
presence of sunlight or high temperature.
Sunlight
A B → A* + B*

{
free radicals
Sunlight
Cl2 ––––––→ 2Cl*
ree radicals are highly reactive, neutral and electron deficient species.
(ii) Heterolytic Fission : The covalent bond breaks in such a fashion that
the shared pair of electrons goes with one of the fragments.
more electronegative
–→

A B → A+ + B–
electrophile nucleophile
less electronegative
–→

A B → A– + B+
nucleophile electrophile
Heterolytic fission generally takes place in polar covalent molecules
but in non-polar molecules, it takes place in the presence of catalyst
like AiCl3 (anhy.), FeCl3 (anhy.) etc.
 Attacking Reagents :
These are of two types
(i) Electrophiles or Electrophilic Reagents
These are electron deficient species, i.e., behave as ewis acids.
+
e.g., Cl+, NO2, CH3CO+ etc.
BF3, ZnCl2 (anhydrous), FeCl3 (anhydrous), AlCl3 (anhydrous)
(ii) Nucleophiles or Nucleophilic Reagents
These are negatively charged or neutral molecules with unshared
electron pair.
°° °°
e.g., OH, CN–, RNH 2, NH3
 Reaction Intermediates :
(i) Free radicals : These are the product of homolysis and contain
an odd electron. These are highly reactive planar species with sp2
hybridisation.
188 Chemistry Class XI
 Their order of stability is
° ° °
(C6H5)3C > (C6H5)2 CH > C6H5CH2
° °
> CH2 = CH –– CH 2 > 3° > 2° > 1° > CH2 = CH
(ii) Carbocations : These are the product of heterolysis and contain a
carbon bearing positive charge. These are electron deficient species.
These are also polar chemical species i.e., sp2 hybridised with an
empty p-orbital.
empty p-orbital
!
! C
!

Stability order of carbocation is

+ + +
(C6H5)3C > (C6H5)2 CH > C6H5CH2
+ +
> CH2 = CH –– CH2 > 3° > 2° > 1° > CH2 = CH
(iii) Carbanions : These are the product of heterolysis and contain a carbon
bearing negative charge and 8 electrons in its valence shell.
These have pyramidal shape with sp3 hybridised carbon (having one
lone pair) order of stability of carbanions is
– – –
(C6H5)3C > (C6H5)2 CH > C6H5CH2
–
> CH3 > 1° > 2° > 3° carbanions
 Electron Displacement in Covalent Bond
1. Inducti e E ect : If shared pair is more shifted towards more
electronegative atom, the less electronegative atom acquires slight
positive charge and more electronegative atom acquires partial
negative charge,
+ –
e.g., CH3 → Cl
Permanent effect and propagates through carbon chain.
Atoms or groups having greater electron affinity than hydrogen are
said to have electron attracting or negative inductive effect ( l) while
that having, smaller electron affinity than hydrogen are said to have
electron releasing or positive inductive effect ( l).
+ + –
e.g., CH3 → CH2 → Cl
+ + + –
CH3 → CH2 → CH2 → Cl
1° alkyl halide

Organic Chemistry: Some Basic Principles and Techniques 189

 Cl has l effect and alkyl group has I effect.
Order of groups producing I effect is
R3N > – NO2 > – CN > – SO3H > – CHO > – CO > – COOH > – F
> – Cl > – Br > – I > – OH > – OR > – NH2 > – C6H5 > – H
Order of groups producing l effect is
3° alkyl group > 2° alkyl group > 1° alkyl group > – CH3 > – H
 Applications of Inducti e E ect
(i) Presence of groups showing I effect increases the stability of
carbocation while presence of groups showing I effect decreases
their stability.
(ii) Strength of acid increases with the attachment of group showing –I
effect and decreases with the attachment of group showing I effect.
(iii) Presence of +I showing groups increases the basic strength of amines.
2. Electromeric E ect : efined as the polarity produced in a multiple
bonded compound as a reagent approaches it. In the presence of
attacking reagent, the two electrons are completely transferred to
any of the one atom. This effect is temporary.
It may be of +E type (when displacement of electron pair is away
from the atom of group) or of –E type (when displacement is towards
the atom or group).
H H H + – H
C C Reagent C C
H H H H
e.g., +
E
–
C O Reagent C O

Nu–
3. Hyper-conjugation : It involves delocalisation of electron of a
C – H bond of an alkyl group attached directly to an atom of
unsaturated system or to an atom with an unshared p-orbital.
H
e.g., H+
–
CH2 CH2 CH2 CH CH2

This effect is also called no bond resonance or Baker athan effect.

190 Chemistry Class XI

 Applications of Hyper-conjugation
Stability of alkenes : More the number of -hydrogen atoms, more
stable is the alkene.
!
CH3 ! !
! CH3 ! CH3 ! !
H3C C C C ! > CH3CH C ! > CH3 CH CH CH3
CH3 CH3
H2

Stability of Carbocation : Greater the number of alkyl groups

attached to positively charged carbon atom, the greater is the stability.
e.g., (CH3)2CH > CH3 — CH > CH3
4. esonance E ect : When the properties of a molecule cannot be
shown by a single structure and two or more structures are required
to show all the properties of that molecule, then the structures are
called resonating structures or canonical forms and the molecule is
referred as resonance hybrid. This phenomenon is called resonance.
Conditions for resonance
(i) The arrangement of atoms must be identical in all the formula.
(ii) The energy content of all the canonical forms must be nearly
same.
(iii) Each canonical of electrons. This effect may be of R type or
R type.
Positi e esonance E ect ( )
Electron donating groups with respect to conjugated system show
R effect. Central atom of functional groups should be more
electronegative than the surrounding atoms or groups to show R
effect. e.g., halogens, OH, OR, H2, HCOR, etc.
°° + + +
NH2 NH2 NH2 NH2
-
-

egati e esonance E ect ( )

Electron withdrawing groups with respect to conjugate system
show R effect. Central atom of functional groups should be less
electronegative than surrounding atoms or groups to show R effect.
e.g., halogens, COOH, COOR, CHO, C , O2, etc.

Organic Chemistry: Some Basic Principles and Techniques 191

H C O H C O- H C O- H C O-

+ +

+
 ethods of Purification of Organic Compounds
Method Principle Applications
Crystallization ifferent solubilities of a given organic • Crystallization of sugar
compound and its impurities in the same (containing an impurity of
solvent. common salt) is achieved by
shaking the impure solid with
hot ethanol at 348K (sugar
dissolves whereas common
salt remains insoluble).
Sublimation Some solid substances change from solid • Iodine from sodium chloride
to vapour state without passing through (as iodine sublimes readily
liquid state. Sublimable compounds leaving behind sodium
get separated from non-sublimable chloride).
impurities. • C a m p h o r, n a p h t a l e n e ,
anthracence, benzoic Acid,
etc. are purified.
Distillation It is used to separate • Hexane (b.p. 342K) and
• Volatile liquids from non-volatile toluene (b.p. 384K)
impurities. • Chloroform (b.p. 334K) and
• iquids having sufficient difference in aniline (b.p. 457K)
their boiling points.
– Fractional If the difference in boiling points of two • Crude oil in petroleum
Distillation liquids is not much, this method is used. industry is separated into
various useful fractions such
as gasoline, kerosene oil,
diesel oil, lubricating oil, etc.
– Steam This method is used to separate substances • Aniline is separated from
Distillation which are (i) steam volatile, (ii) immiscible aniline water mixture.
with water, (iii) posses a vapour pressure • Essential oils, turpentine oil,
of 10-15 mm Hg and (iv) contain non- o-nitrophenol, bromobenzene
volatile impurities. nitrobenenze, etc. can be
purified.
ifferential By shaking an aqueous solution of an • Benzoic acid can be extracted
Extraction organic compound with an organic from its water solution using
solvent in which the organic compound is benzene.
more soluble than in water. The organic
solvent and the aqueous solution should
be immiscible with each other so that they
can form two distinct layers which can
be separated by using separating funnel.
192 Chemistry Class XI
Chromatography Differential movement of individual • Widely used for separation
components of a mixture through a purification, identification
stationary phase under the influence of a and characterization of the
mobile phase. components of a mixture,
whether coloured or
colourless.
– Adsorption Differential adsorption of the various
Chromatography components of a mixture on a suitable
adsorbent such as silica get or alumina.
– Column The mixture is passed through adsorbent • Mixture of naphthalene and
Chromatography packed in glass tube. benzophenone.
– Thin Layer The mixture is passed over adsorbent on • Amino acids can be detected
Chromatography a thin glass plate. by spraying the plate with
ninhydrin solution.
– Partition ifferential partitioning of components of
Chromatography a mixture between stationary and mobile
phases.
– Paper A special quality paper known as • For separation of sugars and
Chromatography chromatography paper is used. It contains amino acids.
water trapped in it, which acts as the
stationary phase.

Types of Chromatography Mobile / Stationary Phase

Column Chromatography Liquid / Solid
Thin Layer Chromatography Liquid / Solid
High Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC) Liquid / Solid
Gas Liquid Chromatography (GLC) Gas / Solid
Partition or Paper Chromatography Liquid / Solid

Element Detection Confirmatory Test Reactions

Carbon 2CuO + C ––→ 2Cu + CO2 CO 2 gas turns lime CO2 + Ca(OH)2 –→ CaCO3 + H2O
water milky. Lime water Milkiness
Hydrogen CuO + 2H ––→ Cu + H2O Water droplets appear CuSO4 + 5H2O –→ CuSO4.5H2O
on the cooler part of White Blue
the ignition tube and
also turns anhydrous
CuSO4 blue.
Nitrogen Lassaigne's extract (L.E.) L.E. + FeSO4 + NaOH, FeSO4 + 2NaOH –→ Fe(OH)2 + Na2SO4
Na + C + N ––→ NaCN boil and cool + FeCl3 + Fe(OH) + 6NaCN –→
2
(L.E.) conc. HCl. Gives blue Na4[Fe(CN)6] + 2NaOH
or green colour.
3Na4[Fe(CN)6] + 4FeCl3 –→
Fe4[Fe(CN)6]3 + 12NaCl
Prussian blue

Organic Chemistry: Some Basic Principles and Techniques 193

Sulphur 2Na + S ––→ Na2S – L.E. + sodium Na2S + Na2[Fe(CN)5NO] –→
(L.E.) nitroprusside Sodium nitroprusside
A deep violet colour. Na4[Fe(CN)5NOS]
– L.E. + CH3COOH + Deep violet
(CH3COO)2Pb CH3COOH
Na2S + (CH3COO)2Pb ––––––––→
Gives a black ppt.
Pbs + 2CH3COONa
Black ppt.
HNO3
Halogens Na + X ––→ NaX L.E. + HNO3 + AgNO3 NaX + AgNO3 ––––––→ AgX
(L.E.) – White ppt. soluble in ppt.
aq. NH3 (or NH4OH) AgCl + 2NH3(aq.) ––→ [Ag(NH3)2]Cl
confirms Cl. White Soluble
– Yellow ppt. partially ppt.
soluble in aq.
NH 3 (or NH 4 OH)
confirms Br.
– Yellow ppt. insoluble
in aq. NH3 (or
NH4OH) confirms I.
Nitrogen Na + C + N + S ––→ As in test for nitrogen; NaSCN + FeCl3 ––→
and NaSCN instead of green or [Fe(SCN)Cl2 + NaCl
sulphur Sodium thiocyanate blue colour, blood red Blood red colour
together (L.E.) colouration confirms
presence of N and S
both.
Na O , boil
Phospho- P ––––––––→
2 2
Na3PO4 Solution is boiled Na3PO4 + 3HNO ––→ H3PO4 + 3NaNo3
rus with nitric acid and
t h e n t r e a t e d w i t h H3PO4 + 12(NH4)2MoO4 + 21HNO3
ammonium molybdate ––→ (NH4)3PO4.12MoO3
( N H 4) 2M o O 4.
Ammonium phosphomolybalate
Formation of yellow
(yellow ppt.)
ppt. indicates presence
of phosphate (hence, + 21NH4NO3 + 12H2O
phosphorus) in organic
compound.

 Quantitative analysis of organic compounds : The percentage composition

of elements presence an organic compound is determined by the methods
based on the following principles :

194 Chemistry Class XI

Elements Method
Carbon and Liebig's Combustion method :
Hydrogen A known mass of an organic compound is burnt in the presence of excess
of O2 and CuO.
y y
CxHy + (x + )O2 ––––→ xCO2 + H2O
4 2
CO2 evolved is absorbed by conc. solution of KOH or ascarite (NaOH +
CaO).H2O produced is absorbed by anhydrous CaCl2 or Mg(ClO4)2.
Increase in masses of these absorbing compounds gives the masses of CO2
and H2O produced.
12 mass of CO2 formed
% of C = × 100;
44 mass of compound taken

2 mass of H2O formed

% of H = × 100
18 mass of compound taken

Halogens Carius method :

Halogen in organic compound is precipitated as silver halide by boiling
with conc. NHO3 and then adding AgNO3.
HNO3,
X AgX
AgNO3
At. mass of X mass of AgX formed
% of X = × × 100
108 + At. mass of X mass of compound taken
Nitrogen Dumas method :
Nitrogen containing organic compound is heated with CuO in an atmosphere
of CO2.
y y
(
CxHyNz + 2x +
2
)
CO2 –––→ xCO2 +
y
2
H2O + N2 + 2x +( 2
)
Cu

N2 evolved gets collected over conc. KOH solution which absorbs all
other gases.
28 Vol. of N2 at STP
% of N = × × 100
22400 mass of compound taken
Kjeldahl's method :
Organic compound + H2SO4 (conc.) → (NH4)2SO4 2NaOH→ Na2SO4 +
2NH3 + 2H2O + 2NH3 + H2SO4 → (Na4)2SO4

1.4 × molarity of acid × vol. of acid used × basicity of acid

% of N =
mass of compound taken

Organic Chemistry: Some Basic Principles and Techniques 195

Sulphur Carius method :
Sulphur in organic compound is converted into H2SO4 by boiling with
Na2O2 or conc. HNO3 and is precipitated as BaSO4 by adding excess of
BaCl2 solution in water.
(i) HNO3,
S → BaSO
(ii) BaCl2 4
white ppt.
32 mass of BaSO4 formed
% of S = × × 100
233 mass of compound taken
Phosphorus Ignition method :
HNO3
P → H PO
heat 3 4

H3PO4 + Mg2+ + NH4CL → MgNH4PO4 + HCl

Magnesium ammonium
phosphate (white ppt.)
2MgNH4PO4 → Mg2P2O7 + 2NH3 + H2O
Magnesium pyrophosphate
62 mass of Mg P2O7 formed
% of P = × × 100
222 mass of compound taken

196 Chemistry Class XI

MIND MAP : ORGANIC CHEMISTRY

Organic Chemistry: Some Basic Principles and Techniques 197

 ULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIO S ( CQ)

1. Homolytic fission of C-C bond in ethane gives an intermediate in which

carbon is:
a. sp3 hybridised b. sp2 hybridised
c. sp-hybridised d. sp3d- hybridized
2. The kind of delocalization involving sigma bond in conjugation with pi
electrons is called:
a. Inductive effect b. Hyperconjugation effect
c. Electromeric effect d. Mesomeric effect
3. Which organic species has only one type of hybridized carbon?

a. CH2 = C = CH2 b. CH3 – CH – CH3

c. CH3 – C = CH d. CH2 = CH – CH2

4. Which of the following can act as an electrophile?
a. CN– b. OH–
c. H2O d. BF3
5. Which of the following is correct about the species: (CH3)3 – C+
a. It is planar b. Its C+ is sp2 hybridised
c. A nucleophile can attack on its C+ d. All of these
6. hich of the following has all the effects namely Inductive, Mesomeric and
Hyperconjugative ?
a. CH3Cl b. CH3CH = CH2
c. CH3CH = CHCOCH2Cl d. CH2 = CH – CH = CH2
7. The most stable free radical among the following is:
• • • •
a. C6H5CH2CH2 b. C6H5CHCH3 c. CH3CH2 d. CH3CHCH3
8. Isomers of a compound must have :
a. Same physical properties b. Same chemical properties
c. Same structural properties d. Same molecular weight
9. The type of isomerism not found in alkenes is :
a. Chain isomerism b. Geometrical isomerism
c. Metamerism d.Position isomerism

198 Chemistry Class XI

10. Which of the following species have six conjugated electrons?
+

a. b. CH2 = CH – CH = CH – CH2– c. d. All of these

N
11. The correct decreasing order of priority for the functional groups of organic
compounds in the IUPAC system of nomenclature is:
a. –COOH, –SO3H, –CONH2, –CHO
b. –SO3H, –COOH, –CONH2, –CHO
c. –CHO, –COOH, –SO3H, –CONH2
d. –CONH2, –CHO, –SO3H, –COOH
12. The IUPAC name of CH3 – CH = CH – C CH is:
a. pent-3-en-1-yne b. pent-3-en-4-yne
c. pent-2-en-4-yne d. pent-2-en-3-yne
13. ifferent structures generated due to rotation about C-C axis of an organic
molecule are example of:
a. Geometrical isomerism b. Conformational isomerism
c. Optical isomerism d. Structural isomerism
14. Which of the following process is not used for the preparation of solid
impurities?
a. Distillation b. Sublimation
c. Crystallisation d. Vapouristaion
15. Quantitative measurement of nitrogen in an organic compound is done by
the method:
a. Berthelot method b. Lassaigne method
c. Carius method d. Kjehldahl method
ANSWERS
1. a 2. b 3. d 4. d 5. d 6. c 7. b 8. d 9. c 10. d
11. a 12. a 13. b 14. d 15. a

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. The CH4 molecule has ____________ structure.
2. The property of carbon responsible for the large number of carbon compounds
is called ____________.
3. A triple bond between two carbon atoms is composed of one _________ and
_________ bonds.

Organic Chemistry: Some Basic Principles and Techniques 199

4. An organic compound which decomposes below its boiling point can be
purified by .
5. The central atom of CH2 = C = CH2 is __________ hybridized.
6. There is a difference of mass units between two consecutive
members of a homologous series.
7. Geomerical isomerism happens due to _________ around p bond.
8. Electrophiles are the species which attack the regions of _________ electron
density.
. Hyperconjugation effect is also known as resonance.
10. In Duma’s method, the nitrogen present in an organic compound is set free
as ____________.
ANSWERS
1. Tetrahedral 2. Catenation 3. , two 4. Vacuum distillation 5. sp
6. 14 7. Restricted rotation 8. high 9. No-bond 10. Nitrogen

TRUE AND FALSE TYPE QUESTIONS

1. In homologous series all the members have the same physical properties.
2. IUPAC name of CH3CN is Methanenitrile.
3. Cis-trans isomers have different dipole moments.
4. Ethanol and methoxymethane are position isomers.
5. A free radical is a species with an unpaired valence electron.
6. Acetylene is a linear molecule.
7. Resonance brings down the stability of molecule.
8. Inductive effect is observed in bond in presence of attacking reagent.
9. The percentage of carbon and hydrogen are estimated simultaneously in an
organic compound by Liebig method.
10. Chromatography is the method used to separate and purify compounds when
present in small amounts.
ANSWERS
1. F 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T 6. T 7. F 8. F 9. T 10. T

ASSERTION REASON TYPE QUESTIONS

The questions given below are Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Use the
following key to select the correct answer.
(a) If both assertion and reason are correct and reason is correct explanation for
assertion.
200 Chemistry Class XI
(b) If both assertion and reason are correct but reason is not correct explanation
for assertion.
(c) If reason is correct but assertion is incorrect.
(d) If both assertion and reason are incorrect.
1. Assertion: But-1-ene and 2-Methylprop-1-ene are position isomers.
Reason: Position isomers have same molecular formula but different
arrangement of carbon atoms.
2. Assertion: All the carbon atoms of But-2-ene lie in one plane.
Reason: All the carbon atoms in But-2-ene are sp2 hybridized.
3. Assertion: Alkanes having more than three carbon atoms exhibit chain
isomerism.
Reason: All carbon atoms in alkanes are sp-hybridised.
4. Assertion: In CH2 = C = CH2, all the carbon atoms are sp2 hybridised.
Reason: All the hydrogen atoms lie in one plane.
5. Assertion: Butane and 2-Methylbutane are homologues.
Reason: Butane is a straight chain alkane while 2-Methylbutane is branched
chain alkane.
6. Assertion: Tertiary carbocations are generally formed more easily than
primary carbocations.
Reason: Hyperconjugation as well as inductive effect due to additional alkyl
groups stabilize tertiary carbocations.
7. Assertion: Alkyl carbanions like ammonia have pyramidal shape.
Reason: The carbon atom carrying negative charge has an octet of electrons
8. Assertion: Carbocations are planar in nature.
Reason: Carbocations are sp2 Hybridised.
9. Assertion: IUPAC name of compound CH3CH = CH – CHO is But-2-enal.
Reason: Functional group gets preference over multiple in IUPAC name of
a compound.
10. Assertion: Compounds with difference in their boiling points by about 30 C
can be separated by simple distillation.
Reason: All liquid mixture can be separated by distillation method.
ANSWERS
1. d 2. c 3. c 4. d 5. b 6. a 7.b 8. a 9. a 10. c

Organic Chemistry: Some Basic Principles and Techniques 201

 MATCH THE COLUMNS

Match the statements (a,b,c,d) in column I with the statements (I,ii,iii,iv) in

column II.
1. Column I Column II
a. Leibig method i. N2
b. Dumas method ii. AgX
c. Kjehldahl method iii. CO2 and H2O
d. Carius method iv. NH3
2. Column I Column II
a. Nonbenzenoid aromatic compound i. 50% s character
b. Catenation ii. Species containing single
unpaired nonbonding electrons
c. Free radical iii. Chain-forming property of
an element
d. sp-hybridised carbon atom iv. Tropolone
ANSWERS
1. a. iiii b. iv c. i d. ii
2. a. iv b. iii c. ii d. i

ONE WORD ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS

1 Write the formula of next higher homologue of C2H5OH.

2. Mention the hybridisation of underlined carbon in CH3C N.
3. What type of isomerism is shown by Pentane and 2-Methylbutane?
4. Nucleophiles are Lewis acids or Lewis bases?
5. hat type of bond fission results in the formation of free radicals
6 . What is the number of electrons present in the outermost shell of carbon in
the methyl radical?
7. What is the other name for no-bond resonance?
8. What is the name of the Prussian blue coloured compound formed in
Lassaigne’s test for nitrogen in an organic compound?
9. SO3 is an electrophile or nucleophile in sulphonation reaction of benzene?
10. Name suitable technique of separation of the components from a mixture of
calcium sulphate and camphor.

202 Chemistry Class XI

 1-MARK QUESTIONS
1. Which unique property of carbon is responsible for the large number of
carbon compounds?
2. How many and bonds are there in propyne?
3. What is the hybridization of carbon in ethyne?
4. Which has the longest C – C bond length among ethane, ethene and ethyne.
5. How many secondary carbon atoms are present in 2-Methylpentane?
6. Draw structure of 3-Isopropyl-2-methylhexane.
7. Draw bond line structure of CH3(CH2)6CH = CH(CH2)2 – COOH
8. What are the bond angles in sp3, sp2 and sp hybrid orbitals?.
. rite the formulae of first four members of homologous series of alkyne
family.
10. Write the correct of priority of the following functional groups:
–C N, >C = O, –OH, –COOH, –CONH2
11. Write IUPAC name of :
(i) CH3 – CH2 – CN
(ii) CH2 = CHCH2OH
(iii) CH3CH2CH(CH3) – CO – CH2CH3
(iv) CH3CH2 – O – CH2CH(CH3)CH3
(v) Cl – CH2 – C CH
12. What type of isomerism is exhibited by Propanal and Propanone?
13. What is the essential condition for a compound to exhibit geometrical
isomerism?
14. Classify the following into electrophiles and nucleophiles:
H+, NH3, AlCl3, NO2+, CN– , H2O, ROH, RNH2, Carbocation
15. What type of attacking reagents are produced by heterolytic cleavage of
covalent bond?
16. Name each of the following species and indicate which member of each pair
is more stable:
(i) CH3+, CH3CH2+
+ +
(ii) C6H5CHCH3, CH3CHCH3
• •
(iii) CH2 = CH – CH2 , CH = CH – CH3
– –
(iv) CH3 – CH2 , CH3 – CH – CH3

Organic Chemistry: Some Basic Principles and Techniques 203

17. Identify electrophilic centre in CH3CHO.
18. What is state oh hybridization of positively charged carbon atom in
carbocation?
1 . hat is the effect of introducing an alkyl group on the stability of carbocation
20. Out of Benzyl and ethyl carbocation which is more stable and why?
21. Arrange the following in increasing order of acidic strength:
ClCH2COOH, CH3CH2COOH, ClCH2CH2COOH
22. Name two solvents which are commonly used to dissolve organic solids.
23. ame the technique that can be used for purification of iodine that contains
traces of NaCl.
24. A liquid (10 mL) has three components A, B, C. which technique is suitable
to sparate A,B, C from such a small amount of mixture?
25. Name one commonly used adsorbent in column chromatography.
26. Under what condition do we use fractional distillation?
27. A liquid compound starts decomposing well before its boiling point under
normal pressure. How will you purify it?
28. Which elements are normally not detected in an organic compound?
29. For which type of compounds Kjehldahl’s method is not useful?
30. How do you precipitate sulphur in Carius method?
31. Which method is used to estimate carbon and hydrogen?
32. What do we notice in Lassaigne’s test if the compound contains both nitrogen
and sulphur?

2-MARKS QUESTION

1. How will you account for the presence of large number of organic
compounds?
2. Draw the structural formulae of the following compounds:
(i) Ethoxypropane
(ii) But-1-en-3-yne
(iii) 3,4,4,-Trimethylhex-1-yne
(iv) sec-butyl alcohol
(v) But-2-enoic acid
3. How is alkyl group represented? Give the structure and the names of the
alkyl groups which originate from (i) n-Butane (ii) isobutene

204 Chemistry Class XI

4. Give IUPAC name of the following compounds:
(i) C6H5 CH2 CH2OH
(ii) (CH3)2 CH2 CH2 CHO
(iii) CH2 = CH – C N
(iv) CH3 – CH – C – CH – CH3
| || |
Br O CH3
(v) CH3 – CH – CH = C – CH2 – COOH
| |
OH OH3
5. What is functional isomerism? Give two examples.
6. Distinguish between position isomerism and functional isomerism.
7. What is metamerism? Give example.
8. How are free radicals formed?
. hat is the effect of introducing an alkyl group on the stability of a free
radical?
10. Give two examples each of the groups exerting I and I effect when
attached to a chain of carbon atoms.
11. A tertiary butyl carbocation is is more stable than isobutyl carbocation.
Justify.
11. hat do you understand by R and R effect
12. efine hyperconjugation.
13. hat is the difference between inductive and electromeric effect
14. All electrophiles are Lewis acids while nucleophile are Lewis bases. Explain.
15. hat is the purpose of filtration through hot water funnel
16. What precautions are necessary while purifying an organic solid with the
help of crystallization process?
17. Discuss the principle of steam distillation.
18. Discuss the role of fractionating column in fractional distillation.
19. How will you prepare Lassaigne’s extract? Name the elements which can be
detected from this extract?
20. Why do we boil Lassaigne’s extract with conc. HNO3 while detecting
halogens in an organic compound?

Organic Chemistry: Some Basic Principles and Techniques 205

 3-MARKS QUESTIONS

1. Discuss the orbital structure of ethene.

2. efine (i) unctional group (ii) Homologous series.
3. What do you understand by 1°, 2°, 3° and 4° carbon? Write one example
having atleast one carbon of each type.
4. Why stability of carbocations follows the order: tertiary>secondary>primary?
5. What are the various conditions essential for resonance?
6. Write resonance structures of CH2 = CH – CHO. Indicate relative stability of
the contributing structures.
. Inductive effect is of permanent nature while electromeric effect is only
temporary. Explain.
8. hat is chromatography ame different types of chromatographic
processes.
9. You are given a mixture of methanol and acetone. Discuss the process which
you will employ to separate them.
10. Explain the reason for the fusion of an organic compound with metallic
sodium for testing nitrogen, sulphur and halogens.

5-MARK QUESTIONS

1. What are free radicals? Justify the stability of the aliphatic primary, secondary
and tertiary free radicals.
2. What is a carbanion? How is it formed? Discuss relative stability of primary,
secondary and tertiary carbanion.
3. Arrange the following in the order of property indicated against each set:
(i) – C6H5, – NO2, – COOH, – I, – F, – CH3, – C2H5 ( In the increasing
order of I effect)
+
+ +
(ii) CH3CH2CH2CH2 , (CH3)3C , CH3CH2CH2CHCH3 (In the order of
increasing stability)
(iii) – Cl, – CONH2, – CHO (In the increasing priority order if present in
same molecule)

206 Chemistry Class XI

4. Draw the resonance strutuctures for the following compounds. Show the
electron shift using curved arrow notation.
(i) C6H5NO2
(ii) CH3CH = CHCHO
(iii) C6H5OH
(iv) C6H5CH2+
(v) CH3CH = CHCH2+
5. Suggest a method to separate the constituents from the following mixture:
(i) Mixture of two miscible liquids
(ii) A mixture of oil and water
(iii) A mixture of plant pigments
(iv) A mixture of solid benzoic acid and sodium chloride
(v) o-Nitrophenol and p-Nitrophenol present in the mixture.
6. 0.378g of an organic compound containing carbon and hydrogen was
subjected to combustion by Leibig’s method, the CO2 and H2O formed were
passed through potash bulbs and anhydrous CaCl2 tube. At the end of the
experiment, the increase in the respective weights were 0.264g and 0.162g.
Calculate the percentage of carbon and hydrogen.
(Ans: C = 19.05% , H = 4.76%)

Organic Chemistry: Some Basic Principles and Techniques 207

 UNIT TEST
Time Allowed: 1 hr Maximum Marks : 20
General Instructions:
(i) All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Maximum marks carried by each question are indicated against it.

1. Write bond line formula for the following compound: [1]

HOCH2CH2CH2CH(CH3)CH(CH3)COOH

2. Write IUPAC name of the following compound: [1]

CH3 – CH – C – CH – CH3
| || |
NO2 O CH3

3. The central atom of compound CH2 = C = CH2 is ______ hybridized. [1]

4. There is a difference of mass units between two 1

consecutive members of a homologous series.
5 hich of the following has all the effects namely : 1
Inductive, Mesomeric and Hyperconjugative ?
(a). CH3Cl (b). CH3CH = CH2
(c). CH3CH = CHCOCH2Cl (d). CH2 = CH – CH = CH2

6. (i) What type of isomerism is exhibited by the following pair of [1]

compounds?
CH3CH2CHO and CH3 – C – CH3
||
O
(ii) Give one example each of nucleophile and electrophile.

7. (i) Arrange the following in increasing order of stability:

–
(CH3)3C– , CH3 – CH – CH3, CH3CH2–

(ii) ifferentiate between inductive and electromeric effect.

208 Chemistry Class XI

8. (i) hen do we use hot water funnel for filtration
(ii) How will you separate a mixture bof two organic compounds which
have different solubilities in the same solvent
(iii) An organic liquid decomposes below its boiling point. How will you
purify it?

9. Draw the resonating structures of (a) Phenol (b) Benzaldehyde.

10. Arrange the following in the order of property indicated against each set:
(i) –C6H5, –NO2, –COOH, –I, –F, –CH3, –C2H5
(In the increasing order of I e ect)
+
+
(ii) CH3CH2CH2CH2 , (CH3)3 C+,
CH3CH2CH2CHCH3
(In the order of increasing stability)
(iii) –COOH , –CONH2, –CHO
(In the increasing priority order if present in same molecule)
(iv) HCOOH, CH3COOH, ClCH2COOH
(Increasing order of acidic strength)
(v) O2NCH2CH2O– , CH3CH2O–
(species ha ing greater stability)
*****

Organic Chemistry: Some Basic Principles and Techniques 209

 Chapter - 13
Hydrocarbons
FAST TRACK : QUICK REVISION
Hydrocarbons are the organic compounds containing carbon and hydrogen only.
Depending upon the types of carbon-carbon bonds present, hydrocarbons can
be classified into three categories- (i) Saturated (ii) Unsaturated (iii) Aromatic
hydrocarbons.
Saturated hydrocarbons contain carbon-carbon muiltiple bonds double bonds,
triple bonds or both.
ALKANES : Saturated open chain hydrocarbons containing carbon-carbon single
bonds. These are inert under normal conditions i.e. do not react with acids, bases
and other reagents. Alkanes exhibit Chain isomerism, Position isomerism and
conformational isomerism.
General methods of preparation of alkanes :
1. From Unsaturated hydrocarbons : By hydrogenation in the presence of
platinium, palladium or nickel as catalyst.
General Chemical Equation :
Ni
R – CH = CH2 + H2 R – CH2 – CH3
here R is H or Alkyl group
Ni
e.g. CH2 = CH2 + H2 CH3 – CH3
Ethene Ethane
Ni Ni
CH3 – C CH H2 CH3 – CH = CH2 + H2 CH3 – CH2 – CH3
Propyne Propene Propane

2. From alkyl halides : on reduction with Zinc and dilute hydrochloric acid
Zn, H+
CH3 – Cl H2 CH4 HCl
Chloromethane Methane
Zn, H+
C2 H5 – Cl H2 C2H6 HCl
Chloroethane Ethane
 Zn, H+
CH3CH2CH2Cl H2 CH3CH2CH3 HCl
1-Chloropropane Propane

3. From alkyl halides by Wurtz reaction : Reaction of alkyl halide with

sodium in dry ether, useful only for the preparation of symmetrical alkanes.
ry Ether
CH3CH2Br 2 a Br CH2CH3 CH3CH2CH2CH3
Bromoethane Butane
ry Ether
CH3CH2CH2 Br 2 a Br CH2CH2CH3 CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH3
1-Bromopropane n Hexane
ry Ether
CH3CH2 Br 2 a Br CH2CH3 CH3CH2CH2CH3
1-Bromopropane 1 Bromoethane n Pentane (desired)

4. From Carboxylic acids : By decarboxylation with soda lime

CH3COO a aOH CH4 + Na2CO3
Sodium acetate Sodium CaO Methane Sodium
Hydroxide

5. By Kolbe's electrolytic method : Electrolysis of an aqueous solution sodium

or potassium salt of carboxylic acid. Alkane containing even number of
carbon atoms is formed at anode.
Electrolysis
2CH3COO a 2H2O CH3 – CH3 2CO2 + H2 2 aOH
At Anode : (Oxidation)
O O
2e
2CH3 – C – O 2CH3 – C – O —→ 2CH3• 2CO2
2CH3• —→ CH3 CH3
At Cathode : (Reduction)
2H2O → 2OH + 2H+
2H+ + 2e —→ H2

Physical Properties of alkanes :

1. Boiling point of alkanes decreases on branching due to decrease in surface
ara of molecule with branching which decreases magnitude of van der aal's
forces of attraction.
2. Alkanes being non-polar in nature are soluble in non-polar solvents.

Hydrocarbons 211
 Chemical properties of Alkanes :
• Alkanes undergo substitution reactions.
e.g., Halogenation, itration, Sulphonation.
Halogenation : or example Chlorination of methane
CH4 Cl2 CH3Cl HCl
Chloromethane

CH3Cl Cl2 CH2Cl2 HCl

Dichloromethane

CH2Cl2 Cl2 CHCl3 HCl

Trichloromethane

CHCl3 Cl2 CCl4 HCl

Tetrachloromethane

Rate of reaction of alkanes with halogens is 2 Cl2 > Br2 > I2. Rate of
replacement of hydrogen in alkanes is 3 2 1 . luorination is too
violent to be controlled. Iodination is reversible and it is therefore carried
out in the presence of oxidising agent like H O3.

Mechanism of halogenation : ree radical mechanism

Cl Cl Cl Cl Initiation

Cl CH4 H Cl CH3 Propagation

CH3 Cl Cl CH3 Cl Cl Propagation

Cl CH3 CH3 Cl Termination

Combustion : Complete combustion gives carbon dioxide and water.

CH4 2O2 CO2 + 2H2O

Isomerisation :
CH3
AlCl3 HCl
CH3 CH2CH2CH3 CH3 CHCH3
200 C, 35 atm
n-Butane Isobutane

212 Chemistry Class XI

 Aromatisation :
CH3 Cr2O3 or V2O5
CH2 CH2 or Mo2O3
CH2 CH2 773 K
CH2 10 20 atm

(vi) Reaction with steam

Ni
CH4 + H2O CO 3H2

Pyrolysis : ecomposition of higher alkanes to lower alkanes on heating.

C6H12 + H2
773K
C6H14 C4H8 C2H6
C3H6 C2H4 + CH4

Conformations :
ifferent spatial arrangement of atoms arising due to rotation around C-C
single bond.
Conformation of ethane, CH3CH3
Two conformational isomers or conformers.
Eclipsed form = all hydrogen atoms nearest to each other.
Staggered form = all hydrogen atoms are farthest apart.

Ball-stick formula
sawhorse representation

New man projection

Stability of eclipsed conformation is least while staggered conformation

is most stable. The energy difference between two extreme forms is
12.5k mol-1. ue to this small energy difference the two forms are easily
inter-convertible at ordinary temperature and cannot be separated and
isolated.

Hydrocarbons 213
 ALKENES
These are unsaturated non-cyclic hydrocarbons which have.sp2 -hybridisation
with 120 bond angle.
Alkenes are also called olefins oil.forming which indicates their high reactive
nature.
Alkenes have general formula Cn H2n, where n = 2, 3, 4, .......
C2H4 (ethene), C3H6 (propene), etc.

 Methods of Preparation of Alkenes

(i) From alkynes
Pd C
R C C R' H2
cis-alkene

(ii) From alkyl halide [Dehydrohalogenational]

H H H H
Alc. OH
H C C H C =C
H X H H
X Cl, Br, I -Elimination product

(iii) From vicinal dihalides

CH2Br CH2Br + Zn —→ CH2 CH2 + ZnBr2

CH3 CH CH2 + Zn —→ CH3 CH CH2 + ZnBr2

Br Br

(iv) From alcohols by acidic dehydrogenation

H H
Conc. H2SO4
H C C H CH2 = CH2 + H2
Ethene
H OH
Ethanol

214 Chemistry Class XI

 Chemical Properties of Alkenes :
1. Addition of Halogens :
CCl4
CH2=CH2 + Br—Br CH2 CH2
Ethene
Br Br
1, 2-Dibromoethane

CH3 CH=CH2 Cl Cl CH3 CH CH2

Ethene
Cl Cl
1, 2-Dichloropropane

2. Addition of hydrogen halides HCl, HBr, Hl : Add up to alkenes to form

alkyl halides as per their reactivity order in HI HBr HCl.
Addition reaction of HBr to unsymmetrical alkenes (Markownikov's rule)
According to Markownikovs' rule, the negative part of the addendum (adding
molecule) gets attached to that carbon atom which possesses lesser number
of hydrogen atoms.
H Br
H C C=C H HBr H 3C C CH3
H H H H
2-Bromopropane

Anti Markownikov addition or peroxide effect or harasch effect in

the presence of organic peroxide, addition of only HBr molecule on
unsymmetrical alkene takes place contrary to the Markownikov's rule.
Peroxide effect is not observed in case of H , HCl and HI.
CH3 CH=CH2 + HBr CH3CH2CH2Br
(C6H5CO)2O2
1-bromopropane

3. Addition of sulphuric acid

CH3 CH=CH2 HOSO2OH → CH3CH(OSO3H) CH3
cold and conc. propyl hydrogen sulphate

4. Addition of water
H3C
H+
CH3 CH=CH2 + H2O C CH3

CH3 H3C OH
2-Methylpropene 2-Methylpropan-2-ol

Hydrocarbons 215
5. Oxidation : Alkenes decolourise cold dilute aqueous solution potassium
permanganate (Baeyer's reagent). It is used as a test for unsaturation.
il. MnO4
CH2=CH2 + H2O O CH2 CH2
273K
OH OH
Ethane 1,2-diol
or glycol

Acidic MnO4 or acidic K2Cr2O7 oxidises alkenes to ketones and or acids

depending upon the nature of alkene and the experimental conditions.

MnO4 H+
(CH3)2C CH2 (CH3)2CO CO2 + H2O
2-Methyl propene Propane-2-one
MnO4 H+
CH3 CH=CH CH3 2CH3COOH
But-2-ene Ethanoic acid

6. Ozonolysis : Reaction of ozone with alkene to form ozonide which on

subsequent reductive cleavage with zinc dust and water give carbonyl
compounds (aldehydes ketones).

H3C H 3C
n H2O
C=CH2 O2 C=O HCHO H2O2
H3C H 3C

Zn + H2O2 nO H2O

7. Polymerization
High temperature pressure
n(CH2=CH2) catalyst
CH2 CH2 n
polythene

n(CH3 CH=CH2)
High temperature pressure
catalyst
[ CH
CH3
CH2—
n

216 Chemistry Class XI

 ALKYNES
These are unsaturated hydrocarbons with general formula CnH2n-2 e.g., C2H2
(ethyne), C3H4 (propyne).

Alkynes also exhibit electrophilic addition reaction but less reactive than alkenes
because the dissociation of -electron cloud requires more energy.

H–C C H contins 3 and 2 -bonds and bond length is 120 pm. In acetylene.
H–C–C bond angle is 180 .

 Methods of Preparation of Alkynes

1. From calcium carbide
CaCO3 CaO CO2
CaO C CaC2 CO
CaC2 + 2H2O Ca(OH)2 C2H2
2. From vicinal dihalides
H H
H2C CH2 OH
C=C
Alcohol
Br Br - KBr H Br
- H2O
NaNH2 aBr, H3
HC CH
3. From tetrahalides
CH3 OH
Br2CH CHBr2 + 2Zn H C C H 2 nBr2

Physical Properties of Alkynes :

1. The first two members are gases next eight members (C5 C12) are liquids
and higher members are solids.
2. They are all colourless and odourless with the exception of acetylene which
has slightly garlic odour due to the presence of PH3 and H2S as impurities.
3. Alkynes are insoluble in water but soluble in organic solvents like ethers,
carbon tetrachloride and benzene.
4. Melting point, boiling point and density increase with increase in molar mass.

Hydrocarbons 217
 Chemical properties of Alkynes
Alkynes show electrophilic as well as nucleophilic addition reactions.

(i) Acidic character of alkyne

1
HC CH a HC C a 2 H2
monosodium
acetylides
1
H–C C a+ + Na Na+ C C a+ + 2 H 2
disodium acetylide

CH3– C C – H + NaNH2 CH3 – C C a + + NH3

sodium propynide

These reactions are not shown by alkenes, alkanes and non-terminal alkynes,
hence used for distinction between alkane, alkene and alkyne.
Acetylenic hydrogens are acidic in nature due to 50 s-character in
sp-hybridised orbitals. Acidity of alkynes is lesser than water.

Acidic behaviour order

(i) HC CH CH2 = CH2 CH3 CH3
sp sp2 sp3

(ii) HC CH CH3 C CH CH3 C C CH3

(ii) Electrophilic addition reactions

H + H Z
C C H H+ C=C :Z C=C
vinyl cation

The addition product formed depends upon the stability of vinylic cation.
Addition on unsymmetrical alkynes takes place according to Markovnikov's
rule.
Pt Pd i H2
CH3 C C H H2 CH3 CH=CH2 CH3CH2CH3
propene propene

218 Chemistry Class XI

 Addition of halogens
HC CH Cl Cl HCCl=CHCl
1, 2-Dichloropropene

Cl2

Cl Cl

HC CH

Cl Cl
1, 1, 2, 2-Tetrachloroethane
or westron

HCl

CH=CCl2

Cl
westrosol (1, 1, 2-Trichloroethene)

Addition of hydrogen halides

Br
CH3 C CH HBr CH3 C=CH2 HBr CH3 C CH3
Br Br
2-Bromopropene 2, 2-Dibromopropane

Addition for water

Hg2+ H+ CH3 C CH3
CH3 C CH HOH 333K CH3 C=CH2
propyne O
O H
(iii) Cyclic polymerisation of ethyne

CH Red hot iron

CH tube
CH
CH CH 873 K
CH

Hydrocarbons 219
 AROMATIC HYDROCARBONS
These hydrocarbon are also known as arenes. The parent member of the family
aromatic hydrocarbons is benzene.
Aromatic compounds containing benzene ring are known as benzenoids.
Structure of benzene : Hexagonal ring of carbon atoms with alternate single and
double bonds. Each carbon atom is sp2 hybridised. Planar ring, bond angle 120 .
All C-C bond lengths are equal due to complete delocalisation of electrons.
H H

H H

H H
ormation of C-C and C-H Sigma skeleton of
sigma bonds benzene molecule

Sideways Sideways
overlap overlap

HUCKEL'S RULE
• Huckel's rule, (based on calculations) : a planar cyclic molecule with
alternating double and single bonds has aromatic stability if it has (4n 2 )
electrons (n is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4)
• or n 1 : 4n 2 6 benzene is stable and electrons are delocalized.
Benzene
Three double bonds
six electrons

220 Chemistry Class XI

 METHODS OF PREPARATION
1. Cyclic polymerisation of ethyne

Red hot fe tube

3C2H2 873K

2. Decarboxylation of aromatic acids

COO a

CaO
aOH + Na2CO3

3. Reduction of phenol
OH

Zn
nO

Physical Properties of Benzene :

(i) Aromatic hydrocarbons are non-polar molecules and are usually
colourless liquids or solids with a characteristic aroma.
(ii) Aromatic hydrocarbons are immiscible with water but readily miscible
with organic solvents.
(iii) Aromatic compounds burn with sooty flame.
Chemical Reactions of Benzene :
(i) Benzene gives electrophile substitution reactions.
(ii) According to experimental evidences, electrophile substitution reaction
involve following three steps :
• Generation of electrophilie
• ormation of carbocation intermediate.
• Removal of proton from the carbocation intermediate.

Hydrocarbons 221
(i) Nitration

(ii) Halogenation

(iii) Sulphonation

(iv) Friedel-Craft's alkylation reaction

222 Chemistry Class XI

(v) Friedel-Crafts acylation reaction

Benzene also undergoes addition reactions e.g.

benzene bexachloride or 666

(BHC or Gammexane or lindane)
 COMBUSTION
2C6H6 15O2 12CO2 + 6H2O

irecting in uence of substituents in monosubstituted benzene

(i) Ortho and para directing groups : Ring activating groups
e.g., NH2, CH3, C2H5, OCH3 etc. ( R effect)
(ii) Meta directing groups : Ring deactivating groups
e.g. - O2, C , CHO, COOH, SO3H ( R effect).

Hydrocarbons 223
 MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (MCQ)

1. Which of the following has zero dipole moment?

(a.) cis-But-2-ene (b) trans-But-2-ene
(c) But-1-ene (d) 2-Methylprop-1-ene
2. Bond length of (I) ethane, (II) ethene, (III) Acetylene, (IV) Benzene follows
the order:
(a) I II III IV (b) I II IV III
(c) I IV II III (d) III IV II I
3. The methyl group in benzene ring is:
(a) Ortho directing (b) Ortho and meta directing
(c) Para directing (d) Ortho and para directing
4. The dihedral angle in the staggered conformation of C2H6
(a) 120 (b) 60
(c) 0 (d) 0
5. On heating C2H2 in red hot tube copper tube, the compound formed is:
(a) Ethylene (b) Benzene
(c) Ethane (d) Methane
6. Action of acetylene on dilute H2SO4 gives:
(a) Acetic acid (b) Acetone
(c) Acetaldehyde (d) Ethyl alcohol
. hich of the following compounds will exhibit cis-trans (geometrical)
isomerism?
(a) Butanol (b) 2-Butyne
(c) 2-Butenol (d) 2-Butene
8. Hydrolysis of ozonide of But-1-ene gives
(a) Ethylene only
(b) Acetaldehyde and formaldehyde
(c) Propionaldehyde and formaldehyde
(d) Acetaldehyde only
. Reaction of hydrogen bromide with propene in the absence of a peroxide
is a an
(a) free radical reaction (b) nucleophilic substitution
(c) electrophilic addition (d) nucleophilic substitution

224 Chemistry Class XI

10. Among the following compounds, the one which is most reactive towards
electrophilic nitration is:
(a) Benzoic acid (b) itrobenzene
(c) Toluene (d) Benzene
ANSWERS: 1.b 2.c 3.d 4.b 5.b 6.c .d 8.c .c 10.c

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. Alkanes mainly undergo reaction.

2. Halogenation of alkanes does not occur in .
3. The H – C – H bond angle in ethene is .
4. The addition of HBr to an unsymmetrical alkene takes place in accordance
with rule.
5. Baeyer’s reagent is used for testing .
6. Benzene favours substitution reaction.
. The ipole moment of Benzene is .
8. The nitro group in the benzene nucleus is directing. It
the reactivity of the benzene ring.
. Melting point and boiling point increase as the molar masses .
10. The reaction of solid calcium carbide with water produces ,a
flammable gas.

ANSWERS : 1. Substitution 2. ark 3. 120 4. Markownikov’s

5. Unsaturation 6. electrophilic . ero 8. Meta, decreases
. Increase 10. Ethyne

TRUE AND FALSE TYPE QUESTIONS

1. Alkanes mainly undergo substitution reactions using the free-radical

mechanism.
2. The decreasing order of boiling points among the isomeric pentanes is
neo > iso > n.
3. The acidic character of three types of hydrocarbons follows the order
alkanes alkenes alkynes.
4. The peroxide effect is observed only in addition of HBr, and not with HCl
and HI.

Hydrocarbons 225
5. Wurtz reaction is suitable for the preparation of both symmetrical and
unsymmetrical alkanes.
6. or a compound to be aromatic it must have (4n 2) electrons.
7. Benzene has planar structure.
8. The benzene molecule has two different carbon-carbon bond lengths,
corresponding to alternate single and double bonds.
. In riedel-Crafts reaction, AlCl3 is an electrophile.
10. An electron-donating substituent in benzene ring gives a meta product.
ANSWERS: 1. T 2. 3. 4. T 5. 6. T .T 8. . 10.

MATCH THE COLUMNS

Match the statements (a,b,c,d) in column I with the statements (i, ii, iii, iv) in
column II.
1. Column I Column II
a. C2H6 i. Electrophilic addition
b. C2H4 ii. Electrophilic substitution
c. C2H2 iii. ree radical substitution
d. C6H6 iv. ree radical addition
2. Column I Column II
a. Alkanes i. Saturated nature
b. Alkenes ii. Ozonolysis
c. Alkynes iii. Geometrical isomerism
d. Arenes iv. Aromatic character
ANSWERS: 1. a. → iii b. → i c. → i d. → ii
2. a. → i b. → ii, iii c. → ii d. → i, iv

ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS

Type 1. The questions given below consist of Assertion(A) and Reason (R). Use
the following key to select correct answer.
(a) If both assertion and reason are correct and reason is correct explanation
for assertion.
(b) If both assertion and reason are correct but reason is not correct explanation
for assertion.
(c) If assertion is correct but a reason is incorrect.
(d) If assertion and reason both are incorrect.
226 Chemistry Class XI
1. Assertion: The IUPAC name of CH3CH = CH – C CH is pent-3-en-
1-yne and not pent-2-en-4-yne.
Reason: While deciding the locants of double and triple Bonds, lowest sum
rule is always followed.
2. Assertion: Tropylium cation is aromatic in character.
Reason: The only property which decides the aromatic character is its planar
nature.
3. Assertion: riedel-craft reaction between benzene and acetic anhydride
in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3 yields acetophenone and not poly-
substituted products.
Reason: Acetophenone formed poisons the catalyst preventing further
reaction.
4. Assertion: But-1-ene on reacting with HBr in the presence of peroxide,
products 1-bromobutane.
Reason: It involves the formation of a primary free radical.
5. Assertion: Alkanes with more than three carbon atoms exhibit chain
isomerism.
Reason: Branching of the carbon atom chain is necessary for exhibiting
chain isomerism.
6. Assertion: Benzene reacts with chlorine in the form of light to form BHC.
Reason: BHC is also called gammexane or 666.
7. Assertion: All the hydrogen atoms in CH2 = C = CH2 lie in one plane.
Reason: All the carbon atoms in it are sp2 hybridised.
8. Assertion: Propene reacts with HBr in the presence of benzoyl peroxide to
yield 2-bromopropane.
Reason: In the presence of peroxide, the addition of HBr to propene follows
ionic mechanism.
. Assertion: Benzene does not decolourise bromine water.
Reason: Benzene is stabilised by resonance due to delocalisation of
electrons.
10. Assertion: Acidity of C-H bond decreases in the order:
HC CH H2C = CH2 > H3C – CH3
Reason: Greater the percentage s-character, more is the acidity of C – H bond.
ANSWERS: 1.a 2.c 3.c 4.c 5.a 6.b .c 8.d .a 10.a

Hydrocarbons 227
 ONE WORD TYPE QUESTIONS

1. What is the state of hybridisation of Carbon atoms in alkanes

2. hat is self linking property of atoms called
3. hat is the general formula of alkenes
4. What is the other name for Geometrical isomerism?
5. hich out of Ethane, Ethene and Ethyne has longest C-C bond
6. What is the number of bonds in But-3-en-1-yne?
. ame the product formed when Propyne is treated with aqueous H2SO4 in
the presence of dil.HgSO4.
8. hat is C – C – C bond angle in benzene
. ame the product formed when Benzene reacts with CH3Cl in the presence
of anhydrous aluminium chloride.
10. – COOH is ortho, para directing or Meta directing group

1-MARK QUESTIONS

1. ame the chain isomer of C5H12 which has tertiary carbon atom.
2. Give the IUPAC name of the lowest molecular weight alkane that contains
a quaternary carbon.
3. rite the reaction involved in olbe’s electrolytic method to prepare ethane.
4. efine term decarboxylation.
5. hy dry ether and not water is used as a solvent in the preparation of alkane
by Wurtz reaction?
6. Sodium salt of which carboxylic acid will be needed for the preparation of
propane by decarboxylation method
. Complete the following reaction:
dry ether
CH3Cl a
8. Amongst the following which one has the maximum boiling point
n-Pentane, iso-pentane, neo-pentane.
. efine the term conformation.
10. rite IUPAC name of CH3CH = CHCH2CH = CCH2CH = CH2

CH2CH3

228 Chemistry Class XI

11. raw the cis and trans isomers of CHCl = CHCl.
12. hat happens when 2-Bromobutane is being treated with alc. OH
13. ame the reagents used to carry out the following conversions:
CH3 – CH = CH2 → CH3CH(OH)CH2OH
14. Complete the following reaction :
Organic peroxide
CH3 – CH = CH2 + HBr
15. An alkene A on ozonolysis gives a mixture of ethanol and pentan-3-one.
rite IUPAC name of element.
16. hen alkyne is treated with bromine water then what will be the colour of
the product?
1 . hy alkynes do not exhibit geometrical isomerism
18. Complete the following reaction:
H2O, Hg2+ H+
(i) CH3C CH ?
(ii) CaC2 + 2H2O
1 . How will you convert ethyne to benzene
20. rite chemical equation for combustion reaction of Hexyne.
21. rite IUPAC name of C6H5 – CH2 – CH2 – CH = CH2.
22. hy is benzene extraordinarily stable although it contains three double
bonds?
23. rite chemical reaction to exemplify riedel-Crafts alkylation of benzene.
24. What is the nature of substitution in benzene?
25. Why is not aromatic?
26. C-C bond length in benzene is intermediate between C – C and C = C. hy
2 . Starting from benzene,how would you synthesize m- Bromonitrobenzene.
28. Give one example each of o, p-directing group and m-directing group.
2 . Complete the reaction:
Anhy. AlCl3
C6H6 CH3COCl

30. rite the electrophile which is involved in the nitration of benzene.

Hydrocarbons 229
 2-MARKS QUESTIONS

1. hat effect does branching have on the boiling point of an alkane and why
2. hat is the difference between isomers and conformers
3. Is it possible to isolate pure staggered ethane or pure eclipsed ethane at room
temperature Give reason.
4. Draw Newman projection formula for conformations of ethane.
5. How will you convert methyl bromide to ethane
6. urtz reaction cannot be used for the preparation of unsymmetrical alkanes
Give reason.
. How can ethene be prepared from (i) Ethanol (ii) Ethyl bromide
8. Melting point of cis-But-2-ene is lower than that of trans-But-2-ene. Give
reason.
. raw the structures of cis and trans Hex-2-ene.
10. Explain with the help of equation : Ozonolysis of propene.
11. Give a chemical test to distinguish between ethene and ethane.
12. hat do you understand by peroxide effect ( harasch effect)
11. hat factor determines the stability of alkene
14. Arrange the following alkenes in decreasing order of stability :
CH3 – CH = CH – CH3, CH2 = CH2, CH3 – CH = CH2
15. Complete the reaction:
(i) + HBr → ?

Zn
(ii) O3 CH COOH ? + ?
3

16. An alkene on treatment with HBr in presence of peroxide can generate two
types of free radicals CH3 – C – CH2-Br and CH3 – C(CH3) – CH2•

CH3 Br
Predict the final product of the reaction and give reason.
(Hint: Stability of free radicals)
1 . hat happens when But-2-ene reacts with acidified potassium permanganate
solution?

230 Chemistry Class XI

18. ou are provided with But-2-yne, how will you convert it into:
(i) cis-But-2-ene
(ii) trans-But-2-ene
1 . An alkene C4H8 reacts with HBr both in the presence and absence of peroxide
to give the same product. Identify the alkene.
20. Arrange ethane, ethene and ethyne in the order of increasing acidity.
21. Identify A and B in the following reaction:
Na Red hot iron tube
A CH CH B
873K
22. rite the structures of the products A and B of the following reactions:
Na CH3Br
(i) HC CH A B
Alc. OH NaNH2
(ii) BrH2C – CH2Br A B
23. Give a chemical test to distinguish between ethyne and ethene.
24. Out of benzene and toluene ,which will undergo nitration easily and why
25. hy does presence of a nitro group make the benzene ring less reactive in
comparison to the unsubstituted benzene ring Explain.
26. hat happens when Chlorine is passed through benzene in the presence of
sunlight and absence of halogen carrier?

3-MARKS QUESTIONS

1. Write the structures and name of products obtained in the reaction of sodium
with a mixture of 1-Iodo-2-methylpropane and 2-Iodopropane.
2. State Markownikov’s rule. Using this rule, write the reaction of propene
with (i) HCl (ii) H2O.
3. Complete the following reactions:
Alc. OH
(i) CH3CH2Br
n H2O
(ii) CH3CH = CH2 O3
il. MnO4
(iii) CH2 = CH2 +H2O O

4. (i) rite the structure of 3, 4- imethylhept-3-ene.

(ii) ame the compounds obtained by ozonolysis of 3-Methylpent-2-ene.

Hydrocarbons 231
5. Complete the following reactions:
NaNH2,CH3Br
(i) CH CH ?
H2O,HgSO4 H2SO4
(ii) CH CH ?
Pt H2
(iii) CH3C CH H2 ? ?
6. Write the mechanism of nitration of benzene.
. Arrange in the order of decreasing relative reactivity with an electrophile
and explain:
Toluene, p-Nitrotoluene, 1, 4-Dinitrobenzene
8. What is meant by delocalization of electrons How does it affect stability
of benzene?
. hat are the conditions for a compound species to be aromatic according
to Huckel’s rule
10. How will you convert benzene into
(i) Acetophenone
(ii) m- Chloronitrobenzene

5-MARKS QUESTIONS
1. efine isomerism. rite all the structural isomers of hexane(C6H14) and
arrange them in increasing order of boiling points.
2. rite short note on (i) urtz reaction (ii) olbe’s electrolysis (iii) Ozonolysis
3. Alkenes show geometrical isomerism while alkanes do not. Give a suitable
explanation.
4. An alkene A’ of molecular mass 28u’ on treatment with bromine gives
a product B’. The Compound B’ on further dehalogenation with zinc
gives back A’. Give the structures of A’ and B’ and also the sequence of
reactions.
5. An organic compound A’ with formula C4H Br on treatment with OH(alc.)
gave two isomeric compounds B’ and C’ with formula C4H8. Ozonolysis of
B’ gave only one product CH3CHO while ’C’ gave two different products.
Identify A, B and C.
6. How will you convert Ethyne into (i) 1, 1, 2, 2-Tetrachloroethane (ii) Ethene
(iii) Ethanal (iv) Benzene (v) Sodium ethynide
7. Discuss the structure of benzene with an emphasis on resonance and orbital
pictures.
232 Chemistry Class XI
 UNIT TEST
Time Allowed: 1 hr Maximum Marks : 20
General Instructions:
(i) All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Maximum marks carried by each question are indicated against it.

1. Amongst the following which one has the maximum boiling point 1
and why n-Pentane , iso-pentane, neo-pentane
2. What is the number of and bonds in But-3-en-1-yne 1
3. Action of acetylene on dilute H2SO4 dil.HgSO4 gives: 1
(a) Acetic acid (b) Acetone (c) Acetaldehyde (d) Ethyl alcohol
4. An alkene A on ozonolysis gives a mixture of ethanal and 1
pentan-3-one. rite IUPAC name of element.
5. The nitro group in the benzene nucleus is directing. 1
It the reactivity of the benzene ring.
6. Arrange the following alkenes in decreasing order of stability and 1
give reason.
CH3 – CH = CH – CH3, CH2 = CH2, CH3 – CH = CH2
. (i) Give a chemical test to distinguish between ethyne and ethene. 2
(ii) Melting point of cis-But-2-ene is lower than that of trans-But-2-ene.
Give reason.
8. Complete the following reactions: 3
Alc. OH
(i) CH3CH2Br
n H2O
(ii) CH3CH = CH2 O3
il. MnO4
(iii) CH2 = CH2 +H2O O
. (i) hat are the conditions for a compound species to be aromatic 3
according to Huckel’s rule
(ii) How will you convert Benzene to acetophenone
10. (i) An alkene A’ of molecular mass 28u’ on treatment with 5
bromine gives a product B’. The Compound B’ on further
dehalogenation with zinc gives back A’. Give the structures
of A’ and B’ and also the sequence of reactions.
(ii) hy is benzene extraordinarily stable although it contains three
double bonds?
(iii) How can we convert ethyne into benzene
****
Hydrocarbons 233
 on
ugati
rconj
Hype
3 H
SP –S H
σ bond
C C

Environmental
C H
H
H
Environmental
Chapter - 14
Chemistry
Chemistry
FAST TRACK : QUICK REVISION

En ironmental pollution: Environmental pollution is the effect of

undesirable changes in our surroundings that have harmful effects on plants,
animals and human beings. A substance which causes pollution is known
as pollutant. Pollutants can be degradable and non-degradable.
Atmospheric pollution: Any undesirable changes in their atmosphere
which adversely effect living beings is called air pollution. Air pollution is
generally limited to troposphere and stratosphere.
Ozone is present in stratosphere and prevents UV radiations of sun from
reaching the earth’s surface.
Tropospheric pollution: It is due to gaseous and particulate pollutants.
1. aseous air pollutants:
Oxides of sulphur: Major sources of oxides of sulphur (mainly SO2) are
burning of fossil fuels containing sulphur. Sulphur dioxide is converted to
sulphur trioxide in presence of particulat matter.
2SO2+O2 2SO
Sulphur dioxide is a corrosive gas which produces acid rain that causes
damage and destruction of vegetation and degradation of soils, building
materials and watercourses. SO2 in ambient air is also associated with asthma
and chronic bronchitis. It also causes irritation to eyes.
O ides of nitrogen: Major sources of nitrogen oxides are high
temperature combustion processes, oxidation of nitrogen in the air and
fuel respectively, denitrifying bacteria, etc.
N2 + O2 2NO
2NO + O2 2NO2
NO + O3 NO2 + O2
 inally, these gases are converted into nitric acid (H O3) which comes
down to the surface of the earth in the form of acid rain.
— NO2 is a respiratory irritant,
The oxides produce eye irritation, injury to liver and kidneys.
Hydrocarbons: They are majorly produced naturally (e.g. marsh gas)
as well as due to incomplete combustion of automobile fuel.
Hydrocarbons are carcinogenic, these harm plants.
O ides of carbon: two major pollutants are oxides of carbon i.e.,
carbon monoxide and carbon dioxide.
Carbon mono ide: Carbon monoxide (CO) is a toxic gas which is
emitted into atmosphere by incomplete combustion of coal and firewood
and by oxidation of hydrocarbons and other organic compounds.
CO may reduce the oxygen carrying capacity of the blood by
combining with haemoglobin to produce carboxyhaemoglobin, This
oxygen deficiency results in headache weak eyesight, choking and
cardiovascular disorders.
Carbon dio ide: CO2 is released into atmosphere by respiration
burning of fossil fuels, forest fire decomposition of limestone in cement
industry, etc.
It is a greenhouse gas, the concentration of which is constantly raising.
— In excess it causes headache and nausea.
reenhouse e ect and global arming: The greenhouse effect is the
process in which the emission of infrared radiation by the atmosphere warms
the Earth surface.
Greenhouse gases include carbon dioxide, methane, ozone
chlorofluorocarbons (C Cs) and water vapour.
Earth absorbs energy from sunlight entering the atmosphere and emit
energy out to space in form of infrared rays. The outgoing radiation
emitted by the surface is in the absorption range of many atmospheric
gases, including carbon dioxide, methane, and water vapour. These
radiations are thus locked in the earth's atmosphere. This results in
the steady increase in the temperature of the earth resulting in global
warming.
Acid rain: Rainwater normally has a pH of 5.6 due to dissolution of CO2
present in the atmosphere.
CO2 + H2O H2CO3 H+ HCO-3

Environmental Chemistry 235

 hen the pH alls below 5.6, the rain water becomes acidic, It is
caused due to presence of acidic gases into the atmosphere the common
ones are sulphur dioxide and nitrogen oxides which are changed into
sulphuric acid and nitric acid by combining with oxygen and water.
2SO2 + O2 2H2O 2H2SO4
4NO2 + O2 2H2O 4H O3
Harmful effects of acid rain: It is causes extensive damage to buildings
and statues made by marble, limestone due to the reaction,
CaCO3 H2SO4 CaSO4 + CO2 H2O
— It is toxic to vegetation and aquatic life.
— It corrodes water pipes resulting in the leaching of the heavy metals
such as e, Pb, and Cu into the drinking water which have toxic effects.
2. Particulate pollutants: Particulate pollutants are small solid particles and
liquid droplets suspended in air.
Smo e: it consists of solid or mixture of solid and liquid particles formed
by combustion of organic matter. e.g., cigarette smoke, oil smoke, smoke
from fossil fuel etc.
ust: It consists of fine particles produced during crushing and grinding of
solid materials. Common dust particulate emission include cement, fly ash,
silica dust, from Industries, dust storm, ground limestone, etc.
ist: These are formed by particles of spray liquids and condensation of
sepals in air. or example, sulphuric acid, mist herbicide or insecticide that
Miss their targets and travel through air from mist.
umes: These are produced by condensation of vapours. or example, metal
fumes, metallurgical fumes and alkali fumes.
Smog: The word smog has its origin from smoke and fog. It is a major air
pollutant.
Classical smog Photochemical smog
Also called as London smog. Also called as Los Angeles smog.
Form due to oxides of sulphur. Formed due to oxides of Nitrogen.
Contains primary pollutants. Content secondary pollutants.
Causes bronchitis and problem
Causes irritation in Eyes.
in lungs.
It is reducing in nature. It is oxidising in nature.

236 Chemistry Class XI

 ormation of photochemical smog: It is formed through sequence of
following reactions:
N 2 + O2 2NO
(in gasoline)

2NO + O2 2NO2
NO2 NO + O
O + O2 O3
O3 + NO NO2 + O2
Ozone reacts with hydrocarbons to form Peroxyacetyl nitrate (PA ),
formaldehyde, acrolein etc. Effects of photochemical smog:
Ozone and PAN are eye irritants. Photochemical smog also corrodes metals
stones buildings materials rubber and painted surfaces.
easures to control photochemical smog:
Catalytic converters are used in automobiles, which prevent the release
of Nitrogen oxide and hydrocarbon to the atmosphere. Certain plants e.g.
Pinus, uniparus, uercus, Pyrus and Vitis can metabolize nitrogen oxide
and therefore their plantation could help in this matter.

Stratospheric pollution: The upper stratosphere consists of considerable

amount of ozone (O3) which protects us from the harmful ultraviolet (UV)
radiations coming from the sun. These radiations causes skin cancer in
humans.
epletion of Ozone layer : itric Oxide and chlorofluorocarbons are found
to be most responsible for depletion of Ozone layer.
NO + O3 — NO2 + O2
O2 — O+O
NO2 + O — NO + O2
hv •CF •
CF2Cl2 — 2Cl+Cl
(free radical)

CFCl3 —hv CFCl2 + Cl•

Cl• + O3 — ClO• + O2
ClO• + O — Cl + O2

Environmental Chemistry 237

 Ozone depletion by o ides of itrogen:
itrous oxide is quite inert, in the stratosphere it is photochemically
converted into more reactive nitric oxide.
NO + O3 — NO2 + O2
hv
O2 — O+O
NO2 + O — NO + O2
Thus NO is regenerated in chain reaction.
E ects of ozone depletion:
ith the depletion of Ozone layer, more UV radiation filters into
troposphere.
UV radiations leads to ageing of skin, cataract, Sunburn, skin cancer,
killing of many phyotplanktons, damage to fish productivity, etc.
ater pollution: ater pollution may be defined as any change in its
physical, chemical, biological properties or contamination with foreign
materials that can adversely affect human beings or reduce its utility for the
intended use.
a or ater pollutants and their sources:

Pollutants a or sources
natural waste Leaching of minerals slits from soil erosion falling
of organic matter from bank,etc.
organic Chemicals Pesticides, surfactants, detergents, Industrial waste
metals uclear power plants, mining, metal plating
industries.
man-made wastes Sewage domestic waste, soaps and detergents,
waste from animal sheds and slaughter houses,
run off from agricultural fields, industrial wastes,
oil pollution.

Eutrophication: The process in which nutrient enriched water bodies

support a dense plant population, which kills animal life by depriving
it of Oxygen and results in subsequent loss of biodiversity is known
as eutrophication.

238 Chemistry Class XI

 BO : The amount of oxygen required by bacteria to break down the
organic matter present in a certain volume of a sample of water, is
called Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD)
International standards for drin ing ater:

Element Permissible limit E ect of e cess amount

Fluoride 1 ppm or 1mg dm-3 Over 10 ppm causes harmful effect
to bones and teeth.
Lead 50ppb Excess amount can damage kidney,
liver reproductive system, etc.
Nitrate 50ppm Excess amount can cause blue baby
syndrome.
Sulphate 500ppm Excess can cause laxative effects.

Soil pollution: Soil pollution is the addition of such chemical substances (in
an indefinite proportion) which deteriorates the quality, texture and mineral
content of the soil and disturbs the biological balance of the organisms in
it and has little effect on the plant growth.
Some ma or soil pollutants and their sources:
Pollutants a or sources
Industrial wastes aste products from paper, sugar, chemical
Industries dumped into the soil.
Agricultural wastes Chemical such as fertilizers pesticides extra used
for killing insects fungi and weeds.
Soil conditioners Used to protect soil fertility but contains several
toxic metals like Pb, As, Hg, Cd, etc
Farm wastes et slurry, faecal wastes are seeped into the soil.
Radioactive pollutants Dumping of nuclear waste into the soil.
emedial measures:
Forestation should be done to check the spread of desert.
— Use of chemical fertilizers should be minimised.
Recycling, digestion and incineration of urban waste and organic waste
should be done.
The industrial e uents should not be allowed to discharge into fields.
— The fertility of the soil can be improved by soil rotation and mixed
farming.

Environmental Chemistry 239

 Control of en ironmental pollution:
aste management: Environmental pollution can be controlled to a certain
extent by managing the waste disposal in a proper way.
ecycling: A large amount of disposed waste materials can be reduced by
recycling the waste.
Thus, it reduces the landfill and converts waste into usable products.

reen chemistry: Green Chemistry may be defined as a strategy to design chemical

process and products that reduces or eliminate the use and generation of hazardous
substances.
It is an alternative tool for reducing pollution. Green Chemistry includes
concepts such as waste minimization, solvent selection, atom utilisation,
intensive processing and alternative synthetic routes from sustainable
resources.
reen chemistry in day to day life:
— Dry cleaning of clothes: Tetra chloroethene (Cl2C = CCl2) was earlier
used as solvent for dry cleaning. The compound contaminates the
ground water and is also a suspected carcinogen.
The process using this compound is now being replaced by a process,
where liquefied carbon dioxide, with suitable present is used.
— Bleaching of paper: Chlorine gas was used earlier for bleaching paper.
These days, hydrogen peroxide (H2O2) with suitable catalyst, which
promotes the bleaching action of hydrogen peroxide, is used.

240 Chemistry Class XI

 MIND MAP : ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY
Smoke
Particulate Dust
Air Pollution Tropospheric Smog
Pollutants Mist
Fumes
Stratospheric Gaseous air
Pollution Pollutants Classical Photo chemical
• Reducing • Oxidising
• Landon smog • Los angles smog
Oxides Oxides Oxides
Ozone layer depletion Hydrocarbons
of S of N of C
e.g. e.g. e.g. e.g.
SO2SO3 NO2NO3 CO, CO2 CH4

Chlorofluorocarbons
Oxides of nitrogen etc.
• Greenhouse effect & Global warming
• Acid rain
Environmental Pollution
Natural Waste e.g. Leaching of mineral slits from soil erosion.

Organic Chemicals e.g. Pesticides, detergents.

Pollutants Water
Pollution Metals e.g. Nuclear power plants, mining.

Man-made Waste e.g. Sewage domestic waste, industrial wastes.

Degradable Non- Industrial Waste e.g. Waste from paper, sugar industry.
degradable
Agricultural Waste e.g. Chemicals such as fertilizers, pesticides.

Environmental Chemistry
Farm Wastes e.g. Wet slurow, fecal wastes.
Soil Pollution
Radioactive pollutants e.g. Dumping of nuclear waste into the soil.

241
Soil conditioners e.g. those containing toxic metals like Pb, As,
Hg, Cd etc.
 MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (MCQ)

1. Which of the following is not the consequence of global warming?

(a) Increase in average temperature of Earth.
(b) Melting of Himalayan glaciers
(c) Rise in sea level
(d) Eutrophication
2. Which of the following statement is incorrect?
(a) Oxidize of Nitrogen in atmosphere can cause depletion of Ozone
layer
(b) Ozone absorbs infrared rays
(c) Depletion of O2 is due to its chemical reaction with halo alkanes
(d) None of these
3. Which of the following are the hazardous pollutants present in automobile
exhaust gases?
(i) N2 (ii) CO (iii) CH4 (iv) Oxides of nitrogen
(a) ii and iii (b) i and ii
(c) ii and iv (d) i and iii
4. hich of the following gas causes green house effect to maximum extent
(a) CH4 (b) Water vapour
(c) N2O (d) CO2
5. The lowest region of atmosphere is
(a) Stratosphere (b) Troposphere
(c) Mesosphere (d) Hydrosphere
6. Classical smog occurs in place of
(a) Excess of NO2 (b) Warm dry climate
(c) Cool humid climate (d) All of these
. hen huge amount of sewage is dumped in a river, the BO
(a) Will increase (b) Will remain unchanged
(c) Will in decrease (d) May increase or decrease
8. Which of the following practices will not come under Green chemistry?
(a) Use of CO2 as solvent instead of Cl2
(b) Use of H2O2 instead of Cl2 for bleaching
(c) Synthesis of ethanal from ethane in one step
(d) Use of tetrachloroethene as a solvent for dry cleaning

242 Chemistry Class XI

9. Eutrophication causes reduction in
(a) Dissolved salts (b) Dissolved oxygen
(c) Nutrients (d) All of these
10. SO2 and NO2 cause pollution by increasing
(a) Acidity (b) Alkalinity
(c) Buffer action (d) Both (a) and (c)
ANSWERS: 1.d 2.b 3.c 4.d 5.b 6.c .a 8.d .d 10. a.

ILL I THE BLA S

1. Three substances normally considered as primary pollutant are , ,
and _____.
2. Sulphur dioxide is mainly produced by the burning of ________.
3. BOD stands for __________.
4. The single plant nutrient mainly responsible for eutrophication is ______.
5. The lowest layer of atmosphere is the .
6. A crucially important species formed by oxygen in stratosphere is .
7. _______ is a greenhouse gas.
8. A major class of organic halides that are thought to pose a threat to
stratospheric ozone are _______.
9. The component that distinguishes classical smog from photochemical smog
is _____.
10. Carbon dioxide traps heat in the atmosphere. This is called the ______.
Ans ers : 1. CO, O 2 , SO 2 2. Coal 3. Biochemical oxygen
demand 4. Phosphate 5. Troposphere 6. Ozone . Carbon dioxide 8.
Chlorofluorocarbons . Sulphur dioxide 10. Greenhouse effect

TRUE AND FALSE TYPE QUESTIONS

1. The troposphere is the region above the stratosphere.
2. ust, mist, fumes, smoke and smog are particulate pollutants.
3. Carboxyhaemoglobin is less stable than oxyhaemoglobin.
4. Ozone occurs naturally in the troposphere.

Environmental Chemistry 243

5. Plants such as Pinus, uniparus, Pyrus and Vitis metabolize nitrogen oxides.
6. Clean water should have BO of 1 ppm or more.
7. Photochemical smog is a mixture of oxidising pollutants.
8. The exhaust from jet aeroplanes contains nitric oxide, which can destroy
the ozone layer.
9. PAN is one of the constituents of photochemical smog.
10. DDT is non-biodegradable and persistent.
Ans ers : 1. 2. T 3. 4. 5. T 6. . T 8. T . T 10. T

MATCH THE COLUMNS

atch the column:
1. Column I Column II
a. CO2 i. a gas produced by the partial combustion of
many fuels
b. CO ii. a gas that occurs naturally in the atmosphere
and which is needed for photosynthesis
c. O3 iii. a dangerous gaseous pollutant with
corrosive properties formed by combustion
of fossil fuels.
d. SO2 iv. an allotrope of oxygen found in the upper
atmosphere
2. Match the pollutants (a, b, c, d) in column I with the effects (i, ii, iii, iv)
in column II.
Column I Column II
a. Phosphate fertilisers in water i. BOD level of water increases
b. Methane in air ii. Acid rain
c. PAN iii. Global warming
d. Nitrogen oxides in air iv. Photochemical oxidant
ANSWERS: 1. a. ii b. i c. iv d. iii
2. a. i b. iii c. iv d. ii

244 Chemistry Class XI

 ASSE TIO EASO T PE QUESTIO S
In the following questions a statement of Assertion (A) followed by reason(R) is
given. Use the following key to select correct answer.
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are correct and Reason is the correct
explanation of Assertion.
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are correct but Reason is not the correct
explanation of Assertion.
(c) Both Assertion and Reason are incorrect.
(d) Assertion is not correct but Reason is correct.

1. Assertion: The pH of acid rain is less than 5.6.

eason: Carbon dioxide present in the atmosphere dissolves in rain water
and forms carbonic acid.
2. Assertion: Photochemical smog is oxidizing in nature.
eason : Photochemical smog contains NO2 and O3, which are formed
during the sequence of reactions.
3. Assertion: If BO level of water in a reservoir is less than 5ppm, it is highly
polluted.
eason: High biological oxygen demand means low activity of bacteria in
water.
4. Assertion: Ozone is destroyed by solar radiation in upper atmosphere.
eason: Thinning of the ozone layer allows excessive UV radiations to
reach the surface of earth.
5. Assertion: Carbondioxide is an of the important greenhouse gas.
eason: It is largely produced by respiratory function of animals and plants.
ANSWERS : 1. b 2. a 3. c 4. d 5. b

ONE WORD TYPE QUESTIONS

1. Name the gas which reacts with haemoglobin in blood.

2. In which part of atmosphere is ozone layer present?
3. Besides CO2 name one other green house gas.
4. Which acid is most abundant in acid rain?
5. ame the gas whose release was responsible for Bhopal gas tragedy.

Environmental Chemistry 245

6. hat is the nature of photochemical smog
7. Write full form of BOD.
8. What is the lowest region of the atmosphere which extends upto a height
of 10 km from sea level?
9. Name the gas which is produced by the incomplete combustion of gasoline.
10. What does CFC stand for?

1 A QUESTIO S

1. Name two gaseous pollutants.

2. What is the size range of particulates?
3. What are primary pollutants?
4. Name two greenhouse gases.
5. hat is the composition of photochemical smog
6. hat is the composition of classical smog
7. Which are the compounds responsible for ozone layerdepletion?
8. ame the pollutants which has affected Taj Mahal.
9. Name two strong acids present in acid rain.
10. What is PAN?
11. Name two sources of phosphate pollution.
12. hen a huge amount of sewage is dumped into a river, what will be the
effect on BO
13. How is O formed in atmosphere
14. In which season the depletion of ozone on Antarctica takes place and when
is it replenished?
15. efine acid rain.

2 A S QUESTIO S

1. Explain giving reason: The presence of CO reduces the amount of

haemoglobin available in the blood for carrying oxygen to body cells.

246 Chemistry Class XI

2. Oxygen plays a key role in the troposphere while ozone in stratosphere.
Explain.
3. What is meant by Eutrophication?
4. efine BO .
5. hat is the importance of measuring BO of a water body
6. hy does water with excessive algae growth become polluted
. A person was using water supplied by municipality. ue to shortage of water,
he started using underground water, he felt laxative effect. hat could be
the cause?
8. What do you understand by the term Green chemistry?
9. Give two examples each of biodegradable and non-biodegradable waste.
10. List few ways to control photochemical smog.

3 A S QUESTIO S

1. Give three harmful effects of oxides of sulphur.

2. What is Global warming? What is its cause?
3. hat is photochemical smog and what are its harmful effects
4. How is classical smog different from photochemical smog
5. State briefly the reactions causing ozone layer depletion in the stratosphere.
6. How does rain water get contaminated with acidic impurities
. iscuss the harmful effects of acid rain.
8. Suggest any four methods for waste management.

5 A S QUESTIO S

1. hat is Green house effect How is it responsible for global warming

2. How can you apply green chemistry in for the following
(i) To control photochemical smog
(ii) To avoid use of halogenated solvents in dry cleaning
(iii) To reduce the use of detergents
(iv) To reduce the consumption of petrol and diesel.

Environmental Chemistry 247

 UNIT TEST
Time Allo ed: 1 hr a imum ar s : 20
General Instructions:
(i) All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Maximum marks carried by each question are indicated against it.

1. The lowest region of atmosphere is [1]

(a) Stratosphere (b) Troposphere
(c) Mesosphere (d) Hydrosphere
2. Classical smog occurs in place of [1]
(a) Excess of NO2 (b) Warm dry climate
(c) Cool humid climate (d) All of these
3. Name two Greenhouse gases. [1]
4. A major class of organic halides that are thought to pose a threat [1]
to stratospheric ozone are ___________.
5. The single plant nutrient responsible for eutrophication is 1
_____________.
6. Explain giving reason: The presence of CO reduces the amount of 2
haemoglobin available in the blood for carrying oxygen to body cells.
. How is classical smog different from photochemical smog 2
8. efine BO . hat is the importance of measuring BO of a 3
water body?
. How does rain water get contaminated with acidic impurities 3
rite one harmful effect of acid rain.
10. How can you apply green chemistry for the following 5
(i) To control photochemical smog
(ii) To avoid use of halogenated solvents in dry cleaning
(iii) To reduce the use of detergents
(iv) To reduce the consumption of petrol and diesel.
****

248 Chemistry Class XI

 SAMPLE PAPER - I
SUB : CHEMISTRY
CLASS - XI
Time Allowed: 1 hr Maximum Marks : 70
General Instructions:
• All question are compulsory
• Q 1 to 20 are very short answer objective type and each carries 1 mark each.
• Q 21 to 27 are short answer question and carry 2 marks each.
• Q 28 to 34 are also short answer question and carry 3 marks each.
• Q 35 to 37 are long answer questions and carry 5 marks each.
• There is no overall choice. However internal choice have been provided in some
questions.
• Use of log tables if necessary. Use of calculators is not allowed.

1. What are the oxygen moles in 0.5 mol of CaCO3 ?

(a) 1 mol (b) 0.2 mol
(c) 1.5 mol (d) 3.0 mol
2. What is the unit of wave number (v) ?
3. The general configuration of f’ block is
(a) (n-1) f 1-14 nd0-1 ns2 (b) (n-1)f0-1 nd2 ns2
(c) (n-2) f1-14 (n-1) d0-1 ns2 (d) (n-2) f1-14 (n-1)d0-2 ns0-1

4. The shape of IBr–2 is

(a) Tetrahedral (b) Planar
(c) Linear (d) V-shape
5. What is the pressure of the gas in tube

6. Arrange the following in order of decreasing boiling point : Be, Mg, Ca, Sr
7. f H0 for Graphite is ___________ .
8. Nature of NaH is ___________ .

Sample Paper 249

Q.9 - Q.10 Assertion-Reason Type Questions
Each question contains statements-1 (Assertion) and Statement-2 (Reason)
Examine the statements carefully and mark the correct answer according to
the instruction given below:
A. If both the statements are true and statement-2 is the correct explaination
of statement-1.
B. If both the statements are true but statement-2 is not the correct explanation
of statement-1.
C. If statement-1 is true and statement-2 is false.
D. If statement-1 is false and statement-2 is true.
9. Statement-1 For reaction A + B C, K = 4 on addition of catalyst K
becomes more than 4.
Statement-2 Catalyst only helps to attain the equilibrium faster from either
end of reaction.
10. Statement-1 Cl2 + 2OH– ClO– + Cl– is a disproportion reaction.
Statement-2 In disproportionation, the same element get oxidised as well
as reduce.
11. Complete the reaction
H2(g) + Pd2+ (aq.)
OR
CO(g) + H2O(g) 673K
Catalyst

12. Why ammoniacal solution of alkali metal is blue in colour?

13. What is a producer gas?
14. Write the IUPAC name of following
NO2

OR
Cl
CH3

15. What does B.O.D. stands for?

16. Calculate number of atoms in 52u of He.
17. Which series of lines of the hydrogen spectrum lie in the visible region?
18. Write the name of element with highest electron gain enthalpy.

250 Chemistry Class XI

19. Draw the shape of ClF3.
OR, Draw the shape of SF6.
20. hat is the unit of a’ in van der aal's equation
21. (i) What are the number of waves made by a Bohr electron in an orbit of
maximum magnetic quantum number 3?
(ii) If kinetic energy of a particle is doubled. What will happen to de Broglie
wavelength as compared to previous de Broglie wavelength.
22. (i) Why PbCl2 is more stable than PbCl4?
(ii) Why Electron gain enthalpy of Mg is positive?
OR
(i) Second I.E. (Ionisation Enthalpy) is always more than first Ionisation
energy.
(ii) hy first electron gain enthalpy of sulphur is more negative than
oxygen.
23. Balance the following reaction by (ion-electron or oxidation number method)
Cl2O7(g) + H2O2 (aq.) → ClO2– (aq.) + O2 (g) + H+ (Acidic medium)

24. (i) hat is the difference between hydrolysis and hydration

(ii) Arrange the following in order of increasing electrical conductance
CaH2, BeH2 and TeH2.
25. A sample of 0.5g of an organic compound was treated according to jeldahl's
method. The ammonia evolved was absorbed in 50 ml of 0.5 M H2SO4. The
residual acid requirede 60 mL of 0.5 solution of NaOH for neutralisation.
Find the percentage composition of nitrogen in the compound.
26. (i) Out of benzene, m-dinitrobenzene and toluene, which will undergo
nitration most easily and why?
(ii) hat effect does branching of an alkane chain has on its boiling point
27. (i) What is Eutrophication?
(ii) What is the action of F– on enamel present on the surface of teeth?
OR
(i) What is the upper limit concentration of lead in drinking water?
(ii) What is smog? Classify them as reducing smog or oxidising smog.

Sample Paper 251

28. A crystalline salt on being rendered anhydrous loses 45.6% of its weight.
The percentage composition of the anhydrous salt is
Al = 10.50%, K= 15.1%, S= 24.96%, O=49.92%
Find the simplest formula of the anhydrous and crystalline salt.
(Atomic Mass
hv : K= 39, Al = 27, S = 32, O = 16).
29. Explain following with example :
(i) Aufbau's Rule (ii) Hund's Rule (iii) Pauli's Exclusion Principle
OR
An ion with mass number 81 contains 31.7% more neutrons as compared
to protons. Assign the atomic symbol.
30. Explain the bonding in SF6 using hybridisation concept and define what is
hybridisation.
OR
On the basis of molecular orbital theory find the bond order, molecular
orbital configuration and magnetic nature of O2+.
31. erive van der aal's equation :

an 2
P (v nb) nRT
v2

32. Explain Born Haber cycle with by considering example of formation of

MgCl2 as given in the chemical reaction
Mg(s) + Cl2(g) → MgCl2(s)
33. Give suitable reasons :
(i) A solution of Na2CO3 is alkaline why?
(ii) Beo insoluble but BeSO4 soluble in water why?
(iii) Lithium salts are commonly hydrated as compare to other alkali metal
ions. Why?
34. Arrange following in order of increasing stability
+
(a) (CH 3 )3 C

CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2

(b)

NO2 OCH3 CH3

252 Chemistry Class XI

 • • • •
(c) CH3CH2, CH3, CH2–CH= CH2, CH = CH2
OR
(i) What is ambident nucleophile? Mention one example.
(ii) Distinguish between homolytic and hetrolytic bond cleavage.
(iii) Which one is stronger acid and why

35. (a) hat is a buffer solution Give example.

(b) hat is common ion effect
(c) efine e-Chatlier principle and explain effect of following :
(i) Change of concentration (ii) Change of pressure
OR
(a) Find out Kc for following reaction
2NOCl(g)  2NO(g) + Cl2(g) ; Kp = 1.8×10-4 at 500K
(b) Kp = 0.04 atm at 899K. What is the equilibrium concentration of C2H6
where it is placed in a flask at 4.0 atm pressure and allow to come to
equilibrium
C2H6  C2H4(g) + H2(g)
(c) What is the unit of Kp for the following chemical reaction?
2NH3(g)  N2(g) + 3H2(g)

36. (i) Show with the help of chemical reaction that Al shows amphoteric
behaviour.
(ii) Draw the structure of (a) B2H6 (b) Boric acid.
(iii) Write the formula of Borax.
OR
(i) Explain Lewis acid strength
BF3 < BCl3 < BBr3 < BI3

Sample Paper 253

 (ii) What are silicones? Give reaction for formation of chain silicones.
(iii) Why CO is poisionous in nature?
37. (i) Explain with the help of mechanism
NO2

Con. HNO3
Con H2SO4

(ii) Draw the Newman structure of (a) 2-Methyl butane

(b) 1-Methyl prop-1-ene

(iii) Calculate total number of and bond(s) in

OR
(i) Explain olbe's electrolysis with mechanism.
(ii) State Huckel Rule's.
Check whether is an aromatic or non aromatic, anti-aromatic.
(iii) Write the product

****

254 Chemistry Class XI

 SAMPLE PAPER - II
SUB : CHEMISTRY
CLASS - XI
Time Allowed: 1 hr Maximum Marks : 70
General Instructions:
• All question are compulsory
• Q 1 to 20 are very short answer objective type and each carries 1 mark each.
• Q 21 to 27 are short answer question and carry 2 marks each.
• Q 28 to 34 are also short answer question and carry 3 marks each.
• Q 35 to 37 are long answer questions and carry 5 marks each.
• There is no overall choice. However internal choice have been provided in some
questions.
• Use of log tables if necessary. Use of calculators is not allowed.

SECTION-A
1. The number of nodal planes in px orbitals is
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 0
2. Which of the following has smallest bond angle?
(a) H2O (b) H2S (c) NH3 (d) SO2
3. For a reaction to be spontaneous at all the temperature:
(a) G –ve, H +ve, S +ve
(b) G +ve, H -ve, S +ve
(c) G –ve, H -ve, S - ve
(d) G –ve, H -ve, S +ve
4. Which is is most strongly hydrated?
(a) Li+ (b) Na+ (c) K+ (d) Rb+
5. Which of the following has largest ionic radii?
(a) Na+ (b) Mg2+ (c) F– (d) O2–
6. When carbon is bonded to four other atoms or groups it uses ________
hybrid orbitals.
7. Surface tension ____________ with increase in temperature.
8. The second electron gain enthalpy is ________.

Sample Paper 255

 Directions for Question No. 9 and 10 : A statement of assertion (A)
followed by a statement of reason (R) is given. Choose the correct option
out of the choices given below for each question:
(a) A and R both are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) A and R both are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is true but R is false.
(d) A and R both are false.
9. Assertion: The entropy of ice is less than that of water.
Reason: Ice has a cage like structure.
10 Assertion: London forces are much more stronger between Xenon atoms
than between Helium atoms.
Reason: Xenon atom is bigger than Helium atom.
11. Write empirical formula of CH3COOH and K2CO3
Or
efine mole fraction.
12. Mention the quantum number which determines the energy of electron in
the H-atom.
Or
How many unpaired electrons are there in Ni2+ ion? (Given : Z =28)
13. State the condition for the formation of precipitate.
Or
Write the conjugate acid and conjugate base of HSO4-.
14. Using VSEPR theory draw the shape of XeF4 molecule.
15. Write IUPAC name of CH2 = CH – CH(OH)C CH.
16. In a reaction between an oxidant and a reductant which will give up
electrons and which will accept electrons?
Or
Calculate oxidation number of Cr in K2Cr2O7 and Mn in KMnO4.
17. Elements of which group form electron precise hydrides?
Or
Which part of periodic table is known as hydride gap?
18. State the reason of using certain alkali metals in photoelectric cells.
Or
ame those alkaline earth metals which do not impart colour to the flame.
19. Mention the compounds which are responsible for ozone layer depletion.
20. Cis But-2-ene has lower melting point that trans But-2-ene. Give reason.

256 Chemistry Class XI

 SECTION: B
21. Balance the following redox reaction in acidic medium by ion electron
method.
Zn(aq.) + NO3– (aq.) → Zn2+ (aq.) + N2O (g) + H2O
22. (i) Mg2+ ion is smaller than O2-ion, although both are isoelectronic. Give
reason.
(ii) Write IUPAC name and symbol for the element with atomic no. 120.
23. (i) Mention the number of radial nodes in 6s orbitals.
(ii) rite electronic configuration of e2+ ion. (Given, Z = 26)
Or
Calculate the wavelength of a ball of mass 0.1kg moving with a velocity of
10ms-1. (Given, h = 6.626 × 10–34 Js)
24. Describe on one method to remove permanent hardness of water.
Or
Give one chemical reaction each to show that hydrogen peroxide can act as
oxidising as well as reducing agent.
25. rite a short note on Greenhouse effect and global warming.
Or
State the point of differences between Classical and photochemical smog.
26. (i) Stability of carbocations follows the order 3° > 2° > °1. Explain this
order of stability of carbocations.
(ii) In what manner is Electromeric effect different from Inductive effect
27. (i) Mention the reason of not using Wurtz reaction for the preparation of
unsymmetrical alkanes from alkyl halides.
(ii) How will you convert Benzene to p-Nitrobromobenzene?

SECTION-C
28. The density of 3M solution of NaCl is 1.25g/mL. Calculate the molality of
the solution. (Given: Atomic masses: Na=23u , Cl=35.5u)
Or
Calculate the molarity of nitric acid (HNO3) in a sample having a density
1.41g/mL and mass percent of nitric acid in it being 69%. (Atomic mass:
N=14u, H=1u, O=16u)

Sample Paper 257

29. (i) The ball hit with a hockey by a player does not form a wave. State
reason.
(ii) rite the possible values of m’ for an electron with l 2.
(iii) Chromium has configuration 3d54s1 and not 3d44s2.Explain.
30. (i) Explain non linear shape H2S and non-planar shape of PCl3 using
VSEPR theory.
(ii) Can we have a diatomic molecule with its ground state molecular
orbitals full with electrons. Give reason for your answer.
31. Calculate enthalpy change for the reaction:
CH4(g) + 2O2(g) → CO2 (g) + 2H2O (l)
The enthalpy of formation of CH4(g) ,CO2(g) and H2O(l) are -74.8kJmol-1,
-393.5 kJmol-1 and 285.8kJmol-1 respectively.
Or
Calculate the bond enthalpy of Cl-Cl bond from the following data:
CH4(g) + Cl2(g) → CH3Cl (l) + HCl H = -100.3kJmol-1
Given: bond enthalpies of C – H, C – Cl and H – Cl bonds are 413, 326
and 431 kJmol-1 respectively.
32. A neon-dioxygen mixture contains 70.6 g dioxygen and 167.5 g neon. If
pressure of the mixture of gases in the cylinder is 25 bar, what is the partial
pressure of dioxygen and neon in the mixture? (Atomic mass: O = 16u,
Ne = 20u)
33. (i) Compounds of beryllium are much more covalent than other group
2 elements. Give reason.
(ii) Why does the solubility of alkaline earth metal carbonates and
sulphates in water decrease down the group?
(iii) When a metal of group 1 is dissolved in liquid ammonia a blue solution
is obtained initially. How do you account for the blue colour of the
solution?
34. (i) State the necessary compound to be aromatic according to Huckel’s
rule.
(iii) Explain why alkyl groups act as electron donors when attached to a
system.
Or
(i) Draw the resonance structures of Phenol.
(ii) Suggest a method used to purify the liquids which have high boiling
points and decompose below their boiling points.

258 Chemistry Class XI

 SECTION-D
35. (i) Boron trihalides(BX3) act as Lewis acids. Why?
(ii) Conc. HNO3 can be transported in aluminium containers. Give reason.
(iii) Pb(IV) is less stable tha Pb(II). Give reason.
(iv) Gallium has higher ionisation enthalpy than aluminium. Why?
(v) What do you understand by diagonal relationship?
Or
(i) Why CCl4 is resistant to hydrolysis but SiCl4 is readily hydrolysed?
(ii) Explain why there is a decrease in ionisation enthalpy from carbon to
silicon?
(iii) Boron does not form B3+ ion. Give reason.
(iv) How can you explain greater stability of BCl3 as compared to TlCl3?
(v) efine diagonal relationship between elements in modern period
table.
36. (i) Explain common ion effect with example.
(ii) The concentration of hydrogen ion in a sample of soft drink is 4 x 10-3
M. Calculate its pH.
(iii) hat is the effect of removal of CH3OH on the equilibrium of the
reaction, 2H2(g) + CO(g)  CH3OH(g).
Or
(i) Calculate H3O+ ion concentration of a water sample having pH = 6.78.
(ii) efine buffer solutions.
(iii) State ewis definition of acids and bases. Give one example of each.
37. (i) An alkene A on ozonolysis gives a mixture of propanal and pentan-3-
one. Write the structural formula of A.
(ii) Complete the following reactions:
organic peroxide
(a) CH3CH=CH2 + HBr
Dry Ether
(b) CH3CH2Br + Na
(iii) Write a short note on Friedel Crafts alkylation.
Or
(i) Why eclipsed form and staggered form of ethane cannot be isolated at
room temperature?
(ii) State Markovnikov’s rule.
(iii) Which out of Ethene or Ethyne is more acidic and why?
(iv) What happens with 2-Bromobutane is being treated with KOH
(alcoholic)?
****

Sample Paper 259

 SAMPLE PAPER - III
SUB : CHEMISTRY
CLASS - XI
Time Allowed: 1 hr Maximum Marks : 70
General Instructions:
• All question are compulsory
• Q 1 to 20 are very short answer objective type and each carries 1 mark each.
• Q 21 to 27 are short answer question and carry 2 marks each.
• Q 28 to 34 are also short answer question and carry 3 marks each.
• Q 35 to 37 are long answer questions and carry 5 marks each.
• There is no overall choice. However internal choice have been provided in some
questions.
• Use of log tables if necessary. Use of calculators is not allowed.

1. Which of the following d-orbital has double disc (body shooter shape)
(a) dxy (b) dz2 (c) dx2 – y2 (d) dyz
2. Among the following, the compound that contains, ionic, covalent and Co-
ordinate linkage is
(a) NH4Cl (b) NH3 (c) NaCl (d) CO2
3. Which of the following is a state function
(a) q (b) w (c) q + w (d) None of these
4. Which of the following alkali metal ion has highest ionic mobility
(a) Li+ (b) Na+ (c) k+ (d) Cs+
5. The correct order of electron gain enthalpy with negative sign of F, Cl, Br
and I having atomic number 9, 17, 35 and 53 respectively is
(a) I > Br > Ci > F (b) F > Cl > Br > I
(c) Cl > F > Br > I (d) Br > I > Cl > F
6. Arrange the following carbonations in order of their increasing stability
(CH3)3C+, CH3CH2+, (CH3)2CH+, CH3+
7. The IUPAC name and symbol of element with Z = 120 is _________.
8. Direction for Question No. 9 to 10 : A statement of assertion (A) followed
by a statement of Reason (R) is given.
(i) A and R both are correct, and R is correct explanation of A.
(ii) A and R both are correct, but R is not correct explanation of A.
(iii) A is true but R is false.
(iv) A and R both are false.
260 Chemistry Class XI
9. Assertion (A) : Enthalpy of graphite is lower than that of diamond.
Reason (R) : Enthalpy of graphite is greater than that of diamond.
10. Assertion (A) : Lower the critical temperature of the gas; more easily can
it be liqufied.
Reason (R) : Critical temperature is the temperature above which a gas
cannot be liquefied depending upon the pressure.
11. If ten volumes of dihydrogen gas react with five volumes of dioxygen gas,
how much volume of water vapour would be produced?
OR
Calculate the number of atoms in 32.0 u of He.
12. Why are alkali metals used in photoelectric cells?
OR
rite electronic configuration of Cr3+ ion. (Atomic No. of Cr = 24)
13. Draw the shape of ClF3 molecule according to VSEPR theory?
14. Write the conjugate acid and conjugate base of H2O.
OR
Write the relation between solubility and solubility product of Cr2(SO4)3.
15. Consider the given standard reduction potentials of following elements A,
B, C & D and arrange them in order of their increasing reducing power.
A = –3.71V, B = –0.76V, C = +0.34 V, D = +0.80 V
OR
16. Write the cause of temporary and permanent hardness of water.
1 . hy do magnesium and beryllium not import colour to the flame in the
flame test
18. Write IUPAC name of CH3 – CO – CH2 – CHO.
19. Out of Cis-But-2-ene and Trans-but-2-ene which has greater boiling point
and why?
20. efine Biochemical oxygen demand.
21. (i) hat is the lowest value of n that allows 'g' orbitals to exist
(ii) hy 4s orbital is filled before 3d
OR
Calculate wave number for the longest wavelength transition in the Balmer
Series of hydrogen atom.

Sample Paper 261

22. Explain why?
(i) iH1 of ' ' is more than that of 'O'.
(ii) A cation is smaller than parent atom.
23. Balance the following redox reaction in acidic medium by ion electron
method.
Cr2O72–(aq.) + SO2(g) → Cr3+(aq.) + SO42–(aq.)
24. Write chemical reactions to justify that H2O2 can act as an oxidising as well
as reducing agent.
OR
(i) What is water gast shift reaction?
(ii) What do you mean by 20 vol. H2O2?
25. In sulphur estimate, 0.157 g of an organic cmpound gave 0.4813 g of
barium sulphate. What is the percentage of sulphur in the compound?
26. Write chemical equations to covert:
(i) Ethyne to Ethanal
(ii) Benzene to m-Nitrotoluene
2 . efine smog. How is classical smog different from photochemical smog
OR
Explain the following terms:
(a) Green house effect
(b) Green chemistry
28. Calcium carbonate reacts with aqueous HCl according to the reaction:
CaCO3(s) + 2HCl(aq.) → CaCl2(aq.) + CO2(g) + H2O(l)
What mass of CaCO3 is required to react completely with 25 mL of 0.75
M HCl?
2 . (i) State Hund's rule of maximum multiplicity of electrons.
(ii) The mass of an electron is 9.1 × 10–31 kg. If its K.E. 3.0 × 10–25 J,
calculate its wavelength.
30. N2 is diamagnetic while O2 is paramagnetic. Explain on the basis of
molecular orbital theory.
OR
Explain the structure of PCl5 according to hybridization. Why all P – Cl
bonds.

262 Chemistry Class XI

31. What will be the pressure exerted by a mixture of 3.2 g of methane and
4.4 g of carbon dioxide contained in 9 dm2 flask at 2 C.
OR
Calculate the compressibility factor for CO2, if one mole of it occupies 0.4
litre at 300K and 40 atm. Comment on the result.
32. The combustion of 1 mol of benzene takes place at 298K. After combustion
CO2 and H2O are formed and 3267 kJ mol–1, fHO(H2O) = –393 kJ mol–1.
OR
For the reaction : 2A(g) + B(g) → 2D(g), UO = –10.5 kJ and S° = –44.1
J K–1. Calculate G° for the reaction, and predict whether the reaction will
occur spontaneously.
33. Complete the following reaction equations:
(i) Li(NO3)2 →
(ii) BeCl2 + LiAlH4 →
(iii) Ca(OH)2 + Cl2 →
34. (i) Out of NO2 – CH2 – O and CH3 – CH2 – O– which is more stable
and why?
(ii) Why is it necessary to prepare Lassaigne extract for detection of N, S
and halogens?
(iii) efine the term hyperconjugation.
35. (i) State e Chatelier's principle.
(ii) Calculate the pH of 10–8 M HCl.
(iii) A sample of HI (g) is placed in flask at a pressure of 0.2 atm. At
equalibrium the partial pressure of HI (g) is 0.04 atm. What is the Kp
for given equilibrium?
2HI (g)  H2(g) + I2(g)
OR
(i) efine common ion effect.
(ii) Write the relationship between Kp and Kc for the reaction:
N2(g) + 3H2(g)  2NH3(g)
(iii) Equal volume of 0.002 M solutions of sodium iodate and cupric
chlorate are mixed together. Will it lead to precipitation of copper
iodate? (For cupric iodate Ksp = 7.4 × 10–8)

Sample Paper 263

36. (i) Draw the structure of Diborane indicating electron precise and
electron deficient bonds.
(ii) Give reason for the following :
(a) PbCl4 is powerful oxidising agent.
(b) Fullerenes are the purest allotropes of carbon.
(c) N – N bond dissociation enthalpy is less than P – P bond
dissociation enthalpy.
OR
(i) What happens when (give chemical equation) :
(a) Borax is heated strongly.
(b) BF3 is treated with LiH.
(ii) Give reason for the following :
(a) NaBiO3 is good oxidising agent.
(b) Graphite acts as a good lubricant.
(c) Boric and acid is a weak acid.

37. (i) Propanal and pentan-3-one are the ozonolysis product of an alkene.
What is the structural formula and IUPAC name of alkene?
(ii) Give the main products of the reactions:
Anhydrous AlCl3
(a) C6H6 + CH3Cl
Dry ether
(b) CH3Cl + Na
(c) CH3 – CHCl – CH2 – CH3 + KOH(alc.) →
OR
(i) Give chemical euqation for each of the following :
(a) Decarboxylation
(b) Friedel Craft acetylation
(ii) Addition of HBr to propene yields 2-Bromopropane, while
in the presence of benzoyl peroxide, the same reaction yields
1-Bromopropane. Explain and give mechanism.
****

264 Chemistry Class XI

 SAMPLE PAPER - IV
SUB : CHEMISTRY
CLASS - XI
Time Allowed: 1 hr Maximum Marks : 70
General Instructions:
• All question are compulsory
• Q 1 to 20 are very short answer objective type and each carries 1 mark each.
• Q 21 to 27 are short answer question and carry 2 marks each.
• Q 28 to 34 are also short answer question and carry 3 marks each.
• Q 35 to 37 are long answer questions and carry 5 marks each.
• There is no overall choice. However internal choice have been provided in some
questions.
• Use of log tables if necessary. Use of calculators is not allowed.

SECTION-A
1. Number of matamers possible for molecular formula C4H10 are _______.
OR
Functional isomer of CH3CH2CHO is ___________.
2. Among the following, the least thermally stable is ?
(a) K2CO3 (b) Li2CO3
(c) Na2CO3 (d) Rb2CO3
3. Van der waals constant is a maximum for
(a) He (b) Ne
(c) Ar (d) Kr
4. Orbital which is not possible
(a) 2p (b) 3d
(c) 3s (d) 3f
5. Which of the following is paramagnetic
(a) CO (b) O–2
(c) N2 (d) NO+
6. Which of the following is not correct?
(a) G is zero for a reversible reaction.
(b) G is positive for a spontaneous reaction.
(c) G is negative for a spontaneous reaction.
(d) G is positive for a non-spontaneous reaction.

Sample Paper 265

 Direction for Question No. 7 and 8 :
(i) If both assertion & reason are true and the reason is the correct
explanation of the assertion.
(ii) If both assertion & reason are true but the reason is the correct
explanation of the assertion.
(iii) If assertion is true statement but reason is false.
(iv) If both assertion and reason are false statements.
7. Assertion : Number of orbitals in 3rd shell is 9.
Reason : Number of orbitals for a particular value of n = n2.
8. Assertion : Ionic radius of Na+ is smaller than Na.
Reason : Effective nuclear charge of a+ is higher than Na.
9. What is the IUPAC name of picric acid.
10. Why noble gases have positive electron gain enthalpy?
11. How many molecules of SO2 are present in 11.2 L at STP?
OR
Calculate the number of atoms in 35 g of Li (Atomic mass of Li = 7 u).
12. For an isolated system, U = 0, what will be S ?
OR
Write the statement of third law of thermodynamics.
13. Calculate the number of sigma and pie bonds in C2H2?
14. Give the relation between Ka and Kb.
OR
Write the conjugate base of H2CO3.
15. Write the oxidation number of Cr in K2Cr2O7.
OR
Write the stock notation MnO2.
16. Give an example of electron deficient covalent hydride.
OR
Name the isotope of hydrogen which is radioactive in nature.
17. Potassium carbonate cannot be prepared by solvay process. Why?
18. efine the Boyle temperature or Boyle point.
19. Out of staggered and eclipsed form which is more stable and why?
20. What is the meaning of the term eutrophication with regards to water
pollution.
266 Chemistry Class XI
 SECTION-B
21. Explain why :
(a) The three electron present in 2p subshell of nitrogen remain upaired.
(b) Cr has configuration 3d5 4s1 and not 3d4 4s2.
OR
Calculate the radius of Bohr's fifth orbit for hydrogen atom.
22. (a) Show by a chemical reaction with water that Na2O is a basic oxide
and Cl2O7 is an acidic oxide.
(b) Name a species that will be isoelectronic with each of the following
atoms or ions, (i) F– (ii) Ca2+
23. Balance the following redox reaction in acidic medium
MnO4– + H+ + Fe2+ → Mn2+ + H2O + Fe3+.
24. What do you understand by the terms :
(i) Syn gas
(ii) Hydrogen economy
OR
What causes the temporary and permanent harness of water?
25. 0.40 g of an organic compound gave 0.3 g of silver bromide of Carius
method. Find the percentage of bromine in the compound. [Atomic mass
of Ag & Br are 105 and 80 u]
26. Propanal and pentan-3-one ate the ozonolysis product of an alkene. What
is the structural formula of alkene?
OR
Convert the following :
(a) 1-Bromopropane to 2-Bromopropane
(b) Ethanol to Glycol
27. Explain the following terms :
(a) Acid Rain (b) Global warming
OR
What are the reactions involved for ozone layer depletion in the stratosphere?
(a) Green house effect (b) Green chemistry
28. In a compound CxHyOz, the mass % of C and H is 6 : 1 and the amount
of oxygen present is equal to the half of the oxygen required to react
completely CxHy. Find the empirical formula of the compound.

Sample Paper 267

29. When light with a wavelength of 400 nm falls on the surface of sodium,
electrons with a kinetic energy of 1.05 × 105 J mol–1 are emitted.
(a) What is the minimum energy needed to remove on electron from
sodium?
(b) What is the maximum wavelength of light that will cause a
photoelectrons to be emitted?
30. (a) Describe the hybridisation in case of C2H2.
(b) Which out of NH3 and NF3 has higher dipole moment and why?
OR
(a) Use molecular orbital theory to predict why the He2 molecule does
not exist?
(b) Compare the stability of O2 and O2+ on the basis of molecular theory.
31. Pressure of one gram of an ideal gas A at 27°C is found to be 2 bar. When
2g of another gas (ideal) B is introduced in the same flask at the same
temperature the pressure become 3 bar. Find a relationship between their
molecular masses.
OR
Explain the following terms :
(a) alton's law of partial pressure
(b) Surface tension
(c) Coefficient of viscosity
32. The standard enthalpy of combustion of Surcose (C12H32O11) at 298 K
producing CO2(g) and H2O(l) is –5200.7 kJ mol–1. If fH° of CO2(g) and
H2O(l) are –393.0 kJ mol–1 and –286 kJ mol–1.
OR
Explain the First law of thermodynamics and how can you prove the
following relation :
H = U + P V from the first law of the thermodynamics ( U = q + w)?
33. Assign reason for the following :
(a) Potassium carbonate cannot be prepared by solvay process.
(b) Be and Mg do not give characteristics colour to the flame.
(c) Alkali metals are strong reducing agent.
34. Explain the resonance effect and draw the resonance structures of
CH2 = CH – CHO. Indicate the relative stability of the contributing
structures.

268 Chemistry Class XI

 SECTION-D
35. (a) Addition of HBr to propene yields-2-bromopropane, while
in the presence of benzoylperoxide, the same reaction yields
1-bromopropane. Explain and give tis mechanism.
(b) Identify A, B, C & D

(c) Give a chemical test between ethen and ethane.

OR
(a) Out of benzene and toluene, which will undergo nitration more easily
and why?
(b) Explain the following :
(i) Friedal - Craft reaction
(ii) Wurtz reaction
36. (a) hat is solubility product How is it different from ionic product
(b) Equal volume of 0.02 M solutions of sodium iodate and cupric
chlorate are mixed together. Will it lead to precipitation of copper
iodate? (For cupric iodate Ksp = 7.4 × 10–8).
OR
(a) efine e-Chatelier principle.
(b) Explain ionic product of water. hat is the effect of temperature on
ionic product of water?
(c) Calculate the pH of 10–10 M NaOH solution.
37. (a) Draw the structure of diborane.
(b) Explain the following reactions :
(i) Silicon is heated with methyl chloride at high temperature in the
presence of Cu.
(ii) Hydrate alumina is treated with aqueous NaOH solution.
OR
(a) What are silicons. If the starting material for the manufacture of
silicons is RSiCl3, write the structure of the product formed.
(b) Complete the following reactions :
(i) B2H6 + NH3 → (ii) H3BO3 + H2O →
(c) Explain Inert pair effect.
****
Sample Paper 269